1979_Microcomputer_Development_Systems 1979 Microcomputer Development Systems
User Manual: 1979_Microcomputer_Development_Systems
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 256
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
microcomputer development systems and subsystems Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve reliability, function or design. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit described herein; neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others. EXbug, EXORciser, EXORdisk, EXORprint, EXORterm, MDTL, MECL, MICRObug are trademarks of Motorola Inc. Copyright Motorola Inc., 1979 "All Rights Reserved" Printed in Switzerland EUROPEAN MOTOROLA SEMICONDUCTOR SALES OFFICES DENMAA~ Sales Othces Hans Bockler·Strasse JO MotOf'OI.AJS Giadsaxeve,J70 2860Soborg Tel. (01)67 44 22 FRANCE Motorol. Semlconducteurs 5.A. Headquarter 15·17, avenue de Segur 75007 Pans Tel 5515061 Salesorhce 42.avenuedeLaPlame·Fleune 36240 Meylan (Grenoblel Tel 176)902261 SOUTH AFRICA MotOfOI.S.p.A 3012 Langenhagen _ Hannover Tel (0511)782037138 Headql,lilrler VlfnSbergerstrasse 43 8500 Nurnberg 20129M"ano Tel 73861411213 Molorol, S.p.A. Tel (0911)65761 SalesOlt,ee D,vISlone Sem,condullon Voade' Barroce,a 2 7032Slndel1,ngen Tet(0703)163074175 40138 Bologna Tel (051)533446 SPAIN 10·12. Mount Stree!. TelevISion House ManchesterM25WS.Lancs Tel (61)833073118330734 MOlorol. Espana 5.A. Capitan Haya 55 Maarl(]20-TeI.2790802 Sales Olt,ce Colvilies Road. Kelvin ESlale East Kllbflde. Scotland Tel. (3552)391 01 SWEDEN Motorol.AB VIJebelgsvaegen 19 17140 Solna - Tel (06)820295 SalesOlllce Via COslantlno Maes 68 00162 Roma - Tel 8314746 WEST GERMANY Motorola GmbH, Ge.chiittsbe... ich H.lbl.i[ar Heaaquarter MunChne.·Strasse 18 8043 Unterlohnng Tel (089)92481 Molorol.lId. Headquarter York House, EmprreWay WembleyMrddlesex Tel (01)90:28836 Tel 7861164 Stralsunde,S,rasse 1 Abrahamlmcoln,SI'u"e 26 6200Wlesbaaen Tel (061211761921 UNITED KINGDOM Molorol. South Able. (Ply) ltd. PO Bo> 39586 Bramley 2016 V,a eno MenOH' 11 HOLLAND HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN OPERATIONS SWITZERLAND Motorol. Inc. SemiConductor Group IS. chemin aela VOII·CrElUSe P.O. Bo~ 8 - 1211 Gen~ve 20 Tel (022)991111 SWITZERLAND NORWAY Motoroll B.V. Emmalaan41 Utrechl Tel (030)510207 Motoroll S.miconductor Product&SA Aile landstrasse 101 8702Zolltkon - Tel (01}655656 Motoroll AlB (Slrvic. Ollic.) B'ugt 1 Oslo 1 - Tfll 102)419140 FRANCHISED MOTOROLA SEMICONDUCTOR DISTRIBUTORS AUSTRIA Elb,te.. GmbH £ndreSSlrasse54-1236Wlen Tel (222)885611 EBV EI.kl,onlk Venrlabs·GmbH (Ma," Ollical Oberweg6 - D·6025Unlerhachlng Tel (089)611051 EaV Elektronlk Vlnriab,·GmbH In der MelneWQrth 9 a - 03006 8urgweael llHannover Tel (05139)5036 BELGIUM Diode Belgium Rue P,card 202·204 Tel. (02)42851 05 1020 Bru~elles 00210 HelSInki 21 FRANCE Belllon Electroniqua Zone InauSlnelle ae Kerscaol8resl 29219 Le Relecq·Kerhuon - B P 16 Tel. (98) 260303 C.ldla S.A. 53.,ueCharles·Fri!!rot Tel. (01) 581 0020 94250 Genlilly SOUTH AFRICA l'Elaclron 704 Main Pretoria Road. Wynberg Tul. PO 80~ 10544. Johannesburg 2000 Tel. 406296 8.V. Diode Hollanllaan 22 - Ulrecht Tel (030}664214 M.nud .. Nederllnd B.V. Meerstraal1 5473 lG Heeswl)k (N 8) Tel (41[391252 EBV EI.ktronik Venrl.bs·GmbH Ale.anderSlrasse 42 - 07000 Siuligart 1 Tel \07111247481 FINLAND Equipamentos de Laborltorlo LOA Rua Pearo Nunes 47 - Lisbon I Tel 970251 HOLLANO EBV Elektronlk Ven,ieba·GmbH Myllusstrasse 54 - 0·6000 F.an~\url , Tel 10611) 72 0416 DENMARK DI&trlbut....n InterelkoApa Hoveagaden 16 - 4622 Havarup Tel. (03) 38 5716 Field O~ VeneenteklJanlle 16 Tel. (90)6922577 EBV Elaklronlk Venrlaba·GmbH Ostslrasse 129 - 04000 Dvsseldorf Tel (0211)84646 PORTUGAL Mlcadonlali ElectronlCI LId. Chafllaou - P 0 Bo~ 240 - Thessalonlkl Tel 306600 M.cadonlln EI.ct,onlca LId. Lloyd George 10 - A'hens Tel 121)3609571 Jermyn GmbH Posllach 1160 - 06277Camberg Tel (064341231 SPAtN P0 80~ Hispeno ElectroniCI SA (Main Ollice) Pollgono IndustfiSI 'Urtlnsa" Apar,aoo de Correos 48 - Aicorcon (Madfld) Tel (01)6194108 25 Hispano ElaClronlca S.A F1 Tel 1070731604116042 Jermyn GmbH Rathelbecks(.ass(' 262 04000 Ousselaofl12 Te(1021112030g41203095 MUTRON. Muner .. Co KG Botrlstrasse 22 02800 Bllm...'" 1 Tfll104211310485 PO 80~ 164 SWEOEN Inlerelko AB. Box 32 - 12221 Enskede Tel 106)132160 Mllcom LTD. Motoroll Building Nlloo Street. Vandk Square - Teheran Tel 661214115 MUTRON. MLilier .. Co KG Theodo' HeussAlnq 28 05000 Kol" 1 TP.1102211122424 MUTRON. MLilier .. Co KG ASber;k~lrasSfl 18 02100 Ha,nhll'G 90 Tel (0401 76~ 30 28 C.ldtalllnlni S.p." (Main Olllca) Via Fill Gracchl 36 - 20092 Clnlsello Balsamo (MI) Tel 102)6120041 RTG. E. Sprlngorum GmbH + Co (Main Olllce) Po.,tlach 426 046000n'tn,,,nlll T,,'(0231>549<;1 C.lcllelt.ll.n. S.p.A. Via Tu'atl33 - 40055 Cas'enaso (Bolognaj Tel (051)7880761767034 ATG. E. Springorum GmbH + Co Fllp.d'Kh Ellerl Dam", 112 0 200() Hafllbu'<.,l 10 if'I(040)69.)7061,62 eelcllaltlnlnl S.p.A. Via Mombarcaro 96 - 10136 TO'lno Tel (11)3593121359369 RTG. E. SpnniOrum GmbH + Co Ungp,erstrasse 43 0l1000 MunCh"" 40 Tel (089)366500 C.ldl,nlnlnl S.p.A. Via Anconlta(1o 6/4 - Padova Tel (049)687709 RTG. E. Springorum GmbH + Co Reuilinge. Slra~se 87 07000 Siullgan Dege.(cch Tel (071'1766428 Cramer 1t.1l1 S.p.". (Main Olllce) Via C"stolo,o Colombo 134 - 00147 Roma Tel (061517981 Etl. GrOI S.A. 5. rue Pascal - 94800 Vllle)ul) Tel. (01)6782727 RTG. E. Splingolum GmbH + Co. MendelsSohn Bdrtholdy SlIdsse 6 Tel (06121)527309 Cramarltlil. S.p.A. Via S SlmpliClano 2 Tel 102)809326 S.C.A.I.B. SA 80. rue d'Arcuell - S,lIc 137 94523 RunglS Cede~ Tel. (01)667 2313 SASCO Vanrlab von .Iaktronlschln Bau.lam.ntan GmbH (Main Ollie.) Hermann Oberth·Strasse 16 .. 0 6011 Pullbrunnb Munchen Tel (089)4611211 SI' Commerclale Tou"lec:trlc (M.in Olllca' 15·17. 80ulevara 8onrepos - 31008 Toulouse Tel.(61)621133 SASCO V.rtr'lb von Ilektronisch.n Bluel.m.nlan GmbH Postlach 3066 - 04005 DusseldodlMeerbusch J Tel. (02150) 1433 Ets. F. Feul,l.r S.A. (M.m Olllca) Rue aes TrOls·Glofleuses 42270 St·Priest·en·Ja,el (SI Etlennel Tel. (77) 746733 Ela. F. F.utrlerS.A. Avenue Laplace - Zone Industnelle 13470Carnoux Tel.(42)821641 aa F.ulrler lie FrlnCI 29. rue Ledru·ROllin - 92150 Suresnes Tel. (01) 7724646 Ets. GrOI S.A. IM.ln Olllc.) 13. rue V,ctor·Hugo - 8P 63 59350Sam(·Andre·lel·Lllle Tel.(20)512133 Eta. G'OI S.A. 14. avenue dil General·leclerc Tel (83)351735 54000 Nancy St' Commerclela Toul"lctric 80·83. QUal des OueYfies - 33100 Bordeau. Tel (56)865031 GERMANY AII ...d Na~e - En.t.chnlk GmbH SCl'lIlIerSlrasse 14 - 0·2065 OUlckbornlHamburg TeJ(04106)6121 Allred N.y. - Enat.chnlk GmbH Brunows,rasse 7 - 01000 Berllfl 27 Tel. (030) 43330 52 Allred Nay. - Enalec:hnlk GmbH HllaeshelmerSlfssse 31 - 0·3000 Hannover Tel (0511) 88 60 86 Allred Naye - Enltaehnlk GmbH B"kenslrasse 107 - 0 4000 Ousseldod Tel (0211)666'45 AII ...d Neya - En.teChnik GmbH Rhelnstrasse 24 - 06100 Darmstadt Tel. (06151) 2 64 46 AII ...d Ney. - Enatachnlk GmbH 8reltwlesenstrasse 25 - 0·7000 Stuttgart 60 Tel (0711) 736357 Allred N'.,.e - Enatlchnlk GmbH Mafia· Theresla,Slrasse 6 - 08000 Munchen 80 Tel (069)473023 Distron GmbH" Co. BehalmSlrasse 3·- 0·1000 Berlin 10 Tel (030)3421041145 C.ldtslllllln.S.p.A Via Lo,enzo II MagnifiCO 109 Tel (06)42365514271550 06200 W,esoadef1 SASCO V.nrleb von alektlonisch.n aluel,mlnten GmbH Post(ach 270 214 - 0·3000 Hannover Tel (0511)662586 Napoli 0·5000 Koln 1 A.M. Lock & Co Ltd. NevllleStree!. M,dllieton Road Oldham. lancs OL96lF Tel (06116520431 Celdis Ltd. 37·39 Loverock Road Readlflg. Berks. RG3. lEO Tel (0734)565171 H.wk. EI.ctronlca Ltd. Hawke House Green Street Sunbury on Thames. Mlaalese~ England Tel (9327)85577 Crellon Elaclronics LId. 380. Ba,h Roaa Slough, Berks SLI 6JE Tel (06286)4434 ITT Electronic Services EdiflourghWay Harlow. Esse~ CM20 (20fl Tel Har(ow (0279) 26 777 Ltd. S.p.A. 10139 TOflno Jllmynlndustrlas Vestry ESla,e - Sevenoaks. Kenl Tel (732)51174 SliveratlrLld. S.p.A. Via S Sofia 15 - 35100 Paaova Tel 22336 Mlcro·Marklllng LId. 396. Bath Roaa Siougn. 8erks SLI 6JO Tel 106286) 4422 N(GERIA Beckron Intlrnatlon.1 14.AlhSjl 8SShorun Sireet SW IkoYI - PO 80x 1896·- Lagos Tel 56629 YUGOSLAVIA Elektrotehna Ljubljln. 0·6000 Muncnen 2 8aaCann~tall Tachnoprojakt GmbH Vertflebsburo Dortmund Schlldslrasse 4 - 04600 Dortmund 30 Tel (0231)433682 EUROPEAN SEMICONDUCTOR FACTORIES Prtnted in SWitzerland ERA Elaktronlk San.yi V. Ticar.t A.S. Gall Mustala Kemal Bul 12 Onu. Is Hanl Kat4 079 - Yenlseh"IAnkara Tel 254933 SlIvlIslar LId. S.p.A. Via del Gracchl20 - 20146 Milano Tel (02)4996 ~~~~~1 ~)a~~~~ ~5';6 rachnoproJlkt GmbH (Mlln Olhce) Helnrlch·Ebne. Slfasse 13 - 0 7000Stullgart Tel (0711)561712 ERA Elektronik Sanlvi V. Ticerlt A.S. Eskl 8uyukaere Cad 491A.4 Levent ISlanbul Tel 646500 Bologna SASCO Vertrl.b von elaktronl,chan aauillmlnt.n GmbH Stallienoorgsirasse 24 - 07000 Stuttgart I Tel (0711)244521 SPOERLE Electronic ZwelbruckenSlfasse 1 Telj069)227417 6008lufl<.:h UNITED KINGDOM Sllv.ralarLld. S.p.A Via Pa'Slello 30 - 00198 Roma Tel (06)6448841 SPOERLE EI'clronic Grosse Wltschgasse 9·11 Tel (0221)235096 5430 WeUlngen TURKEY 20100 Milano SASCO V.rtri.b von alaktronl,chan a.ualemanten GmbH LoreMer Slfasse 15 - 08500 Nurnoe.g Tel (0911)204152 SPOERLE Elactronic OI10·Hahn,Slfasse 13·· 06072 Drelelcn b Franklurl Tel (06103)3041 Elblle~AG Omni R.y AG Dulou'Slrasse 56 Tel (011340766 Cram .. Itlill S.p.A. Corso Trllano 109 - 10135 Tonno Tel (011)6192062/6192067 Sll~."tar SWITZERLAND Alb ZwysslQ Strasse 26 Tel (056)265641 00162 Roma Crlm .. Itlill S.p.A. Terza Trav8rsa DomeniCO Fontana. 22AIB Tel 255300 Cram .. It.ttl S.p.A. Via Ferrarese 1012 Tel {051)372777 AB Gosta Bilckstrom Aistromergatan 22 - 80x 12009 10221 Stockholm Tel.(08)541080 NORWAY Oil Tlndberg ElaktroAlS Skedsmogaten 25 - Oslo 25 Tel (02)197030 E~port·lmport Tllova 51 - PO 61000 LJubllana Tel (611320241 PHZ Tr.napot S.A. (lntraco BUlla.ng) UI Stawkl 2 - 00·950 Warsaw 1 Tel (004822)395079 Motoroll S.mlconduCl8urs SA. Canto Laouzello - LeM"all 31023 TouiouseCEDEX TeI161)401t88 34·1 Elektrot.hn.Ljubljlna Filiaia 8eograd Marsala T'la 611 11000 8eograd Tel 1011)696924 POLAND FRANCE Bo~ GERMANY Motoroll GmbH MunChner Strasse 18 8043 Unter(.ohflng Tel (089)92481 UNITED KINGDOM Motorola Semiconductors Ltd. Colvilies Road. [(elVin Estate East Kllbflde!GlasgowIScotiana) Tel13552139tOI Page Selector Guide Chapter 1 - Development Hardware The EXORciser and Its Module M68SDT EXORciser I . . .. M68SDT II EXORciser II . . MEX3870M MC3870 Emulator Module MEX6808-22,6816-22S 8K/16K Static RAM Modules MEX6812-1 2K Static RAM Module MEX6815-3 8K Dynamic RAM Module . . . . . MEX6816-1 16K Dynamic RAM Module . . . . MEX6816-1HR, 6832-1HR, 6848-1HR, 6864-1HR 16/64K Hidden Refresh RAM Modules MEX6816-22D, 6832-22, 6848-22, 6864-22 16/64K Dynamic RAM Modules MEX6820 Input/Output Module MEX6821-2 Input/Output Module MEX6845 CRT Control Support Module MEX6850 ACIA Module . . . . . . . . MEX6850-2 ACIA/SSDA Support Module MEX6854 ADLC Support Module MEX68488 GPIA Support Module MEX141000M MC141000/1200 Simulator Module MEX68CT MOT EST-I Component Tester . . . MEX68PI2 Printer Interface Module MEX68PP3 EROM/PROM Programmer Module MEX68SA2 System Analyzer II . . . . . . . . MEX68SPM System Performance Monitor MEX68USEB User System Evaluator B Module MEX68USM Universal Support Module . . . . MEX68WW,68XT Wirewrap and Extender Modules MGD6800DSM Data Security Module MGD8080DSM Data Security Module ...... . Development Systems MEX6801EVM MC6S01 Evaluation Module M68ADS./ADW. Autonomous Development System M68TD5. Total Development System . . . . M68PPR2 PDS PROM Programmer . . . . . M68MEB1 Microprocessor Evaluation Board M68CIM1 Audio-Cassette, Interface Module M68SXS. EXORterm 200/220 . . . . . . . . MACE29/800 Microcode Analyzer and Control Storage Emulator EXoSlice Family Introduction . . . . . . .. MEE4810 16-lnput/32-0utput MECL Module MEE48MTA MEXL/TTL Adapter Module MEE32RA 1 K x 32-bit MECL RAM Module MEE1PR MEXL PROM Programmer Module MEE1WW Universal MECL Wire-Wrap Board M68SFD EXORdisk II . . . . . . . . . . . iii 1·2 1-13 1-18 1-20 1-23 1-25 1-27 1-29 1-31 1-34 1-36 1-38 1-40 1-42 1-45 1-47 1-49 1-51 1-55 1-57 1-59 1-64 1-66 1-68 1-70 1-71 1-73 1-75 1-77 1-83 1-89 1-90 1-93 1-94 1-96 1-102 1-103 1-104 1-105 1-106 1-107 1-108 Peripherals Page .' M68SP702 Model 702 Printer M68SP703 Model 703 Printer M68SP779 Model 779 Printer M68SP781 Model 781 Printer M68MPR1 Medium Speed Printer M68SXD. EXORterm 150 . . . . ,.,10 1-112 1-114 1-116 1-118 1-119 Chapter 2 - Software Resident Software Co-Resident Editor/Asembler M68BASR010 M68COBOL010 M68FTNR012 M68MASR010 M68MPLR010 .......... _ Resident BASIC Inter'preter . . . . Resident ANS COBOL Compiler Resident FORTRAN Compiler .. Resident Macro Assembler and linking Loader Resident MPL Compiler . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 2-4 2-6 2-8 2-9 2-11 Cross-Computer Software 2-13 2-15 2-17 M68EML Simulator . . M68MPLC Cross Compiler M68SAM Cross Assembler Firmware 2-19 2-21 2-22 2-23 M68EAB1 Editor/Assembler/BASIC Module M68EAM1 Editor/Assembler Module MEC68MIN3E Minibug 3E Firmware M6810S1 Input/Output Supervisor . Chapter 3 - Microcomputer Subsystems Micromodules Micromodule Chassis, Card Cages, Power Supply M68MM01 Monoboard Microcomputer 1 . . M68MM01 A Monoboard Microcomputer 1 A . M68MM01 B Monoboard Microcomputer 1 B M68MM01 B1 A Monoboard Microcomputer 1 B 1A M68MM02 Central Processing Unit . . . . M68MM03 32/32 Input/Output Module M68MM04 8K/16K AROM/ROM Module M68MM05A,B,C Analog I/O Modules .. M68MM06 2K Static RAM Module . . . M68MM08,A MICRObug Monitor/Debug M68MM09E CMOS-RAM Module . . . . M68MM11 RS-232-to-TTY Adapter M68MM13A,B Digital Output (Contact Closure) Module M68MM13C,D Digital Input (OPtically Isolated) Module M68MM15A,A1 High-Level A/D Module M68MM15C Analog Output Module M68SAC1 Stand Alone Computer M68DIM. Display Interface Module M68MDM1 5" Display Monitor M68MDM9 9" Display Monitor . . iv 3-2 3-6 3-10 3-14 3-18 3-22 3-25 3-28 3-31 3-35 3-37 3-39 3-41 3-43 3-46 3-49 3-53 3-57 3-59 3-61 3-63 Power Supplies PL T800, 810, 820 Triple Output, Series Regulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PL T840, 841 Triple Output, Series Regulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 3-65 3-68 An additional power supply, designed initially for use with micromodules is Ihown on pages 12-2. Solid State Relays and I/O Modules M120D05A, 120D10A, 240D05A, 240D10A Chassis-Mount Relays MP120D2,3; 24002,3; P120D2,3; 24002,3 PC-Mount Relays lACS AC Input-Logic Output Isolation Module IDC5 DC Input-Logic Output Isolation Module OAC5 AC Load-Logic Input Isolation Module ODC5 DC Load-Logic Input Isolation Module MS16 I/O Mounting System . . . . . . . . . . v 3-71 3-74 3-77 3-78 3-79 3-80 3-81 ALPHANUMERIC LISTING OF DEVICES Device IAC5 IDC5 M68ADS./ADW. M68CIM1 · ... M68COBOL010M M68DIM. M68EAB1 M68EAM1 M68EML · ... M68FTNR012 M6810S1 · ... M68MASR010 M68MDM1 M68MDM9 M68MEB1 M68MM01 M68MM01A M68MM01B M68MM01B1A M68MM02 · . M68MM03 · . M68MM04 · .. M68MM05A,B,C, M68MM06 M68MM08,A M68MM09E M68MM11 M68MM13A,B M68MM13C,D M68MM15A,A 1 M68MM15C M68MMCC5 M68MMCC10 M68MMLC M68MMPS1 . M68MMSC M68MPLC M68MPLR010M M68MPR1 M68PPR2 M68SAC1 · ... M68SAM M68SDT · ... M68SDT II · . M68SFD · .. M68SP702A 10 M68SP703A 10 M68SP779A 10 M68SP781 A 1 A M68SXD. · .. M68SXS. · .. M68TDS. · .. M120D05A,10A Page Device Page 3-77 3-78 1-77 1-93 2-6 3-59 2-19 2-21 2-13 2-8 2-23 2-9 3-61 3-63 1-90 3-6 3-10 3-14 3-18 3-22 3-25 3-28 3-31 3-35 3-37 3-39 341 3-43 346 349 3-53 3-3 3-3 3-2 34 3-2 2-15 2-11 1-118 1-89 3-57 2-17 1-2 1-13 1-108 1-110 1-112 1-114 1-116 1-119 1-94 1-83 3-71 M240D05A,10A MACE29/800 . MEC68MIN3E MEE1PR MEE1WW .. MEE32RA · . MEE4810 . • . MEE48MTA MEX68CT MEX68PI2 · . MEX68PP3 · . MEX68SA2 . MEX68SPM . MEX68USEB MEX68USM MEX68WW MEX68XT MEX3870M . MEX6800 . . . MEX6801EVM MEX6808-22 MEX6812-1 · . MEX6815-3 .. MEX6816-1 · . MEX6816-1HR MEX6816-22D MEX6816-22S MEX6820 . . . MEX6821-2 . . . MEX6832-1 HR MEX6832-22 .. MEX6845 . . . MEX6848-1 HR MEX6848-22 MEX6850 . . . MEX6850-2 .. MEX6854 . . . . MEX6864-1 HR MEX6864-22 .. MEX68488 · . MEX141000M MGD6800DSM MGD8080DSM MP120D2,3 .. MP240D2,3 . . . . . . . MS16 OAC5 . . . · ...... ODC5 . . . . . . . . P120D2,3 . . . . · P240D2,3 . . . . · PLT800,81 0,820 PLT840,841 · .. vi ........ ........ ........ . ...... ........ 3-71 1-96 2-22 1-106 1-107 1-105 1-103 1-104 1-51 1-55 1-57 1-59 1-64 1-66 1-68 1-70 1-70 1-18 1-7 1-75 1-20 1-23 1-25 1-27 1-29 1-31 1-20 1-34 1-36 1-29 1-31 1-38 1-29 1-31 1-40 1-42 1-45 1-29 1-31 1-47 1-49 1-71 1-73 3-74 3-74 3-81 3-79 3-80 3-74 3-74 3-65 3-68 ® MOTOROL.A microsvs"tems IiIP.IIIIPIIIIiIUIIiBIDS IIIIIIP IIIi IDGDPDla liOPDODIPUGBP BIBIBnGS Here's what Motorola brings to your microcomputer THE COMPONENTS Starting your microcomputer system For MaIClmum Versatility . .. The M6800 Microcomputer System - an NMOS system that is rapidly becoming an industry favorite. Start with the basic MC6800 8-bit Microprocessor and supplement it with just the right MSI/LSI support chips you need (I/O, memory, etc.) to optimize your final design ... Start with the chip set that precisely meets your design objective. Motorola manufactures the industry's most complete selection of solid·state microcomputer components to give you the performance you need and the design flexibility you want- Or - choose the MC6802/MC6846 combination that provides complete microcomputer performance with just two chips ... Or - go with the MC6801, a powerful microcomputer on a single chip that is, nevertheless, expandable with all M6800 support chips, should the need arise. And, when even greater throughput is desi red, choose the MC6809-an 8-bit processor with 16-bit internal processing capability. For Dedicated Applications ... Two complete, single·chip microcomputers that could provide the simplest solutions to complex problems: At A Glance", The MC3870 - an 8-bit NMOS system, that is ideal for low-cost, high·volume requirements; Choice of . .. Processing Capability The MC141000 Family - a 4-bit CMOS system for equipment demanding extremely low power require· ments_ 1-bit, 4-bit, 8-bit, 16-bit Choice of . .. Where High Speed Counts ... Two bipolar 4-bit slice families composed of LSI components designed for microprogr.ammable computer implementation of any desired complexity. Technology NMOS, CMOS, TTL, ECl Choice of . .. The M2900 Family - a Schottky TTL system with a clock frequency range of 8.3 to 9.5 MHz. Performance Medium Speed, High Speed The Ml0800 Family - a MECL system offering highest speed operation with a system clock frequency range of 10 to 15 MHz. Choice of . .. Chip Complements Special for Industrial Control Applications . . _ When the required answer from a computer is simply a yes-orono, on-or-off, high·or-Iow indicatiol'l\ as in many industrial control systems, the l-bit CMOS MC14500B Industrial Control Unit may provide the ideal solution. It offers simple design, simple programming and reliable performance_ Whatever your system needs, Motorola has the chip set that matches your design goals, conveniently and costeffectively. For more complete details, ask your Motorola reo presentative. Multi-Chip applications versatility, Single-Chip applications simplicity EXbug, EXORciser, EXORdisk, EXORprint, EXORterm, MECL, and MICRObug are trademarks of Motorola Inc. 2 design party. , , MICROSYSTEMS Instrumentation for System Development There are important differences between systemdesign with hardwired circuitry and designing with microprocessors. With hardwired, dedicated circuitry, once the necessary components have been functionally interconnected, the job is done; with microprocessors, when the hardware of the system has been defined, that is when the real design starts-the job of designing the program that turns a basic uneducated computer into a functional system dedicated to a specific task. The key to developing a dedicated microcom puter system and, ultimately, to manufacture and service the system, is an umbrella of support hardware and software ranging from evaluation and development aids to manufacturing and service instruments. The Motorola MPU/MCU Product Family is already complemented with an array of such user·oriented development products, and additional systems are being im· plemented as quickly as technological advances permit. It is part of a systematic plan to keep Motorola microcomputer elements foremost on the "preferred product" list of the system designer. At A Glance", Choice of, " System Development Tools An umbrella of support products that can be tailored to your system design needs ... and your budget. Page 4 Choice of, .. Software Support Subsystems for System Implementation If you implement a large number of systems with the same design, designing a microcomputer system with individual components often becomes the most practical way to maximize profits. But if the numb'er of systems you need is small, the design costs could be exorbitant. That is when it pays to consider the use of Motorola Micromodules. Micromodules are a series of up-to-date microcomputer subsystem boards, prewired and tested to yield complete systems with minimum additional design demands. Since they are produced in volume design costs are amortized over a significant production run. And since they come with a range of functional capabilities, they can give your system the characteristics it needs at a very competitive overall price. Assembly language or high·level language, Motorola software lets you design and debug your system with dedicated design systems. Page 12 Choice of. , , Modularized Microcomputer Subsystems Multilevel subsystems, replete with periph· erals, to let you start your hardware design at a higher level of componentry. Page 16 3 Choice of. .. dllllOP n& 111& 1 •J r Motorola supports its various MPU/MCU lines with an array of hardware and software development systems that meets the wide range of customer needs. Starting with a modularized, expandable concept for M6800 system emulationthe EXO Reiser-the system now transcends process technologies and supports a II Motorola microcomputer components. The newest 2-MHz NMOS M6800 Line, the CMOS MC141000 system, the single-chip NMOS MC3870 MCU, even Motorola's two bipolar processor families-all are emulated or simulated by the basic EXORciser in conjunction with dedicated plug-in accessories. It is a system that is never out of date; that is expandable with new At A Glance ... plug-in add-ons as quickly as new or improved component families are introduced; that offers unlimited flexibility at a modest cost. Complementing the development systems is a selection of compatible peripherals-a series of dot-matrix printers, a keyboard entry/display terminal, a dual floppy disk storage system. Each is equipped with the appropriate interface circuitry that adapts it to the EXORciser and other Motorola development systems. And Motorola facilitates the involved task of program development with a comprehensive software library of editors, assemblers, interpreters and compi lers that provides the man/machine interface in a variety of languages. Assembly language-of course. But also available are "translators" that permit high-level language entry with MPL, FORTRAN, BASIC and COBOL. At Motorola, product support development is a continuing large-scale effort that keeps pace with the development of the product itself. M6800 Development Systems: EXORc"er II EXORciser I } .. for maximum versatility EXORterm 220 } EXORterm 200 PDS famdv . for program development for lowest cost Add· On Accessories for Other MPU!MCU Lines: Exosl,ce} MACE .. ..... for bipolar processors MEX3870. MEX141000 . ..... for NMOS 3870 Systems .... for CMOS 141000 Systems Accessories for System Diagnosis and Manufacturing Support Software: Resident Software Options System Peripherals: EXORt.rm 150 EXORd"k " EXORpront 5 Display Terminal . Floppy Disk Storage System Dot-Matrtx Printero; &hB EIIIDilBr To develop a computer, it takes a computer. One with even greater capacity than the system under development. The EXORciser is such a computer, developed expressly as a design, evaluation and diagnostic instrument for Motorola microcomputer systems. Essentially, the EXORciser is an expandable "breadboarding" system that allows almost instantaneous emulation of any M6800-based microcomputer configuration, from the simplest to the most elaborate-and with optional accessories its powerful design and diagnostic functions can be extendeu to other Motorola microcomputer families as well ... the popular NMOS MC3870 Microcomputer, the CMOS MC141000 Microcomputer and even the highspeed bipolar M2900 (TTL) and M10800 (MECL) systems. Built-in programming and diagnostic routines facilitate the development and debugging of dedicated programs for each. Three versions of the EXORciser are currently available. Each consists of a cabinet with a built-in power supply, and a prewired busoriented motherboard with a basic complement of functional modules. Together, these form a complete development microcomputer, with the capability of adapting the unit to a specific design problem by adding optional interface circuitry or expanded memory capacity. The additional requirements are available as add-on modules, permitting the user to purchase as few, or as many, as needed for the anticipated end function(s) or the system(s) to be developed. Thus, the EXORciser is a system that is never out of date, being at all times upgradable as new and expanded microcomputer functions become available. ,*~;"J'!>W'_'-:'I"f~"~~~,f i;<":.'ii . EXORciser II - Contains an MPU II module, and a Debug II module. The MPU module mounts the MC68800 MPU, generating clock frequencies of 1.0, 1.5 and 2.0 MHz. This system, through its expanded Debug II capability, can operate in a "dual memory map" mode. This permits the debug programs to reside in an independent memory, leaving the full 64K memory capacity of the M6800 system available for the user's program_ The motherboard has provisions for up to 12 add-on-plug-in assemblies so that a system of almost any complexity can be rapidly assembled_ EXORciser I - Earlier version of above, uses MPU I and Debug I modules. Useful for operating at frequencies up to 1 MHz, with only a single memory map. Provisions for up to 12 add-on modules. 6 ...1 i&1 bllil OP&iOII It might be convenient to own a single complete development system; on that would help design every microcomputer that might ever be required, from the smallest to the largest. But it would be expensive. That is why the EXORciser contains only the basic electronics that is required for all systems, regardless of size. The remaining circuitry-various interfaces, add-on memory, etc.-is offered as modular options, to be purchased when and if demanded by system design. This expandable feature assures maximum utility at low cost. It also guards against equipment obsolescence because new modules with greater capabilities are constantly being developed as the technology advances. The Modules listed below expand the basic EXORciser capabilities for the development of microcomputer systems with M6800 type microprocessors. Add-ons for expansion of EXORciser capabilities to other MPUs and MCUs, and for even more sophisticated diagnostic functions, are described on subsequent pages. EXORciser Expansion Modules - All EXORciser II Modules will also operate with EXORciser r, but at a maximum frequency of 1 MHz. For EXORciser II and EXQRt.rm 220 11,1,5 .nd 2 MHz frequency) For EXORciser 1 and EXORt.rm 200 Function 11 MHz frequency limid MEMORY ADO-ON M68MM06 MEX6812·' M68MM09E2 2K Static RAM 2K Static RAM 2K CMOS RAM with battery M68MM09E4 4K CMOS RAM with battery MEX6815-3 8K Static RAM 8K Dynamic RAM MEX6816·1 HR MEX6916-1 16K Static RAM 16K Hidden Refresh RAM 16K Dvnamic RAM MEX6816·22D MEX6832-' HR 32K Hidden Refresh RAM 32K Dynamic RAM MEX6832-22 MEX6848·1 HR 48K Hidden Refresh RAM 48K Dvnamic RAM MEX6848-22 MEX6864·1 HR 64K Hidden Refresh RAM 64K Dynamic RAM MEX6808-22 ME X6816-22S MEX6864-22 I/O ADD·ON MEX6820 PIA Module with four B-blt I/O ports for parallel-onented peripherals MEX6821·2 MEX6850 ACIA Module MEX6850·2 AUXILIARY MODULES MEX68PPJA/8/M PROM Programmer MEX68USM Universal Support Module to Support 6800 lamlly of deVices MEX68PP3A/B/M MEX68USM MEX68SA Systems Analyser for Monitoring, AnalYZing MC6800/MC6802 Microcomputer Systems MEX68SA2 and trouble-shooting MEX68WW Universal Wlrewrap Module for prototype De\l8lopment MEX68WW MEX68XT Extender Module permits access to any development module from outside the EXORciser chaSSIS M~X68XT 7 OPIBn& B&a&iOnB ... The EXORterm 200/220 Development Stations add video display and keyboard entry facilities to the capabilities of the basic EXORciser/EXORciser II. They consist, fundamentally, of an integral card cage containing the EXORciser Debug Module and the MPU module. The cage has provisions for 6 more standard EXORciser modules, thereby providing considerable system design flexibility_ EXORterm 200/220 contains a high-quality CRT with a full 1920-character screen and easily readable 7 x 9 ASCII characters_ A 59-key detachable keyboard incorporates 12 special keys encoded to invoke functions unique to a development system in each of its three command levels .. ,DOS, EXbug and MAID_ Its serial communications link uses speeds up to 9600 baud for information exchange: • •• The Polyvalent Development System Family provides an ideal first step into the world of microcomputer design. With its full ASCII keyboard, a 5" CRT Monitor displaying up to 16 lines of 64 characters, an audiocassette interface for mass storage capability and a medium speed printer, it does not require any other terminal_ A ROM resident Editor/Assembler and BASIC Interpreter is also available allowing sophisticated microcomputer appl ications development. DEVELOPMENT SYSTEMS hrt Num""r Nama M.in Purpose Firmwar. MPU Modul. Fraq. RAM Included Option. M68TDS1 TDS1 MedIum SIze Software Minlbug 3E SAC 921.6 kHz 8K 5" CRT, Keyboard, Kansas City Interface, M68TDS2 T052 MedIum Size Software Mlnlbug 3E SAC 921.6 kHz 8K Printer Interface, EdItor/Assembler 5" CRT, Keyboard, Kansas City Interface, Printer Interface, Editor/Assembler/BasIc M68TDS3 T053 MedIum Size Software Mlnlbug JE SAC 921.6 kHz ,6K 5" CRT, Keyboard, Kansas C,ty Interface, M68TDS4 TDS4 Medium Size Software Mmlbug 3E SAC 921.6 "Hz '6K Printer Interface, Editor/Assembler ~ .. CRT, Keyboard, Kansas City Interface. EXORCiser 1 Software/Hardware EXbug 1.2 MPU 1 MHz Pnnter Interface. Editor/Assembler/BasIc M68SDTT2 RS232/TTY Interface M68SXS10200 EXOAterm 200 Software Exbug 1.2 MPU 1 MHz 12'" CRT. Keyboard M68SDTTU28 Use EXORCiser 1 Software/Hardware EXbug 1 2 Use 8 1 MHz RS232/TTY Interface M68SXS10280 Use EXORterm 200 Software EXbug 1.2 Use 8 1 MHz M68SDT2·2DM M68SDT2·2SM M68SDT2·2X EXORCiser 2, DynamiC EXORCiser 2, Static EXORCiser 2 Software/Hardware Software/Hardware SoftW8re/Hardware EXbug 2 EXbug 2 EXbug 2 MPU2 MPU2 MPU2 2MHz 2 MHz 2 MHz EXORterm 220 Software EXbug 2 MPU2 2 MHz M68SXS2202 8 12" CRT, Keyboard 32K Dvn 32K Stat RS232 Interface RS232 Interface RS232 Interface 12" CAT. Keyboard IIISIII The modular concept of the EXORciser/EXORterm makes these ideal instruments for expansion as a development system for MPUs/ MCUs other that the MC6800_ For example: The M141000 Simulator What the MEX3870M does for the MC3870 NMOS MCU, the MEX141000M does for the MC141000/1200 CMOS MCU ... it provides an EXORciser-based tool for debugging actual software configurations of the user's final system. The Simulator consists of a hardware module and an associated software package. Using the information generated by the Simulator, and the debug facilities provided by the Simulator, the user can find and correct problems in the source program. Thus, the Si mulator offers an economical and expedient means for developing new applications prior to committing the programs to the final production masks_ The 1'v16801 Support System The problem-before you can get a simple-chip microcomputer from the factory, you must come up with the program that converts the chip into a functional microcomputer. The program is then built into the read-only memory portion of the components you receive. The 6801 Support System is EXORciser/EXORterm compatible and is capable of operating with any of the existing M6800 modules, allowing the MC6801 software and hardware development in either the EXORciser 1/11 or EXORterm. The Support System consists of a control module, an extender cable terminated by a 40 pin male DIP plug and control software. This allows the user to evaluate and debug his own MC6801 system in either the single chip, expanded multiplexed or non-multiplexed mode, in real time (to be introduced). The EXOslice Family The EXOslice family, working with the EXORciser, provides the user with a mean of developping 2900 and 10800 4-bit slice Microcomputer systems. The EXOslice family includes high speed expandable 1 K x 32 bit MECL RAM modules for microcode storage, 16-input/32-output MECL modules and MECL-TTL adapter. A MECL PROM Programmer allows programming of MECL MCM10149 256 x 4 PROM devices. The FAST software provides a mean of dumping or loading user's files (configuration descriptions, microprogram) to and from several source or media (keyboard, papertape, cassette, diskette) and offers several debugging features for the user's microprogram. The M6809 Support System The same features are also available for the MC6809 microcomputer. The 6809 Support System is EXORciser/EXORterm compatible and also provides the user with USE (USER SYSTEM EVALUATOR) capability (to be introduced). The M3870 Emulator MACE 29/800 - Microcode Analyzer and Control Storage Emulator The MC3870 is a powerful, 8-bit, single chip Microcomputer (MCU) ideal for large-volume, dedicated appl ications. The MEX3870M is a plug-in module that converts any one of the EXORcisers into a real-time MC3870 Emulator. That is, by means of equivalent hardware and associated software-an appropriate cross-assembler and an F BUG control and diagnostic program-it converts the EXORciser into a development system customtailored for the MC3870 microcomputer chip. The cross-assembler provides an object file (on disk) from the MC3870 source code which is loaded into the Emulator Module. Subsequently, the debug routine of FBUG permits examination and change in the instructions of the user's operating program_ Then, when the program has been debugged, it can be loaded into ROM and plugged into an available socket on the Emulator, whereupon the board can be removed from the EXORciser and employed in the user's system to check out final system operation. The MEX3870M includes the hardware module and the appropriate software and cross-assembler. Additional requirements for implementation include the MOOS, Editor and 24K bytes of memory. This development aid supports the bipolar M2900 TTL and M10800 MECL 4-bit slice systems. It is intended to minimize the time required to develop microcode for custom processors built with bit-slice components. The MACE 29/800 provides Writable Control Storage (microprogram memory) and real-time microprogram diagnostic capabilities. Its chassis contains power supplies, a multilayer backplane, and a 1 O-slot card cage. PC modules containing the WCS, diagnostic, timing, control and interface hardware are mounted in the card cage, with adequate extra slots to house a user's prototype system. Alternatively the user's system may be developed externally, and interconnected with MACE via a cable interface system-or, the chassis may be used to house totally independent prototypes_ The MACE 29/800 is designed to work with the EXORciser which controls the system operation. All microprogramming tasks appear as M6800-oriented operations, with the necessary translation performed by a software package included with MACE. This takes advantage of the extensive hardware and software components that ;,ave been developed for the EXORciser, thereby reducing system cost. 9 IOOllllPil1 FIP lal&BI dill ••• The EXORciser/EXORterms (and their basic options) are very versatile instruments for M6800 Microcomputer development. Through emulation of a user's system they take the guesswork out of hardware and software design. And with thesE: additional modular options, they can be turned into complete, highly sophisticated post-design Centers. < P((O A ,z ei User System Evaluator (USEB) - MEX68USEB The MEX68USEB module is a second-generation addition to the Options array. It not only permits complete emulation ot an M6800 or M6802 Microcomputer system during design, it extends all the EXbug (diagnostic) functions into the user's prototype or final operating system. USE consists of three assemblies-a Processor Module, an Intercept Module and a Cable and Buffer Assembly. The Processor Module is used in place of the MPU Module originally supplied with the EXORciser and permits the sharing of the EXORciser's inherent capabilities with the user's external system. The Cable and Buffer Assembly plugs into the MPU socket at the user's system and transfers control of the user's system operation to the EXORciser or EXORterm. The intercept Module adapts the system for mounting the optional Systems Analyzer for even greater diagnostic power. The USE System may be pruchased to upgrade existing EXORcisers I and lA, or EXORterm 200, or these basic systems l'l1ay be purchased with the USE System replacing the original MEX6800 MPU Module. ',", Systems Analyzer This unique instrument can be used to enhance the capabilities of the EXORciser or EXORterm as a design tool, or as an independent, portable troubleshooting unit for field service of bus·compatible equipment. In field service applications, the Systems Analyzer derives operating power and I/O signals directly from the system under test. It can stop the system at any point in its program, step through the program, change the contents of the system memory, and monitor and record the MPU's operation during a selected portion of the program. It can even perform these functions without shutting down the operation of the system. In EXORciser applications, it adds the same options to the system's inherent program development capabilities. In conjunction with the EXORciser and USE, it offers the most powerful combination of development and diagnostic tools available for microcomputer work. 1 MHl Version, for EXORCiser I and IA and EXORterm 200 MEX68SA 2 MHz Version, for EXORciser II and EXORterm 220 MEX68SA2 10 manupaO&UPina System Performance Monitor - MEX68SPM The System Performance Monitor provides the means of monitoring an operational microcomputer system for the purpose of collecting data about processor utiliza tion which is used to optimize the eXisting program. Monitoriog consists 01 periodically sampling the address lines of the system under test. These samples are accumulated to produce a map of memory addresses and their corresponding freCluency of reterence. At the completion of an operation, the Mon'tor formats and prints a report on a control terminal. Tf,e wste'T1 is particularly useful for the analysis of complex computer programs and can result in greatly Imoroved software effiCiency. PROM Programmer - MEX68PP3 Once a program for the microprocessor system is designed and (lehuggecJ, It IS entcreli Intn a Read-Only Memory which become, p"n "i Ihe dedicated MPU nperated fond <,ystern Wher' an end ~\,.~tp.rn I') matlU facturerJ In large Quantities, trw,,, PI ogl arrom~d ROMs are often purchased In quantiTy ~rorn th!.: compunent ',upplie: Whpr, (lilly a ff'w ~nd s)'<;temo; art~ to be producect, the PfllJipment manLJfacturpr may elert to dse 3 pruwammal,le ROM iPROMI. (lr an Electrically Altelat·,I,· "ROM (E'iUM, :ilHJ dn 'he p,oq,arnrn"'g hlPlc,elf The PROM Progra;nrT'er VI/Iii tunctlon qL;'ckly. easdy illld IrH~xp~r1"r.,·t::'y Thf> PROM Programmer ,s pf:r tilt m thiS dt~~lgllp.d t(l1HI)(paTTl,j \jd:\f~tv of MOS f'Rorvh. E ROM, ,It,d b,pole, f'k()M., IIclud"'q 30 {j€,'v'Cf~ :V~Jt' p,lmhpJ'l fr,)IO G dl~h~Hl:,1 ''''~J!lI,JI':jI'tltrel~ It can vt-:tl!Y tht-: (1~.ltd I:' frlf~ PROI\~, rr:J:',ft~' ddtd f!("Jn": thf-! PROI\j\ ro 1ht' ,h,,,t·lopmp.l'l ::'y'')tc'rn Hl1.,M nll-rTlorv. and to ~r:JI:"tP.' J"othf'! t)leJ(.k\ :d riaLj trorT' (,:w rnPflh""V ~!!catlon PII)qr dlnf"T1.! ig ! tint:;' Vdf I~\ cieppndllig on PROM used Willi Soft,,,,,'e un C""etle MEXG8PP1A With Soll,,",-e I ) " Popel Tdpe !'v1f'X68PP3fl wir" Software r," MUOS Od.en" M[X68PP3M Component Support Modules -- MEX68USM The lJl1lvIJ rsal Support Ml)dult~ .(" a printed Clleu1t tino wrreWldO module Ilsed In ,u~port the 6800 fdl11iiy of d~vlf:e<; fhe lowPI oortlOIl ot th~~ h('cl~d con!alnS hilly dec{Jupd E XORr:I')I'f :ntert(JcP I(,qlc whl;" th~ tup portion !~~ d 'Nlrf~wrap dred rhf! nl(Hiule ,,, dl~() dVdddtJlp. wlth tactory ad upport <,pecdlcally Ihp MC6845 CRT Co"'roiler c!ev.ce thf' IIr1C()8488 ('t'IA deVice ,It the MC6854 Aill r: rlpv" e 11 Choice ot. .. 11100 SUPPOPG SOFGIIPB Human programmers speak one set of languages; machines understand another. Hence, a number of computer routines have been developed to automatically convert the instructions associated with the various "programmer languages" into a sequence of instructions that can be followed by the computer. Such translation programs are called assemblers, compilers or interpreters. Resident Software Options A resident development system provides the lowest program development cost where a number different M6800-based microcomputer systems are contemplated over a period of time. The software, designed for the EXORciser/EXORterm and PDS systems, includes an editor and an assembler/macroassembler. In addition, four high-level languages can now be used with the M6800 Microprocessor: FORTRAN, BASIC, MPL, and COBOL. Going hand-in-hand with the "translators" for programming purposes is the editor. This software routine permits the programmer to use a computer to make whatever changes may be required in creating, correcting or revising a program. The M6800 MPU Family is supported by a variety of such software programs in order to simplify the system designer's programming chores. Motorola provides a compatible family of resident software that permits M6800 program development using Motorola Development and Evaluation Systems. Firmware Motorola provides a family of support firmware ROM's that permits M6800 program development using Motorola Development and Evaluation Systems. User's Group Library The User's Group Library provides a collection of general purpose programs and routines developped for the MC6800 MPU family. The library includes Test and Debug Programs, 1/0 Routines, Data manipulation and operating routines as well as Mathematics packages The l,brMY is available either in binders form or on ca<;settes or diskettes media. 12 M6800 Resident Software Options Ordering Information and Minimum RAM Requirements (Bytes) EXOReiser/EXORterm PDS Software + EXOReiser/EXORterm EXORdisk II Co-resident Editor! Assembler M68EAM1 17KI I R OM ReSident I M68XAE6813 AlB 18KI M68SMDOS100 116KI I,ncluded in EXORDISK III Macroassp.mbler/ Linking Not available M68MASR010 AlB 116KI M68SMDOS100 124KI I,ncluded in EXORdisk III M68BASR010 AlB 18KI M68BASR010M 120KI Loader including 6801 Instruction set Resident BASIC M68EAB1 114KI IROM ReSident, Interpreter includes Editor! Assembled Resident COBOL Compiler Not available Not available M68COBOL010M 132KI Resident FORTRAN Compiler Not available Not available M68FTNR012M 124KI Resident MPL Compiler Not available Not available M68MPLR010M 156KI A suffix: Cassette B suffix· Papertape M suff, x: MOOS Diskette M6800 Firmware System Family Description Part Number PDS MEC68MIN2 Minibug 2-executive program MEC68MIN3E Minibug 3E-executive and debugging program with 8 break-points PDS capability I M68MM08A Micromodule Microbug-executive and debugging program with 8 break-points capability MEX68EX812 M6810S1 Debug module EXORciser 1 EXORterm 200 Input/Output Supervisor-CRT, Keyboard, Printer data handling PDS Exbug 1.2-executive and debugging program to be used With program \ 13 Choice of. .. SISGel pePiPDePBIS Peripherals are not necessarily an integral part of an MPU support line, but when designed for use in conjunction with a particular MPU development system they often precipitate savings by avoiding circuit redundancy. Motorola already supplies some dedicated peripherclls for the EXORciser development system and has more under consideration. Each peripheral is supplied with the necessary circuitry to perform the E XO Rciser interface function. EXORterm 150 EXORterm 150 is a display terminal and console expressly personalized for use with the EXORciser. In this role, it facilitates the exchange of data between the user and the EXORciser via a high quality video Interface in combination with keyboard entry and a serial communications link using speeds up to 9600 baud. To further enhance the efficiency of the User/ EXORciser Interface, special keys have been encoded to invoke functions unique to the EXORciser in each of its three command leveis, EXbug, MAID, and DOS. For user convenience, the functions represented by each of these 12 special keys are displayed on the 23rd and 24th line of the screen, As the command level is changed, the function of the respective key changes and is displayed accordingly. EXORterm 150 includes Extended Display ROM and Editing/Cursor and Page Mode Control Keys. Medium Speed Printer The MPR noiseless printer prints 80 characters per line at a speed of 30 characters per second on metal Iized paper (M68MPP1). It accepts 7·bit ASCII characters including Carriage Return and Line Feed codes and can be connected directly to the PDS products family (ADS, ADW, TDS). 14 EXORdisk II EXORdisk II is a dual floppy disk storage system that extends the capacity. of the EXORciser by up to 256,256 bytes of memory per diskette. It allows high· speed transfers because of fast headsettling time and logical sector arrangement. An interface card connects it to the EXORciser. The new software, MOOS, contained on a single diskette, permits random or sequential file organization and multiple I/O file activity. MOOS also features: job control files for batch-type use, file expansion with recopy, user-defined commands, user access to system routines, high-speed program loading, and binary memory image files to conserve disk space. Twenty MOOS commands provide the user with a comprehensive means to rapidly develop or modify software. The resident driver firmware is accessed by MOOS to control disk operations-various entry points are available to a user to perform certain operations. Specifically, a user has access to initialization and error checking, diskette operation, line printer drive and diskette mini·diagnostic routines. A minimum of 16K bytes of RAM, together with the EXORciser, and EXORdisk II provide a complete development system whose high·speed software capabilities can be matched only by much more expensive mini-computers . ...... ---- ... - ...-~--- '\ Dot-Matrix Printers Motorola offers a line of four dot-matrix printers to complement its microcomputer development systems. The line includes a full-range choice of features, such as: 80 and 132-column formats 60, 120 and 180 characters per second Bidirectional and logic-seeking print heads. All four printers are equipped with an Interface I/O Module and an Interconnection Cable Assembly that specifically adapt them to the EXORcisers and the EXORterm 200. In addition, these interface accessories permit the printers to be used with Motorola Micro· modules to provide more complete single-source availa· billty of microcomputer system components. The four models in the line are' Model 779 - a low-cost printer capable of printing from 80 to 132 columns of 5 x 7 dot-matrix at a rate from 21 to 90 lines per minute at 60 characters per second. Model 781 an 80·column charar.ter printer which features bidirectional. toglc·seeking movement of the print head enahllng throughput of up to 120 lines per minute. Model 702 - also equipped With bidirectional, logic· seeking print head, and with a head speed of 120 characters per second. ThiS model has 132 character print columns and IS capable of throughput from 45 to 1851pm Model 703 the top of the Motorola M,crosystems pnnter line. ThiS IS an Ideal printer for the business system. With a head speed of 180 characters per second. it provides high throughput rates from 70 to 280 Ipm. All models except 779 have tractor feed with a paper·out sensor Each uses standard computer paper from one to SIX parts. Model 779 has pinch roll feed and uses standard teletype roll paper. lOiDPDDDIOPU&8P 9U0919&8109 A high-level starting point for Microcomputer System Implementation Motorola Microsystems elevates the starting point for microcomputer system design from the customary "component" level to the board level. This pervasive line of subsystems includes a variety of assembled and tested plug-in "Micromodules" ranging from monoboard microcomputers, ready for dedicated programming to mix-and-match subassembly boards that give the designer a large number of system design and performance options. These subassemblies are supplemented by compatible support peripherals that reduce the hardware design and assembly phase of microcomputer system development to the simple interconnection of properly selected subsystems. The M icrosystem approach to microcomputer deSign is offered as an addition to, not necessarily a substitute for, fundamental design Ing With basic components. It is particularly suitable for equipment manufacturers with small-volume applications and limited development and manufacturing resources, or where design and development time-savings are of critical importance. 16 Choice of. .. PlliOPI II Choose from a selection of differently configured single-board microcomputers; add a suitable power supply and, perhaps, some additional external memory; put these into an appropriately available enclosure (or design your own); and you have a complete microcomputer-ready to receive your dedicated firmware (ROM, EROM or PROM) and go to work. IGBPI Motorola's Micromodule series of monoboard microcomputers offers a choice of variations to best match a particular end-use requirement. All boards use the popular MC6800 or MC6802 microprocessor as the basic control unit. Variations consist principally of I/O selections and memory expansions. FEATURES AND VARIATIONS Micromodule I-Part Number M68MMOI Basic MPU-MC6800 1 MHz Crystal·Controlied Clock 1 K byte Static RAM Sockets for four 1 K EROMs or ROMs Three MC6821 PIAs (60 peripheral I/O linesl 36K bytes available for external memory Micromodule lA-Part Number M68MMOIA Similar to above, but substitutes one MC6850 ACIA (with RS·232C interface I for one of the PIAs in the above unit. This adds communications (serial) interfaca capability and offers 40 lines of peripheral (parallell I/O capacity. Permits up to 59K bytes of external memory addressing. Micromodule IA2-Part Number M68MMOIA2 Same as Micromodule 1 A but provides a convenient strap option DATA BUS CONTROL BUS that permits use of five different ROMs in the four on·board ADDRESS BUS sockets-including: 1 K EROM with multiple-voltage supply (MCM27081 1 K EROM with single (5 VI supply . 2K EROM with single or multiple supply (MCM27161 1 K Mask-Programmable ROM (MCM683081 2K Mask-Programmable ROM (MCM683171 Micromodule IS-Part Number M68MMOI8 Basic MPU-MC6802 1 MHz Crystal·Controlled Clock 128 bytes of Static RAM Sockets for two 2K byte EROMs or ROMs One MC6821 PIA (20 pe"pheral linesl Three 16-Bit Programmable Timers IMC68401 Micromodule 181-Part Number M68MMO 181 Similar to above, but adds the following capabilities, 256 (additional) bytes of Static RAM S."al I/O With RS-232C Int.rface MICRObug MONITOR/DEBUG MICRObug provides the user of Micromodules with a system development and debugging capability. It is intended for use with Monoboards, above, and with the CPU Module M68MM02 described on the following page. M68MM08A MICRObug ROM only. Use with Monoboards M68MM01 AlOl A2/01 81. M68MM08 MICRObug ROM with a MEX6850 Communi· cations Interface Adapter Module. Use with Monoboards M68MMOl 101 8 and CPU Module M68MM02. ------------------_._----_._-_..._------_.,-._-_. 17 Choice of. .. PUGHP BUblBBBlDblieS When you need more design flexibility than a single monoboard computer can provide, choose from a wide selection of subassemblies to give your system the characteristics it needs, at an affordable cost. Motorola Micromodules allow almost limitless diversification or expansion of microcomputer functional capabilities. All micromodules are electrically and mecha· nically compatible with each other, and with the EXORciser Development System (see Page 6). This means that they may be plugged into the EXORciser for hardware and software debug· ging, using the EXbug Firmware of the EXORciser Debug Module. A CENTRAL PROCESSOR CPU Module -- M68MM02 the cornerstone of a totally modular mlcrocom puter system. It combines all of the processing and control power of the MC6S00 Microprocessor with the necessary two-phase clock generator, the reset circuitry 101 power turn-on initialization, and the bus interface and control circuits. Moveover, it supplies the tlmmg, priority, and refresh controls for 3-state and HALT operations and memory refresh. TtllS IS 0"'" lO,,101';h I\JS, IUS ,,,. 10.'" "00>"1\' .u~ A('('IIIH< INPUT /OUTPUT CAPABI LI TI ES Pdrdliell/O M'Jdui'" A I OA'" ~o .. rJl(', '"' ~o .. , uv"f( A~ A ,,"Ol"'" ~.-.-.---~.. ----.... M68MM03 - 1hlfty two TTl c'''''patibl,' pJ'dli.,' 'f'I"';-' dnd 32 T1 L. compat:ble Idtchl'd and buf'ered pd,alie, outputs Jre provided b; this powerful I/O module. This permits interchange of four contiguous (S·bit) bytes of parallel data between the Central Processor and an external system. By using the Index Register of the MC6S00 MPUs, all 32 input bits can be read and stored in 20 machine cycles, while only 18 cycles are required to load and latch the 32 output bits. Up to 256 1/0 modules may be used with a micromo· dule-based system, providing up to 8192 input and output bits. MEX6820 - Similar to above, but tailored as a development system with on·board address· select switches and provisions for installation of wire-wrap sockets for adding custom interface circuits. MEX6821-2 2 MHl v'!I,lon of MEoX6820 Serial I/O Moduie ...., GO""" . .·, ... •.. w ~,,:...... l!. MEX6850 - ThiS module interfaces the CPU module with an asynchronous data communications device. It permits 7 or S·bit transmissions; TTY and RS·232C terminal interface; program selectable odd, even or no parity; eight switch-selectable baud rates from 110 to 9600 baud. MEX6850-2 - 2 MHz verSIOn of ME X6850. but in addition. the module, With a minor jumper modification, will accomodate the SSDA deVice. MEMORY ADD·ONs 2K/4K Static RAMs M68MM06 - This module provides 2K b'ltes of Static NMOS RAM, organized in two 1 K x B·bit groups which appear to the system bus as 204B contiguous address locations. The base address can be assigned in 2K·byte increments throughout the range of 000016 to F00016. The address can be selected by means of on· board or off· board jumper connections that modify address·select bits A 11 through A 15. MEX6812 - Similar to above, but tailored as a deve· lopment system with on·board base address switches, and RAM/ROM switches that disable the write function, causing the RAMs to operate as ROMs. M68MM09E2 - This module contains 2K·byte of static CMOS RAM with battery on the module, providing non volatile memory in Micromodules based systems. Data retention is as long as 30 days. M68MM09E4 - This module is a 4K·byte version of the M6BMM09E2. BK to4BK RAM ,0'" ~"(l ~,., LlAU ""'''' BUS The RAM modules described on page 7, with configura· tions of BK, 16K, 32K and 4BK·byte, static, pseudo· static (hidden refresh) or dynamic can be used in a Micromodule based system. ROMs Prewired Boards BK/16K fROM/ROM M6SMM04 (SKI - Permits installation of 8K bytes of either EROM or ROM for storing the required firmware programs. Simply plug the programmed memory devices (MCM68708 EROM or MCM68308 ROM) into the 19 appropriate sockets and select the base memory address. Operates over address range of 000016 to EOOO16 in BK·byte increments. M6SMM04·1 (16K) - Similar to above, but with 16 sockets, rather than 8, for 16K bytes of memory. A-D/D-A CONVERSION MODULES fami Iy, Motorola offers eight converters for this purpose. There ·are five input modules (A-to-D) and three output modules (D-to-A) as follows: In many applications a digital computer is required to interface with analog signals. In such cases analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion is required. As part of the Micromodule --No of Channels Resolution Type Input Voltage Output Single-Ended Differential AID (Input) M68MM05A 8 , '2 bits - M68MM058 M68MM15Ao 8 16 16 M68MMl 51'1- 16 31 I 12 hlt~ o to 5/10 V, o to 5110 V. 12 bits o to 120lts o to 5/10 5/10 V, '5/10 V gain ~rogrammable M68MM158 I 1 expandable 104 No. of 01 A (Output 1 M68MM05C M68MM15CV' M68MM15CI' I 16 hits I V, '5il0 V programmable ga.n ' 25/55/80 mV for thermocouple or Binary 2"s l)r complp.m~nt Binary or 2's complement Bmary strain gage Inputs ou,p;, Channel, -~r==-- Output Range I 4 , to 4 , to 4 Binary Binary '2,5/5/10 V '2.3/5110 V I 17 b,'<. 1 L b.H I o to 5/10 V, '2,5/5110 V,@ 5 mA, 1£2 o to 5/10 V. '5/10 V,@5mA,0.212 121]1'\ 4 to 20 rnA current output, 9 V I -- • Capable of working at 2 MHz HIGH ISOLATION I/O MODULES' Digital Input Modules M68MM13C/D - These Micromodules provide 24 opti· cally isolated input channels. The Modules sense the amplitude of the input voltages to determine if the input is read as a data" 1" (greater than 17 V) or as a data "0" (less than 4 V). Data is outputted in banks of 8 bits. Address Lines AO and A 1 select the set of 8 inputs to be monitored. Module 130 incorporates i dc-to-dc con· verter which supplies the necessary wetting current to sense (user-supplied)' contact closure currents as inputs. Relay Type Output Modules M68MM13A/B- Some microcomputer applications require outpu1 circuits with low on·impedance, high output current and/or hetter isolation than provided by tramistors. For such applications, the Motorola Micro· module Family includes output modules With reedrelay outputs. Module 13A has 16 digital output channels and Module 13B has 32 channels. Output relays are selected In banks of 8 by the Address Bus and the status (on/off) of each relay In the bank is controlled by the data on the. Datil Bus. Rated load IS 10 watts (max.) per channel. 20 Choice of. .. OhaSSiS. oaPd oallS and POlIP SUPPlilS Bringing your modularized microcomputer system on line is simple with these accessories designed to match the Micromodule architecture and your end use. Choose from a variety of chassis with power supply, and card cages with separate power supply to tailor the system to your requirements ... M68MMlC2 and M68MMSC2 Micromodule chassis with Power Supply for standard RETMA 19" rack mounting Available in two pre·wired ready·to·use models: long 10·card chassis, M68MMLC2 and short 5·card model, M68MMSC2. 80th versions use 15 A (@ 5 V) triple DC output power supply with specifications of M68MMPS1·2, below. M68MMCC05 and M68MMCC10 Want to use a separate power supply? The two card cages with lO·card (M68MMCC10) or 5card (M68MMCC05) capacity are sized to handle your Micro· module requirements effectively and efficiently, Cages may be mounted in five possible orientations and have accommodations for power connection. M68MMPS1·2 (220 VAC) Triple Output Power Supply designed to handle voltage and current requirements for up to 10 Mlcromodules. Offers 15 A output at 5 volts for flve·volt MPU systems, plus separate +12 V and ·12 V outputs (2.5 A and 1.5 A, respectively) for associated memory systems and other accessories. Dimensioned for mounting on either side of card cages described above. 21 Application Support AN764 Design of MPU-based systems is not difficult_ The nature 'of the required components reduces the hardware to a small number of easily compatible building block. 'Iowever development of software to efficiently convert he computer into a dedicated' machine is another natter. It demands a thorough knowledge of the nteractive nature of the building block, as well as detailed knowledge of the processor's unique instruction set and its capabilities. Motorola's M68DD application support ranges from a literature library to personalized training and consultation. AN77D AN771 AN773 AN774 AN775 Support Literature AN777 Technical documentation AN782 (Prices on application) "M6800 Microprocessor Applications Manual" A 7Do-page book discussing all aspects of the M6800 system from components to programming and applications. AN783 E8-49 "Motorola microcomputer components" Technical description of all semiconductor components related to Motorola Microcomputers. A floppy disk controller using the MC6852 SSDA and other M6800 microcomputer family parts. Data acquisition networks with NMOS and CMOS. MEK68ooD2 microcomputer kit system expansion technique. A CRT terminal using the M6800 clock generator/driver. A simple high speed bipolar microprocessor illustrates system design and microprogram techniques. M6800 systems utilizing the M6875 clock generator/driver. A dual processor system for use in the EXORciser. Interfacing and controlling digital temperature data using the MC68oo. Synchronizing two Motorola MC6802s on one bus. Application performance of the MC6860 modem (see also AN731 & AN747). Specific detailed delCriptions More than products of Motorola to covering all "M68DD Programming reference manual" A book of 112 pages discussing all aspects of M68DO programming and including short description of firmware commands set. 100 different booklets describe different hardware, software, firmware and allow ship with each part a technical document aspects of the equipment. (Available with product) "From the computer to the microprocessor" An introductory book to computers and microprocessors available in English, French or German. Data sheets Each part is described in a separate data sheet available from your local Distributor or the Motorola Sales Office. "Understanding microprocessors" An introductory book to microprocessors covering aspects such as programming, system design and MPU market. Microsystem. Functional Guide This booklet is a complete Microsystems functional guide, covering all products available with their respective part number and classified by major type of function. "Getting aboard the 488-1975 bus" Implementation of the IEEE 488-1975 Instrumentation Bus will the MC6B488 Interface Adapter. System Design Courses and Seminars Application notes After more than three years of training sessions held in major cities all over Europe, Motorola's 3-day, hands-on microprocessor course has emerged as one of the most popular ways for engineers to master the design of M68DD systems. The course is taught by experienced instructors, well qualified in microprocessor techniques_ It is given according to a pre-published schedule in all countries, but can be presented at specific factory locations at a nominal cost. For the latest schedule, and additional information, please contact your local Distributor or the Motorola Sales Office. R-29-3-10 MC687DA, MC6871A, MC6871B microprocessor clock applications in M68DD microprocessor systenh. An ICU Development Aid using an M68DO AI-75 Family. InterfaCing MPU-MC6BOD with CMOS AN320 systems. Microprocessor control of industrial air conAN322 ditioned plant. Low-speed modem fundamentals (see also AN731 AN747 and EB-491. Low-speed modem system design using AN747 MC6B6D (see also AN731 & EB-491 Device operation and system Implemen AN754 tat ion of the Asynchronous Communica· tions Inwrface Adapter (ACIAI MC685D. Analogue to· digital converSion techniques AN757 With the M6800 microprocessor system. Engineering Assistance for Applications Assistance for MPU applications is available to the M68DO user. An international network of consultants has been set up all over Europe to provide you with the design support you may need. (Please call your Motorola Sales Office or Distributor for names and addresses. I 22 ___________chapterl development hardware 1-1 M68SDT EXORciser 1 Emulator for M6800 Based Systems The EXORciser is a mooularizeo, expanoabk instrument that permits "instant breadboarding" and .:valuation of any M6~OO-baseo microcomputer system. It consists of a prewired, bus-oriented chassis ano power supply, togt:ther with three ba~ic modules an t-.tPU Module, a Debug Mooule and a Baud Rail: MuJuk. Thl'sl' provid~ the ba'>IL' l'untrol and IIlterface funL'lwns of a microcomputer, and house the system development and diagnostic programs. A number of separately available, optional memory modules and additional Interface modules (up to twelve) lJlay be added, simply by plugging them into existing prewired sockets, to convert the basic system into an exact prototype of a desired end system, Thus, the FXORCIser, with Its built-1Il EXbug Firmware, enables the designer to configure, evaluate and debug hi, final ,ysll:IIl hardware and '>()ttware USlIlg actual \IIliWO components. Features • Reduces syskm oeveJopment time and cost • Emulates final ,ystem ardliteL'ture and performance through modular buildmg block concept with standard M(J~OO components • Permits debugging of final system design through built-in diagnostic firmware • Facilitates program development using separately available Resident Software EXORciser Options EXORciserSpecH~tions Basic Models: Power Requirements no \'olt M6HDTT2 M61lDTIT2B (Dimensions: lahle lop I'XORcise, I 220 \'olt T.hl<- Top EXORcise, I \\ith lSHI 19.25'17.5,7, W, D x H) ~rX&HRK Ra.(.'k Mounted. Conversion Kit 95·135/205·250 Vac 47-420 Hz 250W Word Size Data Addres.-; (Convl"rts standard table-top modd for rack muuntmg.) Instruction Memory Capability Instrut'tions Clock ('yde T.me g lIits 16 lIil5 16, and 24 II.\> 65,536 bytes (maJUmum) ~, 72, variable length Selectahle: I "s crystal control dOl.:k or proviSions for an (':\.t~ma1 clock between I ,us and 10 "s. Interrupt Maskable rrdl-time Data TemlinaJ Interfal'e Chara&:teristlcs Reade, Control Signal 110,150, JOO, 600,1200, 2400, 4800 anJ 9000 rry (20 mA neuUal cunent loop) or ~ IA RS·232C compatible ('ontwl SIgnal for ITY devices Operatmg Temperature 0·55 0 C lIaud Rates (Swill'h Selectable) Signal Characlcnsti('s mlx.hn~d 1-2 for ("ternal control 1-3 The M68SDT EXORciser Description and Operation The haslc EXORciser L'(lntalns th,' ,'Ollllllllll III!,rl'.iIl'llh III ,I I11ILT(),',)lllpIJt,'r 11 h,','0111"S quick, easy, and essentially error'prool With proViSlllll~ for up to I:: add-{)11 as'ic'lllhltes, ,I s~",ll'l11 01 ..1I111ost any complexity can rapiJly he assemhled, ThL' i1lustratiun on the pr"Cedlll!! rat!" shuws thl' major l'OmpOnl'llis (.1 thl' baSIC FXORcI,er as wI'I! as those of 'l'vt'raillptlllllal !-XOR.'lse! Ill",luies, SupplIed "'Ilh the basi,' LXOR.cls,'r arc' III,' \lPU ~l()dule, the' Ikhug Module, and thl' Baud R.Jt.: \loduk', The Baud Rail' Module ,'()nLIIT1S, pfllliaril~, all \1(,14411 Bit R.a t" (.t' nt'ra tor Ihat d ett'fl11lnt', I hl' d :11,1 tra I1$fer ra te between J n e \ t erna II1'rm ina I Jnd I Ill: FXO R Cl't'r, rhe 111llduk suppit,', "Ight SWitch ,,'iL'cl.lhk baud rates, The Baud Rate Moduk, ,I' ,h()",n, .Ibo pro"I,;'.", the tnllnnal connl'Llion..;, 'lnd Sl'rves as J ked-through hl'lween the krmin.Il and the LXl'ug hrmware ,)n the Debug ~lllduk, Tht' ~lPll ~oduk IIlcludes a buIlt-ill, t'fystal-contf(liled I Mill clock that pr 'lic'foprocessmg Unit which imparts to tlw IXORciser lIs C0111pUI.ltl'lf1 ~IlJ can twl ca pabilit les, The Dehug Moduk t hwugh lis L Xhug I ir111Warl' stored in the lIIodu Ie '-.; three ~CMI>X3() ROM s, ellahles the user to evaluate and ,It-hug a system under development, lhe module'., two M( 'hS I 0 RA~1s proVide a 256 byte scratch-pad melllllry for the EXbug fllutines, These functional ";L!bs~ ste1l1"; of I he basil' EXORCiser are suppkrnt:lltrd hy a power supply and a bus .. oriented distrIhutIon systClll, ThiS hus ,yste111 transfers the power ,>upply voltage a .. well as tht: data, address, anJ control 'ilgnals to the optional modules, COllspicuous by their ahsence from the basic EXORCIser are the memory and Input/output modules needed to turn this tool into a functional system, These memory and input'"utput modules are available as separate, optIOnal modules and give the syst,'ms designer the tlexlbtllty to configure any de,lred system, Overall. the i:-,XORciser call address up to 65K bytes of memory, and addresse~ the mput/output modules (as well as the memory modules) as memory, Typical Design Procedure Microprocessor system designs can be Implemented m many ways, Motorola provides a compatible family of host-computer and time-share programs upon which the user can develop his system software, However, where microprocessor systems are being developed for a variety of end uses and applicatIOns, the EXORciser with its resident software and hardware emulation capabilIties may well prove to be the most efficient and least expensive <;ystem design and development It)ol. Using the EXORciser in a typical de~ign process normally begllls by delilllng the functIOns to be performed by the proposed ~ystem, I n thiS definitIOn phase the deSIgner makes the reqUired trade-{)ffs between the system hardware and software functions, The designer now, using the appropriate memory and input/output modules, emulates his proposed system in the EXORciser. Recognizing that some systems may require speciallllterface CIrcuitry and customized circuitry, provisions have been made on the input/output module, for the designer to insert 14, 16 and 24 pin wirewrap sockets and construct the special lllterface C1rc'uitry, Also the designer can construct any customized circuitry on the Wirewrap Module, The terminal, as illustrated, provides the means for communications between the deSigner and EXORciser. This can be done by means of the terminal keyboard, from paper tape, or from a cassette associated with the particular terminal in use, 1·4 The Mfl800 resident software, when loaded into the EXORciser, provides the designer with a powerful tool on which to develop his software. Using the capabilities of the M6800 Resident Editor, the designer enters a source program dther via the terminal keyboard or from the selected medium. The user now can modify and change his source program as required to meet his proposed systems requirements. This includes: Printing out all or any part of the program for detailed examination; Changing any characters or string of characters in the source program; Deleting or adding instruction lines or characters anywhere in the program. At the end of the editing process, the Resident Editor will provide a source program that may be stored on paper tape, cassette, or diskette. This source program may be used in subsequent assembly operations on any of the compatible Motorola assemblers and cross assemblers. The EXORciser's M6800 Co-Resident Assembler or the Resident Macro Assembler and Linking Loader can be used to automatically translate the source program into an object program. The Co-Resident Assembler requires a minimum of 8K bytes of memory while the Macro Assembler and Linking Loader requires a minimum of 14K bytes of memory. The resultant Object Program is available from the EXORciser in three forms. 1. A printed assembly listing of the source program. 2. An Object Program on paper tape, cassette, or diskette. 3. A machine file, consisting of the machine-coded program stored directly into the EXORciser memory. This option permits the program to be executed immediately after assembly with no need for subsequent loading. The Macro Assembler in its assembly process allows the assignment of the memory addresses of a program to be relocatable and assigned when loaded by the Linking Loader rather than fixed during the assembly operation. With the Co-Resident Assembler, the program address assignments are fixed and absolute in the assembly operation. Once the designer has configured the EXORciser to emulate his hardware and has developed his programs, he is ready to debug his system. The EXORciser, with its EXbug system development Firmware, permits the user to debug both his system hardware and his system software as required until he has his system up and operating. The EXORciser with its USE (User System Evaluator) option can be used to test and evaluate equipment external to its chassis. By removing the MC6800 Microprocessing Unit from the user's system and connecting the USE cable from the EXORciser into the MPU's socket, the EXORciser with its EXbug Firmware can be used to debug and troubleshoot microprocessor systems. The EXORciser also can be used as a production tool. An EXORciser equipped with USE can be used in a final test area for testing the user's production system. With MOTEST, our component tester, the EXORciser also can be used to test the M6800 family of parts. 1·5 EXORciser Bus Signals The EXORciser bus interfaces the MPU Module with other modules being used in the EXORciser. This bus permits the EXORciser to be configured to meet a user's specific application. r>af:iBiiS (00-1Y1) - These eight bi·directionallines, when enabled, provide a two-way transfer of data between the MPU Module and the selected memory location. The data bus drivers on the modules are three·state logic devices. Address Bus (AO-A IS) - These 16 lines, when enabled, transfer the MPU memory address to the selected memory location. The MPU Module controls the operation of these lines through its three·state bus drivers. Read/Write (RIW) - This MPU output signal indicates whether the MPU Module is performing a memory read (high) or write (low) operation. The normal standby state of this line is read (high). Also, when the MC6800 MPU on the module is halted, this signal will be in the read state. Valid Memory Address (VMA) - This line, when high. indicates that the address on the bus is valid. Valid User's Address (VUA) - This line, when high, indicates that the address on the address bus is valid and the EXORciser is not addreSSing its EXbug program. Memory Clock (MEMCLK) - This is the basic clock signal used by the MPU Module to generate its <1>1 and <1>2 non·overlapping clock signals. Phase I (<1>1) Clock - This signal is derived from the Memory Clock and is present during the MPU addressing time. This signal is controlled by the MPU Module. Phase 2 (<1>2) Clock - This signal also is derived from the Memory Clock and used to synchronize the transfer of data on the data bus. This signal is controlled by the MPU Module. Bus Available (BA) - The Bus Available signal will normally be a low level. When activated, it will go high indicating that the address bus is available. This will occur if the Hill line is low or the MC6800 MPU is in the WAIT state as the result of execu ting a WAl instruction. At such time, all the MPU Module three·state output drivers will go to their off state and other outputs to their normally inactive state. An interrupt command or actuating the ABORT or RESTART switch removes the MPU from the WAIT state. Interrupt Request (mQ) - This level sensitive input, on going low, requests that an interrupt sequence be generated in the MC6800 MPU. The MPU will wait until it completes the current instruction that it is executing before it recognizes this request. At that time, if the interrupt mask bit in the MPU Condition Code Register is not set, the MPU will begin the interrtipl sequence. Non.Maskable Interrupt (N'Ml) - This level sensitive input, on going low, requests that an interrupt sequence be generated within the MC6800 MPU. The MPU will wait until it completes the current instruction that it is executing before it recognizes this request. At that time, the MPU will begin its non·maskable interrupt routine. Reset - This edge sensitive signal initiates an MC6800 MPU power·on vectored interrupt initialize routine when power is first applied to the EXORciser and each time the EXORciser's RESTART switch is actuated. This signal, in addition to resetting the module's MPU, is used to reset and initialize the rest of the EXORciser. Three·State Control (TSC) - This input, when high, causes all of the MPU Module's Address Bus lines and R/W line to go to their off or high·impedance state. The Valid Memory Address and Valid User's Address signal will be forced low. The Data Bus is not affected by the Three·State Control. This signal is initially jumpered to ground on the MPU Module. Refresh Request (REFREQ) - This signal, when low, initiates a memory refresh operation. The MPU Module, on receiving this input, stops generating the <1>1 and <1>2 clock signals with <1>1 high and, through the Refresh Grant command, instructs the initiating memory module to refresh itself. Refresh Grant (REFGRANT) - The MPU Module, on receiving a RefreSh Request input, generates a Refresh Grant signal to instruct the initiating module to refresh itself. Memory Ready (MEMRDY) - This signal enables the MPU Module to work with slow memories. The MPU Module, on receiving a low level Memory Ready input, stops generating the .pI and <1>2 clock signals with <1>2 high. The initiating module, on completing its memory operation, returns the Memory Ready signal to a high level. R3It - When this input is low, all activity in the MC6800 MPU will be halted. This input is level sensitive. In the MC6800 MPU will be halted. This input is level sensitive. In the halt mode, the machine will stop at the end of an instruction, Bus Available will be high, Valid Memory Address and Valid User's Address will be low, and all other three·state lines will be in their off or high·impedance state. Transition of the Hill line must not occur during the last 250 ns of <1>1. To insure single instruction operation, the Hilliine must go high for one <1>1 clock pulse. Refresh Clock (REFCLK) - This signal is generated by the dynamic memory module being used as the master refresh module. This signal is used to initiate a memory refresh operation on the dynamic modules funsti0iling as slave refresh modules. tan By (STDBY) - This line is a low level during a power· fail condition and a high level during normal EXORciser operation. Bus Control It is possible for a module other than the MPU Module to gain control of the bus. This module would place a low level Hill on the bus and monitor the Bus Available signal. When the MPU Module completes the instruction it is performing, it generates a high level Bus Available signal. The module requesting control of the bus now must pull the Three·State Control line low, forcing the MPU Module address bus drivers to their high·impedance state. The requesting module now has control of the EXORciser bus until it elects to relinquish control. 1-6 MEX6800 MPU Module • Provides the MPU and clock functions for both the EXORciser Debug system and the emulated user's system • Crystal controlled I MHz clock • Provisions for an external clock • Automatic system initialization and restart capability • Dynamic memory refresh capability on a cycle stealing basis • Capable of working with slow external memories The MEX6800 MPU Module is the heart of both the EXORciser Debug system and the user's system under development by providing both the system clock and the MC6800 Microprocessing Unit (MPU). The MPU Module also automatically initiates an EXORciser restart operation when power is first applied to the EXORciser. The clock circuit generates a crystal-controlled I MHz signal, but the system may be operated with an external clock at frequencies between 100 kHz and I MHz by means of a switch mounted on the MPU Module. In addition to generating the basic EXORciser timing signals, the clock circuit provides the EXORciser with the capability of refreshing dynamic memories and working with slow memories. The dynamic memories are refreshed on a cycle stealing basis. In working with slow memories, the MPU Module stretches the clock pulse to give the memory sufficient time to complete its assigned operation. Specifications (Note: Positive current flow is defined as flowing into the tenninal. negative current flow as flowing from the tennina!.) Memol)' Size Capability Data Word Size Address Instruction Instruction Set Interrupts Clock Signal Input Control Signals Logic "0" Logic "I" Address Bus and R/W Logic "0" Logic "I" orr-State Leakage Current' 65,536 bytes maximum 8-bits 16-bits 8, 16, or 24 bits 72 variable length instructions Maskable and non-maskable real-time interrupts Software interrupt I MHz; provision ror external clock between 100 kHz and I MHz TIL Voltage Compatible 0.0-0.8 V 2.0-5.25 V 0.0-{).5 v 2.4-5.25 V -401'A 1-7 Data Bus Input Logic "0" Input Logic "I" Output Logic "0" Output Logic "I" Output Orr-State Leakage Three-state n-L voltage compatible 0.0-0.8 V (-200 I'A at 0.4 V) 2.0·5.25 V (25 I'A at 5.25 V) 0.0-{).5 V (40 rnA at 0.5 V through a resistor to VCC) 2.6-5.25 V (-10 rnA at 2.6 V through a resistor to ground) 100 I'A at 2.6 V Current Output Control Signals Logic "0" Logic "I" Operating Temperature Power Requirements Physical Dimensions: WxHxT TIL voltage compatible 0.0-{).4 V 2.4-5.25 V o to 700 C 5 Vdc at 700 rnA 9.75 x 5.75 x 0.062 in. MEX6800 MPU Module Resident (also available as additional Optional Module) CLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT ~RCi3er BUFFERS I' ~IE.)(~~ elK ~-- RE.SET CIRCUIT .... CLOCK CLOCK CONTROL SWITCH ~ CLOCK CONTROL CIRCUIT .~ f+- M6800 MPU r+ ~8 ,1,..4 " f6 ~~~~~~ EXORciser BUS BUFFER Va CONTROL. RE.SE.i INTERRUPT DATA SIGNALS BUS ADDRESS BUS / ~ 16 CO~ frROL 1-8 BUS ~I .0" .02 TIMING CONTROL SIGNALS Debug 1 Module • Provides EXbug system development Firmware • Contains the special hardware to implement the EXbug functions • Enables the user to communicate with the EXbug firmware via a data terminal • Interfaces EXORciser front panel switches and controls with the MPU The Debug Module, through its EXbug Firmware and implementation hardware, provides the EXORciser with its uniqut: capabilities to evaluate and debug a system under development. The EXbug Firmware is stored in the module's three MCM6830 ROMs with the module's two MCM681 0 RAMs serving as a scratch pad memory for the EXbug routines. Using the EXbug routines provides the designer virtually unlimited freedom in examining and debugging his proposed system hardware and software. He c,!n, for example, search the input medium for a file, load a file into EXORciser memory, verify the contents in the EXORciser memory, print out the contents of the EXORciser memory, and record the memory contents on the selected medium. In between these input/output functions, the user can examine and, if required, change the memory contents. He can insert and remove one hardware breakpoint and up to eight software breakpoints. He also can run in real time or trace through the user's program or a selected portion of the user's program. While using these routines, the user modifies his hardware and software as required until he has his system up and running. The DISABLE switch on the module may be used to disable the EXbug routines. The user communicates with EXbug via an external terminal working in conjunction. with the Baud Rate Module and the Debug Module. The STOP-ON-ADDRESS/SYNC ENABLE switch on the Debug Module is used to generate a sync pulse at a pre-selected address or to enable the hardware breakpoint function. Specifications (Note: Positive current flow is defined as flowing into the tenninal, negative current flow as flowing from the tenninal.) Address and Control Bus Logic "0" Logic "I" Data Bus Input Logic "0" Input Logic "I" Output Logic "0" Output Logic "I" Operating Temperature Power Requirement. TTL voltage compatible 0.0~.85 Y (-200 /JA max at 0.5 Y) 2.0·5.25 Y (25 /JA max at 5.25 Y) Three-state Tn voltage compatible 0.0~.85 Y (-200 /JA max at 0.5 Y) 2.0·5.25 V (25 /JA max at 5.25 Y) 0.5 Y max at 40 mA through a resistor to Y CC 2.6 Y min at -10 mA through a resistor to ground o to 70"C +5 Ydc at 1.3 A +12 Ydc at SOO mA -12 Ydc at 500 mA Physical Dimensions WxHxT 9.75 x 5.75 x 0.062 in. 1-9 Debug Module Resident RAM STOP BIT SELECT ROM RUN- ONEI NS1RUCTION EXORciser BUS BUFFER BIT lTY RS·232C RATE. SIGNALS SIGNALS 5lJ'1 / $TOP·ON· ADDRESS/ SYNC SWITCH yv J y ~ DATA TERMINALINTERFACE - T It RAM ROM t t ~ CONTROL LOGIC r1 T r+ RESE.T RUN· ONE· INSTRUcn ON L- "- 1 NMI EXORciser BUS INTERFACE. 16 r .. ~ CONTROL ADDRESS BUS DATA BUS 1·10 '\ JJ!oUG DISABLE SWITCH + .+ PROM t 11EN T •• •• •• , [ STOP· ON· ADDRESS , coMMANDS STOP BIT SELECT T I FRONT PANEL • TIMING BUS RESET , ~ . ABORT ..... RESTART Baud Rate Module • Provides the EXORciser with eight switchselectable baud rates between I 10 and 9600. • Provides an interface between the Debug Module and the selected data terminal • Provides an interface between the front panel and the Debug Module The Baud Rate Module, in conjunction with the Debug Module, enables the designer to communicate with EXbug via a data terminaL The Baud Rate Module's crystal oscillator baud rate generator (MC 14411) and baud rate switch provide the EXORciser with eight standard rates. This module also interconnects the Debug Module to a data terminal and with the front panel. Included with the module is the front panel interconnect cable. Specifications Baud Rates: (Switch Selectable) Physical DimelUiions: WxHxT 110,150,300,600,1200, 2400,4800, and 9600 3.688 x 5.25 x 0.062 in. Power Supply • Provides all required EXORciser voltages • Capable of supporting a full EXORciser rack of Modules The power supply provides the EXORciser with +5 V de, + 12 V dc and -12 V de power sources. The +5 Vdc regulated source has both overload and overvoltage protection. This power source is capable of driving a complete rack of EXORciser modules. The +12 V de and -12 V dc sources are used to power portions of the interface circuitry between the EXORciser and a data terminal. These sources have overload protection and may be used to power custom circuitry on other modules. Specifications Output Voltlles: Input Voltage: +5 Vdc@ 15 A -12 Vdc @ 1.5 A +12 Vdc @ 2.5 A 95·125/205·250 Vac Input Frequency: Physical Dimensions: L xWxH 1·11 47 to 420 Hz, Single Phase 9.50 " 6.25 x 5.00 in. Baud Rate Module Resident CR'{SlAI.. FRONl P A N E L . + _ + - - - - - - + . - - - - - - - - - - - - +...~ COMMANDS 5 ",OIH~.()~ ny SIGNALS ~~'a~ ~()\)Ul..£' 5 RS2~2C+_~-----~~----------~ SIGNALS 5 Resident Power Supply - 110 VAC - 0 [ I[ I[ +5VOlT POWER SUPPLY - - +5VOLT VOLTAGE REGULATOR + 12 VOLT f - +12VOLT POWE.R VOLTA~E SUPPLY f - REGULA OR -12VOLT POWER SUPPLY ~ ...... -12VOn VOLTAGE. REGULATOR 1-12 - +5 VOLT CROWBAR CIRCUIT --- +5VDC GND +12VDC GND -12VDC GND M68SDTII EXORciser II Development System The EXORciser II Development System IS the basic tool for deSigning and une!0plng microprocessorbased systems using any of Motorola's families of microprocessor Jnd mllToprogrammahle parh. It is an extremely powerful and easy-to-use development syqem that has hl'en designt'd to be highly user-{)rienteJ in oruer to reduce system uevelopment time and cost The EXORcIst'[ " incorporates several auvanced features, incluuing Dual Memory Map mode of operation anu the abilIty to develop higher performance systems using the MC68A and MC()8B smes parh (1.5 MHl anu 2.0 MHz. respectively). In aduition. a totally new set of optional support mouules has been Incorporated to meet the increased capabilities of EXORciser II. Features • Versatile anu ea,ily expanuable design devt:lopment tool useu to evaluate anu debug the u<.,er's system hardware and software • Dual Memory Map mode of operation • Selectable clock speeds of 1.0 MHz, 1.5 MHz, and 20 MHz • 8 selectable baud rates from 110 to 9600 baud • A SIngle RS-232C compatible serial communications Interface • A chas,is containing a 14-card motherboaru and the nece,sary + 5 Vue and ± 12 Vue power supplIes Specifications Power Requirements Word Size Data 95 -I 35/205 -250 Vac 47-420 III 250 W Instructions 8 bits 16 bits II, I h. and 24 bits 65,536 bytes (maximum) 72, variable length C10e k Signal Crystal controUed 12 Mill with logic for Address Instruction Memory Capability Memory Speed Interrupt genentmg 2-phase nun-overlapping signal to MPU and system bu, Jumper selectable 1.0, 1.5, or 2.0 MHz Maskahle and nonmaskable Data Terminal Interface Chara(·tenstl<..:~ Baud Rates (Jumper Selectable) I 10, 150, JOO, bOO, I 20(). 2400, 41!OO, and 9600 Signal Characteristics T"' Y (20 rnA neutral currenl InoOp) or Reader Control Signal ('onlrol \'gnal for TTY dt"vil e\ modified Operating Temperatures o to 55 0 ( HA RS·232( compa"bl. ror exlernal <:ontrol I-,X()f{ci!.er and LXnug are trademark!lo of Motorola 1m 1-13 Description and Operation The basic EXORciser II contains the common ingredients of a microcomputer, and offers the system designer a low-cost, versatile means of achieving unique final-system performance through the selective addition of separately available, optional modules. These separate assemblies plug directly into the EXORciser's bus so that system expansion becomes quick, easy, and essentially error-proof. With provisions for up to 10 add-<>n assemblies, a system of almost any complexity can rapidly be assembled. Supplied with the basic EXORciser II are the MPU II Module, the DEbug II Module. The DEbug II Module supplies eight selectable baud rates, and serves as a communication link between the terminal and the EXbug 2 Firmware on the DEbug Ii Module. The MPU II Module provides the 1.0, 1.5, or 2.0 MHz dock timing for the microprocessor system under development, as well as for the rest of the EXORciser II. In addition, this module houses the MC68BOO Microprocessing Unit, which imparts to the EXORciser its computation and control capabilities. Also included are a Timer, MC6840. and Priority Interrupt Controller, MC6828. The DEbug II module is a system development tool which provides the user with instant capability to communicate with his system, load programs, monitor the execution of his program in real time, and to isolate and analyze hardware and software problems. The DEbug II module places no rest rictio .IS upon the user's system design since all 64K bytes of memory space are available to the user. These functional subsystems of the basic EXORciser are supplemented by a power supply and a bus-<>riented distribution system. This bus system transfers the power supply voltage (as well as the data, address, and control signals) to the optional modules. Overall, the EXORciser can address up to 64K bytes of memory, and addresses the mput/output modules (as well as the memory modules) as memory. In order to provide the user additional flexibility, the appropriate EXORciser II modules have a 20-pin connector available for implementation of such system capabilities as priority interrupts, multi-paged memory and I/O systems, parity error detection, and power down/restart features. Furthermore, the modules will have a standard jumpering arrangement for assigning memory and peripherals to either map in the dual map mode or to any page-extended memory systems. Microcomputer Design With EXORciser II A design normally begins by defining the functions to be performed by the proposed system. This is followed by design of both hardware and software and trade-<>ff decisions between them. Using the appropriate memory and input/output modules, the designer now emulates his proposed system in the EXORciser. Recognizing that some systems may require special interface circuitry and customized circuitry, provisions have been made on the input/output modules for the designer to insert wirewrap sockets and construct the special interface circuitry. Also, the designer can construct any customized circuitry on the Wirewrap Module. The EXORciser II resident software provides the designer with a powerful software development tool. Using the Resident Editor, the designer enters a source program via the terminal keyboard. The user now can modify and change his source program as required to meet his proposed systems requirements. This includes: • Printing out all or any part of the program for detailed examination • Changing any characters or string of characters in the source program • Deleting or adding instruction lines or characters anywhere in the program At the end of the editing process, the Resident Editor will provide a source program that may be stored on paper tape, cassette, or diskette. This source program may be used in subsequent assembly operations on any of the compatible Motorola assemblers and cross assemblers. The EXORciser's Resident Macro Assembler can be used to translate the source program to produce: • A printed assembly listing of the source program • An object program on paper tape, cassette, or diskette • A machine file, consisting of the machine-coded program stored directly into the EXORciser II memory. This option permits the program to be executed immediately after assembly with no need for subsequent loading 1-14 During the assembly process, the Macro Assembler allows the assignment of relocatable memory addre,ses which are assigned by the Linking Loader at load time, rather than fixed during the as,emblyoperation. Once the designer has configured the EXORciser II to emulate his hardware and has developed his software. he IS ready to debug his system. The EXORciser II, with its EXbug '2 system development firmware. permits the user to debug both his system hardware and his system software, as required, until he has hiS system operating correctly. Modules (Included With 111e EXORciser II) MPU II Module • • • • • • • • • • 68BOO-Based 1.0.1.5,2.0 MHz Clock Speeds Programmable Timer (MC6840) Priority Interrupt ColTtroller (MC6828) Refresh Control Go/Halt Control User-Controlled Three-State Logic Internal or External Clock Option IRQ and g-Levellnterrupt Control Generation of ¢I. ¢2 and Memory Clock The MEXMWO-2 MPU Module includes both the system clock and the MC68BOO Microprocessing Unit (MPU). The MPU Module also automatically initiates an EXORciser RESTART when power is first applied to the EXORciser. The clock circuit generates 1.0, 1.5, or 2.0 MHz clock signals. The system may be operated with an external clock over the range gOO kHz to 2.0 MHz. In addition to generating the basic EXORciser II timing signals, the clock circuit provides the EXORciser with the capability of refreshing dynamic memories and working with slow memories. The dynamic memories are refreshed on a cycle-stealing basis. In working with slow memories, the MPU Module stretches the clock pulse to give the memory sufficient time to complete its assigned operation. Debug Module • • • • • • • • • • • • EXbug'2 System Monitor Firmware (3K bytes) System Console Interface Dual Map Address Control STOP-ON-ADDRESS/SYNC ENABLE Power Up/Restart Control Load. Verify, Search Tape Display. Change Memory and MPU Registers Trace Instruction(s) Set Up to g Software Breakpoints Search Memory Line Printer Echo Option Parity Detect The DEbug II Module, through its EXbug 2 firmware and associated hardware, provides the EXORciser II with its powerful hardware/software debug capability. Using the EXbug routines provides the designer virtually unlimited freedom in examining and debugging his proposed system hardware and software. He can, for example, search the input medium for a file. load a file into EXORciser memory. verify the contents in the EXORciser memory, print out the contents of the EXORciser memory. and record the memory contents on the selected medium. 1-15 In between these input/output functions, the user can examine and, if required, change the memory contents. He can insert and remove one hardware breakpoint and up to eight software breakpoints. He also can run in real time or trace through the user's program or a selected portion of the user's program. While using these routines, the. user modifies his hardware and software, as required, until he has his system operating to specifications. The STOP-ON-ADDRESS/SYNC ENABLE switch on the DEbug Module is used to generate a sync pulse at a preselected address or to enable the hardware breakpoint function. The DEbug II Module provides the EXORciser II with the ability to address two separate 64K memory maps (Dual Map model. To accomplish this. the DEbug II Module takes the Valid Memory AJdres~ (VMA) signal from the MPU II Module and converts it to two other signals: Valid User Addre~s (VUA) and Valid Executive Address (VXA). All EXORciser II hardware modules may be configured to respond to one of these enabling signals. As a result. two complete maps of 64K bytes are addre,>sable for either random access data storate or for data I/O. A serial I/O port allows interfacing with any RS-232C compatible terminal. Baud rates are selectable from I 10 baud to 9()00 baud. The module also interfaces to the EXORciser's front panel RESTART and ABOR'! switches. The RESTART and ABORT push-button switches allow manual termination of program execution. RFSTART inItializes the EXORciser II system and, depending upon the EXbug/USER toggle switch ,dtlOg. torces program ext'cution to start at either the EXbug 2 or the user's restart vector address. ABORT genaates a non-maskable interrupt and returns program control to the EXbug firmware. Random Access Memory Dynamic RAM • • • • • • 10. 1.5.20 MHz ('lock Speed, Individual Address and Enable for Each I (IK Block System Cycle Stealing Refresh 16. 32. 4~. ()4K Single Board Versions Dual Map and Page Control Standard Parity Static RAM • • • • • • • Clock Speed I ndependent to 2.0 Mliz RAM/ROM Mode SL'leL'llon X, I 11K Singk Board Ver\lons Low POWl'[ IndiVidual Addre" ;tlld I'nabk for Each Standard Parity Du;tl Map ;llld Page Control ~K Bloc'k 1-16 Ordering Information rh,,' follo\\ in~ tahlt' Itsts tnformation m'l'l'!'O~;:ry for tlrJl'fln~ tilt' I-"XOKl'lsef II hard\\ .ut" Jnd so(h, In' options. Type No. Description Mb8SDTl·2DM EXORciser II De.elopment System. 220 V with Dynamic Memory (32 K) Mb8SDTl·2SM EXORciser II Development System. 220 V with Static Memory (32 K) MbSSDTl·2X EXORciser II De.elopment System. 220 V without Memory Type No. "U.XbI!I.SM MFXbH-IHH \I FXbH-I, M~ Xb1!5-1 MEXb8WW MFXo!!X I \IPI' II \Iodul. DFbug Module IbK Dynamic RAM Module "ilh Panly 32K Dynamic RAM Module" ilh Panly -18K Dynamic RAM Module \\ Ilh Panly n-lK Dynamic RAM \Iodule ""h Parily 8K Slali,' R.·\\! Module" ith Panty I bK Statk R,\\I Module \\ ith Parily PIA Input Output Module 2 AUA SSD,\ Module II M68XAE68I3A Prinkr Interfal,.'e Module II Systems Analyzer II PRO\I Programmer III with Software on Casseut> MEXb8PP3B MEXb8PP3M t;PIA Supporl Module CRT Contolier Module MCnM5-1 ADI C Support Module Wirf>wrap Module l- 'It.'ndcT Module Software Programs Optional Assemblies \IFXb800·2 MFXb8DB2 MEXb81t>·22D MFXb832·22 MfXb8-18·22 MFXb86-1·22 MEXb808·22 MFX681b·22S MEXb821·2 MEXb850·2 MEXb!!PI2 \IFXb8SA2 MFX6!!PPJA Description l" n1vt.'fsal Support Modult' PROM Programmer III "ith Software on Paper Tape PROM Programmer III with Software on MDOS Diskette 1-17 Resident Editor/ Assembler on Cassette M68XAE68 I 3B Resident Editor/ Assembler on Paper Tape M6/1MASROIOA Resident Relocatable Macro Assembler and Linking Loader on Cassette M6/1MASROIOB Resident Relocatable Macro Assembler and linking loader on Paper Tape M68SMDOS I 00 Resident Editor/ Assembler/Relocatable Macro Assembler and linking Loader with Disk Operating System on MOOS Diskette M68BASROIOA Resident BASIC Interpreter on Cassette M68BASROIOB Resident BASIC Interpreter on Paper Tape M68BASROIOM Resident BASIC Interpreter on MOOS Diskette M68MPlROIOM Resident MPl Compiler on MOOS Diskette M68FTNROl2M Resident FORTRAN Compiler and Linking Loader on MOOS Diskette M68COBOlOJOM Resident ANS COBOL Compiler on MOOS Diskelle MEX3870M MC3870 Development System • Emulator Module mounts directly into the EXORciser or EXORterm • Real-Time Emulation of the 3870 single chip microprocessor • Cable ex tension terminated by a 40-pin male connector inserts directly into the usa's 3870 socket • Dual Il)emory map consisting of RAM and PROM • RAM allows software development in the EXORciser or EXORterm environment • PROM allows field verificatIOn of firm ware prior to committing to mask programmed 3870s • 3870 Cross Assembler on MOOS diskette • Control software that allows evalution and debug of of programs under development The 3870 plug-in module provides the EXORciser or EXORterm user with virtually all of the processing and control power of a 3870 single chip microcomputer. "TEST LOGIC" is the only function that is not provided by the emulator. The CPU functions, I/O ports 0 and r, and the 64-byte scratchpad RAM are implemented using a 3850. Ihe Data Counter and Program Counter functions are implemented with a 3853 STATIC MEMORY INTERFACE (SMI), while the 3870's ROM is emulated using RAM. The module contains 3K bytes of read/write memory, 2.5K of which is available to the user for program development. I/O ports 4 and 5, interrupt, and timer logic are provided by a 3871 PERIPHERAL INPUT OUTPUT (PIO) device. In addition to the RAM, the moduk contains a socket for a 2K x 8 PROM (2716). This non-volatile storage affords verification of the user's firmware in an environment external to the EXORciser or EXORterm. EM3870, the controlling software for the emulator module, permits the user to perform EXAMINE and CHANGE operations on the various programmable registers and memory, including the CPU scratch pad. The repertoire of functions also includes the ability to insert, display, and remove up to eight breakpoints in the user program. See Figure I for a description of the available USER commands. The 3870 Cross Assembler requires approximaiely 24K of memory in conjunction with MOOS, and provides an object file on disk from the 3870 source code. Using the "LOAD" command in EM3870, this flIe may thtn be loaded into the Emulator Module for subsequent debug of the hardware and software. The 3870 Module can operate independently of the EXORciser or EXORterm once the user has debugged his program by putting his program in a 2K EPROM in the socket provided for it on the module. See Figure 2 for an example of Stand Alone operation. Minimum System Requirements EXORciser or EXORtenn MOOS Editor 24K Memory Total 1·18 MEX3870M MC3870 Development System EMJ870 Otscripllon Command .A {' n.D n.E .G .I n.L .N n:O nP .R nS .T :U :V ;W .x n/ (LFI (space) ICRI LOAD SAVE [ ..amine/change . the user's Accumulator Continue execution at current program location counter Examine/change user's Data (ounler n fn = 0 or I only) E~ecule the specified number of user instructions from the current propam counter location with a register printout only after the last instruction Go to the propam under lest throu", its restart vector Eumine/change the user\ Indirect Scratch pad Address Register [..amme/change Ihe user's location (Program) Counter n (n = 0 or 1 only) Trace the next instruction Calculate- the address offset I for branch mstructions) E:umme/change the contenls of Pori n f n :; 0,1,4,5, or 7 only) Examine the user's Registers EX3mine/chang~ scratch pad byte n (n = 0.1.2 ... 3F. ToggJ~ the trace mode Remon breakpoints Display breakpoints Examine/change the user's Status Re&i~t~r Exit EMJ870 and .. Ium to MAID Examine/chan,,~ the contents of memo,) location n Di~play the contents of the ne"t sequential memory location (LF - Line Feed character) Oisplay the contents of the nul ~4uential memory location (SPACE - Space Bar chancter) Return the displayed contents to memory and accept the ne"t command (CR Caniage Return characten Load objoct fil. from DISC Write objoct to DISC m. Figure 1. Uier Commands Figure 2. Stand Alone Operation Ordering Information Part Num~r [N!!o(,.'riplion MEXJ~70M 3M70 Emulator. including Cros.s A,W'mbler (EXORCISer or EXORt.nnl and Emulator package (Module and Software) MEX3870CDI MC 3H70 Emulator User's Guide 1-19 ® MOTOROLA M/CROSYSTEMS MEX6808-22 MEX6816-22 8K/16K Static RAM Modules • 16.384 x 8 bits of static N-channel MOS memory in two arrays (16K module) 8192 x 8 bits of static N-channel MOS memory in single array (8K module). • I MHz to 2 MHz memory speed • Switch selectable base memory address for each memory array • Switch selectable RAM/ROM for each memory array • 4 pin header for implementation of multi-paged memory or parity error detection. • Jumper selectable User Map or EXbug II Dual map • Standby/power down options provided on module. • TTL voltage wmpatible impedance inputs The MEX6808-22S (8K. 2 MHz) Static RAM Modules consisting of eighteen 4096 x I-bit static RAM devices provides tpe Development System with 8192 x 8 bit bytes of random access memory. The memory is organized in a single array. A base address switch permits the user to select base memory addresses in 8K incremen ts. The MEX6816-22S (16K. 2 MHz) Static RAM Modules consisting of thirty-six 4096 x I-bit static RAM devices provides the Development System with 16.384 x 8 bit bytes of random access memory. The memory is organized into two 8192 x 8 bit byte arrays. Two base address switches permit the user to select base memory addresses for both arrays in 8K increments. A RAM/ROM switch for each array permits the user to program the array to function as RAM or ROM. Address decoders on the module monitor the 16 address lines and determine when the system MPU is addressing their respective memory arrays. A logic circuit decodes inputs. reads the RAM/ROM switches. and determines the memory function to be performed - read data from memory, write data into memory. or inhibit the memory write function. The module circuitry generates and detects even parity. The module outputs a parity error signal to the system whenever a parity error is detected. A Power Fail/Power Down option is provided on the module. In this mode. power is applied only to the memory arrays and power fail/power down circuitry. A control signal from the system bus is required to maintain this mode of operation. 1-20 MEX6S0S-22, MEX6S16-22 SK/16K STATIC RAM MODULES Specif ications Type Memory Memory Speed N s ;Jt (OOE-k PA,'"lITy c Ol.oI( J.lA~ HuM s ..... 'Te..... BAse MEMORy ADl)RES5 5 ..... , f(.MES co",rROL LOGIr: BuS BuFfeR DATA BuS DRivERS ARRA Y I BASE: VEMQR'I' ADDRESS ((;'1.11 k(Jl ,I\, (JA I A BuS TIMII\jI, .... '(,f'>oAL'. 1-22 ® MICROSYSTEMS MOTOROLA MEX6812·1 2K Static RAM . J ] ~~~~~'h,"",IMosm'mOry ·I~~ in I K byte array~ • Switch-selectable base memory address for each IKRAMarray • Switch-selectable RAM/ROM (inhibited memory write function) capability for each array • 500 nanosecond memory access time • TTL voltage compatible • Bus interface driver capability - - - - - ~I I -=~- ---====== The MEX68 12-1 2K Static RAM Module. consisting of sixteen 2102-1 1024 x I-bit RAMs or equivalent N-channel MOS memorie~. provides the EXORciser with 2048 x 8 bits of memory. This memory is organized into two separate 1024 byte arrays. The two RAM/ROM switches on the module determine whether their respective arrays are to simulate one (1024 x 8-bi!) MCM6830 ROM or eight (128 x 8-bi!) MCM681 0 RAMs. Three-state bus buffers interface this module to the M6800 MPU over the EXORciser system bus. The designer can select the base memory address, in 1024 bit increments, for each memory array by setting of the hase memory address switches. Address decoders on this module monitor the 16 address lines and determine when the EXORciser's MPU is addressing their respective memory arrays. A logic circuit decodes three mputs, reads the RAM/ROM switches. and determines the memory function to be performed read data from the memory. write data into the memory. or inhihit the memory write function. Specifications (Note: Positive current now is defined as nowing into the terminal. negative current now as nowing from the terminal.) Type Memory Memory Organization Memory Cycle Time Inpul Signals Logic "0" Logic "I' Dala Bus MOS SIalic RAM 2048 x 8 bils orpnized into Iwo 1024 x 8 bil array. 500 ns TTL voltage compalible 0.0.0.85 V (-200 "A max al 0.4 V) 2.0-5.25 V (25 "A max al 5.25 V) Three-slale TTL voltage compatible 0.0.0.85 V (-200 "A max al 0.4 V) 2.0·5.25 V (25 "A max al 5.25 VI Input LogiC "0" Input LOgiC "I" Output Logic "0" 0.5 V max at 40 rnA through a resistor to Output Logic "." Output Orf-Slate leakage Current 2.6 V min al -10 rnA through 100 "A max al 2.6 V Power Requirements 5 Vdc(a' I A Max. PhYSical Dimensions W "Ix T 9.75.5.75 x 0.062 in. 1-23 I Vee resistor to ground MEX6812·1 2K Static RAM Module Option ADDk' RA~ DECOD RAM 1 RAM 2 CONTROL LOGIC EXORciser BUS BUFFER 1 RAM I BASlMEMORV ADDRESS SWITCHE5 I ~ RAMI ADDRESS DECODER 1 RA'a OM RAM,! SWITCH - 1 RAM2 RAM/ROM SWITCH P'~.'~ RAM 1 t I ~ ~- RAM2 BASE r.'IEr.'IORV ADDRESS SWITCHES CONTROL LOGIC t +T "- I ~ I . EXORciser BUS BUFF!: R. co~:j~'~~_f6 ~--.-" ~ TIMING SIGNALS ADDRl~ au~ 1-24 DAIA BUS ! RAM2 ADDRESS DECODER '" ® MICROSYSTEMS MOTOROLA MEX6815·3 8K Dynamic RAM Module • 8192 x 8 bits of dynamic NMOS memory in two 4096 byte arrays • Switch selectable base memory address for each memory array • Each array switch selectable as RAM or ROM (RAM protected by inhibiting memory write function) • Fully decoded or partial decoded module address selection • Cycle stealing memory refresh operation • TTL voltage compatible • Bus driver capability • Operates up to 1.5 MHz system clock The MEX68IS-3 8K Dynamic RAM Module consists of sixteen MCM6605, or equivalent, N-Channel MOS memory devices that provide the EXORciser with 8192 x 8 bits of memory which will operate up to 1.5 MHz system clock. This memory module is divided into two 4096 byte memory arrays which may be located anywhere within the available memory map by means of two base memory address switches (0000. 4096. 8192. etc.). For added flexibility, this module has an address line select switch for full or partial decoding of address lines and two ROM/RAM switches that inhibit the memory write capability thereby causing the RAM memory to look like ROM memory. . This module interfaces to the M6800 MPU over the EXORciser system hus via three-state bus buffers. Control logic initiates a memory refresh operation once every 32 !1S: the module refreshes i" memory on a cycle stealing basis. Specifications (Note: Positive current flow is defined as flowing into the tenninal. negative current flow as flowing from the tennin.I.) Memory Type Memory OrganizatIOn Cycle Time Read Access Time Input Signals Control 8us logic '·0" logic "t" Address !:Jus logic "0" Logic "I" Data Bus Input logIC "0" Input Logic "I" Output Logit.: "0" Output logic "t" Operating Temperature Power Requirements Physical N-Channel MOS DynamIC RAM 8192 .\ 8 bits or~aniIed Into 1\\-04096 )" 8-bit arrays 750 ns 350 ns from memory clock 0.0-0.8 V 1-200 "A max at 0.5 VI 2.0-5.25 V 125 "A max at 5.25 V) 0.0-0.8 V 1-500 "A ma, at 0.5 VI 2.0-5.5 V 180 "A max at j.5 V) 0.0-0.8 V 1200 "A m3\ at 0.5 V) 2.0-5.25 V 125"A max .t 5.25 V) 0.5 V max a1 40 rnA through a resistor to 0° to 70 0 e +5 V at 600 mA +12 V at 250 mA -12 V at 50 mA Dimen~lOm WxHxT Vee 2.6 V min at -10 rnA ihrough a resIstor to ground 9.75 x 5.75 , 0.062 1-25 In. MEX8815-3 8K Dynamic RAM Module Option RAM A RAM/ROM RAMB RAM/ROM SWITCH SWITCH B I' RAM A f!,ASE MEMORY te~ ! I'RAM/ROM RAM A SWITCH ft L CLOCK LOGIC I P • I t ! RAM~ RAM A RA~A ADD ESS DECODER RAMS BA5EMEMORY ADDRESS SWITCHES rllRAM/ROM RAMB II SWITCH RAMS ADDRESS DECODER tf I t • I EXORcise, BuS 6UFFE.R 12 ,"5 74 1;.8 .ADDRES\i DIS,6$l.E SWITCHES m--r 1 r 4 CONTROL &TIMING SIGNALS ADDRESS BUS 1-26 DATA BUS .'- @ MICROSYSTEMS MOTOROLA MEX6816·1 16K Dynamic RANt~A ~ Module ~ ~~ . ~ 2 • ~OOW 16,384 x !i bits of dynamic ]\;MOS memory III one array • Swllch selectable base memory address for the mt:mory array • Cycle stealing memory refresh operation • Optional even parity capability (consult factory) • TTL voltage compatible • Bus drive capability )~Q _-J"-""'" lh~ MF XhH 11>-1 16K Dynamic RAM Module. consbting of 32 'I;-Ch.II1J1l'1 MOS memory devices. provides the EXORciser with I b.3H4 hyt~, 01 dynamic memory. This memory is organized into one I bK memory 'lrray. Through lise of the base memory address switches. the u,er c.1I1 ,de,·t one of four hase memory addresses.: O. 400016. 800016 or AOOOI6' I hl' addre" multiplexer in a refresh operation selects the memory location to be refreshed. The addrl"S decoder determines when the MPU is addressing its memory array and enables the control lo!!k Clfcui". Thl' control logic now decodes its control and timing inputs and determines the module's OlwratlolL WorkIng with the FXORci,er bus buffer. it controls the address multiplexing required by tbl' memory dl" Ic·~'. Th~ "ontrollogic also det'odes the Read/Write command and determines whether the moduk "to pl'rform a memory rcad or memory write operation. The control logic initiates a memory refresh operation once every 32 /.IS and the module refreshes its memory on a cycle stealing basis. The optional parity circllit generates a parity bit during a memory write operation and checks that data during a memory read operation. On detecting a parity error, the circuit generates the PARITY ERROR and PARITY ERROR t1ag signals. Consult the factory for details on this option. Specifications (Note: Positive current flow is defined as flowing into the tenninaI, neptive curnnt flow as flowing from the tenninal.) Memory lype \1~m()ry (»rganuation Panly Rt>ad An:es.\ Time Input SignaJs ('annul Lines Logl< "0" Logi< "I" Address Logic "0" Logit "I" Dola Bu, Inpul Logic "0" Inpul Logic "I" ()UlpUI Logic "0" Output Logic "1" Operating Temperature Power Requirements N.,hann.1 MOS dynamic RAM 16.3M x 8 bits organized into one may OptionaJ even parity - consult factory 350 ns from row address strobe (approximately .lOO nit from memory clol.:k) TTL voilige compllibl. 0.~.85 2.0-5.25 V (-200 /.I A max al 0.4VI v (251J.A mIX al 5.25 V) 0.0-0.8 V (·2.0 mA max II 0.5 V) 2.0·5.25 V (1.0 mA max II 5.5 VI 0.0·0.85 V (·200 IJ.A max al 0.4 VI 2.0-5.25 V (25 /.IA ma. al S.lS V) 0.5 V max II 40 mA Ihrough a r.';,lor 10 Vee 2.6 V min at -10 mA through a resistor to ground 01070· C +S Vdc II I.S A max +12 Vdcall.b A mill< ·12 Vdc alllO mA max Physical Dime>nsions "', H,·I 9.75,5.75,0.062 in. 1·27 MEX6816·1 16K Dynamic RAM Module Option RAM MEMOR'( A~RAY SASE ME.M~ ADDRESS SWITCH ADDRESS MULTIPLEXER CONTROL LOGIC ADDRE.SS ~XO~ciser CONTl101.. .TIMING SIGNALS EXORciser gUS SUFFE.R D~CODE.R SUS SUH ~R ADD ESS SUS 1·28 DATA SUS MICROSYSTEMS ® MOTOROLA MEX6816 - 1 HR MEX6832 - 1 HR MEX6848 - 1 HR MEX6864 - 1 HR 16K/64K Hidden Refresh RAM Module • 16,384 x 8 bits of dynamic NMOS memory (16K), 32,768 x 8 bits (32K), 49,152 x 8 bits (48K), or 65,536 x 8 bits (64K) organized into one memory array of 4 rows • Memory refresh without processor interruption • Jumper selectable memory map assignment • 20-pin header for implementation of priority interrupts, multi-paged memory, and I/O systems • Even parity with jumper selectable outputs • TIL vo1tage~ompatible high-impedance inputs The MEX6816-1 HR Hidden Refresh RAM Module consisting of 9 N-Channel MOS memory devices provides the system with 16,384 bytes of memory. The MEX6832-1 HR consists of 18 devices with 32,768 bytes, the MEX6848-1 HR consists of 27 devices with 49,152 bytes, and the MEX6864-1 HR consists of 36 devices with 65,536 bytes of memory. The memory is organized into independently addressable rows of 16K memory each. The Development System is designed to operate on a two·phase clock. Phase I IS dedicated to internal MC6800 MPU operations. Phase 2 is used to access external memory. During 9'>1 of the cycle, when memory is not being accessed, one row of memory is refreshed. The module circuitry generates and detects even parity. A parity error signal is output to the system whenever a parity error is detected. The output is jumper selectable to the system bus as a parity error, or a non-maskable interrupt. Specifications Ordering Information Memory Type Memory Organization N aI 0.5 VI 2.0 5 2S V 125 1''' max.' S2S VI Input Logjc .'." OUIPUI logic "0" O.S V mall. at 40 rnA through 3 re!li~lor to Vel ~ 6 V min at 10 rnA through a rt~)i~lor to ground Oulput logi(: "." Operating Tempe-rarUrf' 0 0 1070"(' Power Rrqui.remrnh +S V al 1.540 rna:.. +1 2 \' at 1.040 rna" -12 V at 110 rnA mu.. Physical l>imen\lon~ W, H, T 9.7S , 6.00 , 0.062 in. Ordering Information The followillg table Ii!lls rhr anfonnallOn TYP[ NUMBER nece~ar) for ordenng modules Of m;tnual) DESCRIPTION MEXbKIt>-22U 161( Dynamic RAM Module MEX6832·U .HK Dynamic RAM Module MEX684H-U 4SK Dynamic R ~M Module MEXb86~22 b4K Dynamic RAM Module M[Xb86~DI U!'Iootr\ GUide (("O\'("r) all H'r .. ion!ll 1-32 MEX8818-22D MEX8832-22 MEX8848-22 MEX8884-22 18K/84K Dynamic RAM Module. HA~' MEMl)H'f CONTROL LOGIC ADDR ESS 1I,1uL ADDR ESS DECODER PARIT Y S'V$TEII.1 BuS LOCIC Bu F ~ E H ~ ~ ADDRESS • DECODER BASE MEMORY ADDRESS SWITCH •• T '\. ... I SYSTEM BUS BUFFER RAM MEMORY ARRAY • +• I ~ I , CONTROL & TIMING SIGNALS " ~ CONTROL LOGIC t I J ADDRESS L MUL TIPLEXER '''''' / J I ADDRESS BUS 1-33 DATA BUS TIPLExE.~ ® MOTOROLA MICROSYSTEMS MEX6820 Input/Output Module • Four 8-bit input/output ports for peripheral interfaung • f'ight individually controlled interrupt lines .- four of which may be used as peripheral control lines • Program controlled maskable interrupt capability • Fadl MChH20 Penpherallnterface Adapter addressed as memory • Switch selectable base memory address for each of the two M(,6H20 Peripheral Interface Adapter devices • Provisions on the module for wirewrap sockets to be used in constructing custom interface circuitry The MLX6820 Input/Output Module, containing two MC6820 Peripheral Interface Adapters (PIA 's), provides a nexible means of interfacing the EXORciser with a user's defined process or peripheral lIevice. This module, in effect, connects the two PIA's between the MPU and the peripheral device(s). The designer has the option of interfacing a peripheral directly to the PIA's TTL voltage c'ompatibk I/O ports and control lines. or through custom interface circuitry. (The peripheral interface lines of the PIA are PAO-PA7. PHO-PH7, CAl, CA2. CBI. and CB2)The I/O Module has provisions for standard 14. lb. and 24 pin wirewrap sockets. thus permitting the construction of custom interfacing cirClllts on the module. The EXORciser's MC6800 MPU addresses each of the PIA's as four locations in memory. Address switches allow the user to select base memory locations for each PIA. Altering the settings of the address enable/disable switches sets up the Input/Output Module to emulate a design that mayor may not use all 16 address lines. Address decoders determine when the MPU is addressing a particular PIA's register and also signal the control logic to decode its inputs. The control logic, by decoding the MPU timing and control signals, manages the data now through the I/O Module's buffers. These three-state buffers interface the I/O Module to the MC6800 MPU over the EXORciser bus. MLXb81C I/O Interconnection Cables are used to connect an Input/Output Module to a peripheral. One end of this natribbon cable is terminated with a 50-pin natribbon connector; the other end is not terminated. Two MEXb81C cables should be ordered with each MEXb820 Input/Output Module. Specifications (Note: Positive current flow is defined as flowing into the terminal. negative current flow as flowing from the terminal.) Input Signals LOgic "0" Logic "I" TTL voUage compatible 0.0-0.85 V (-200 "A max at 0.4 V) 2.0·5.25 V (25"A max at 5.25 V) Data Bus Input Logic "0" Three-state TTL voltage compatible Input Logic "I" Output logic "0" Output Logic "I" Output Off-State Leakage Cunent . 101('6820 Peripheral Interface Adapter Signals° PAO·PA 7 Input/Output lines PBO·PB7 Input/Output lines ('A I, CA2, and CB I Control Signals CB2 Control Signal IRQA and IRQB Signals Opera ring Temperature Power Requirements 0.0-0.85 V (-200 "A max at 0.4 V) 2:0·5.25 V (25 "A max at 5.25 V) O.S V max at 40 rnA through a resistor to Vee 2.6 V min at -10 rnA through a resistor to ground 100 "A max at 2.6 V TTL voltage compatible Three-state TTL vollage compatible TTL voltage compatible Three-state TTL . . ollage compatible TTL voltage compatible o to 70°C 5 Vdc al 2 A max Physical Dimensions W.H.T 9.75 .5.75 x 0.062 in. ·See MC6820 data sheel for specifications on these signals. 1-34 MEX6820 Input/Output Module Option PIA2 PIA 1 ADDRESS ENABLE/ DISABLE SWITCHES ADDRESS EHASLEI DISABLE sw ITCH E.S PIA 1 ADDRESS PIA 2 ADDRESS DECODER DECODER E.XORciser BUS SUFFE.R PIA 2 PIA 1 PA9 PAO cal PA1 (,92 .~~I~~ lilt PIA2 BASE MEMgRY ADORES ..(81 I 8 I I I I I I I I I PA Cfjl CII2 PlIO ~Al I All pr1 I 1 I ,(81 I A'8 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ~WITCHES 1-35 ® MOTOROLA MICR OS YSTEMS MEX6821·2 Input / output Module • Four 8-bit input/output ports for peripheral interfacing • Eight individually controlled interrupt lines four of which may be used as peripheral con trol lines • Program controlled maskable interrupt capability • Each MC68B21 Peripheral Interface Adapter addressed as memory • SWitch selectable base memory address for each of the two MC68B21 Peripheral Interface Adapter devices • Provisions on the module for wire-wrap sockets to be used in constructing custom interface circuitry • 20-pin header for implementation of priority interrupts, multi-paged memory, and I/O systems • Jumper selectable user address or EXbug 2 Dual map address • Up to 2.0 MHl clock speed operation The MEX6821-2 Input/Output Module, containing two M68B21 Peripheral Interface Adapters (PIA's), provides a flexible means of interfacing the Development System with a user's defined process or peripheral device. This module, in effect, connects the two PIA's between the MPU and the peripheral device(s). The designer has the option of interfacing a peripheral directly to the PIA's TTL voltage compatible I/O ports and control lines, or through custom interface circuitry. (The peripheral interface lines of the PIA are PAO-PA 7, PBO-PB7, CA I, CA2, CB I, and CB2.) The I/O Module has provisions for standard 14-, 16-, and 24-pin wire-wrap so,:kets, thus permitting the construction of custom interfacing circuits on the module. The M68800 MPU addresses each of the PIA's as four locations in memory. Address switches allow the user to select base memory locations for each PIA. Altering the settings of the address enable/ disable switches sets up the Input/Output Module to emulate a design that mayor may not use all 16 address lines. Address decoders determine when the MPU is addressing a particular PIA's register and also signal the control logic to decode its inputs. The control logic, by decoding the MPU timing and control signals, manages the data flow through the I/O Module's buffers. These three-state buffers interface the I/O Module to the M68800 MPU over the system bus. MEX681C2 I/O Interconnection Cables are used to connect an Input/Output Module to a peripheral. One end of this flatribbon cable is terminated with a 50-pin flatribbon connector; the other end is not terminated. Two MEXh81C2 cables should be ordered with each MEX6821-2 Input/Output Module. Specifications Input Sip." Lope "0" Lope "I" 0. •• BUI Inpu' Lope "0" Input Lope .' ... Output Lope "0" Output Loaic "1" Output Orr·Stlle Leaka. Curren I M68121 Peripheral Interface Adapler Sipals· 'AG-'A 7 Input/Output Una PBO-PB7 Input/Oulput Unel CA I. CAl. and CB I Control Sip'" CI2 Control Sip" IRQ ......d IRQ8 Sian." Opentinl T empentUft Power Requ.iremmu ""lie" Dimenuoni WxH_T Ordering Information TTL vol I . compatible 0.0-0.85 V (100 ~A mu O.4V) 2.0-5.25 V (25 lolA max 5.25 V) Thru-ltale TTL volta,c compatible 0.0.0.85 V (200 ~A max a. 0." V) 1.0-.5.25 V (lS lolA max 5.15 V) 0..5 V max 1140 mA through I resistor 10 Vee 2.6 v min.t 10 mA throush I relislor 10 ground 100,YA max at 2.6 V I' I' I' TTL wo.ltaae compatible Three-state TTL voltaae compatible TTL voll. compatible Three--.tate TTL voltqe compatible TTL voU... compatible o to 700c 5 Vdc I' 2 A max 9.75 6.00 " 0.061 in. l. 1-36 The following table lisls Ihe infonnation necessary for ordering mod liles, cables, or manuals. TVpe Number Dftcription MEX6821-2 Input/Output Module MEX68lC2 Interconnect Cable MEX68212(D) User', Guide MEX8821·2 Input / Output Module PIA 2 BASE MEMORY ADDRESS SWITCHES CONTROL LOGIC PIA 1 BASE MEMORY ADDRESS SWITCHES PIA 2 ADDRESS DECODER PIA 1 ADDRESS DECODER PIA 1 BASE MEMORY ADDRESS SWITCHES PIA 2 BASE MEMORY ADDRESS SWITCHES 16 16 EXORe;.., BUS BUFFER 16 CONTROL & TIMING BUS ADDRESS BUS DATA BUS 1-37 MEX6845 CRT Conlrol Support Module • Provides the interface to raster scan CRT displays for terminals in stand alone or cluster confIgUration. • Fully decoded switch selectable address capability • Fully buffered address bus and bidirectional data bus • 20-pin header for implementation of priority interrupts, multi-paged memory, and I/O systems • Two 50-pin edge connectors and one 20-pin edge connector provides interface for custom circuitry • Large wire-wrap socket area for custom circuitry • Jumper selectable memory map assignment The MEX6845 CRT Controller Support Module provides the user with a minimal hardware design implementing the MC6845 CRTC device. The necessary data lines, and control signals are factorywired to the device. The 4evice is mounted in a wire-wrap socket which provides access to the MC6845 bus for connection of the user's custom circuitry. The three-edge connectors provide 120 lines for interface with the user's system. Four hexidecimal address select switches allow the user to generate a fully decoded chip select function. Specifications Address and Control Bu. Logic "0" Lope "I" Data Bu. Input Logic "0" Input Logic "I" Output Logic "0" Output Logic "I" Output Off·State Leak..., Current TTL volt..., compatible 0.0~.85 V (200 jAA max at 0.4 V) 2.0-5.25 V (25 jAA max at 5.25 V) Three..tat. TTL voltage compatible 0.0-0.85 V (200 jAA max It 0.4 V) 2.0-5.25 V (25 jAA max at 5.25 V) 0.5 V max at 40 rnA through a resistor to VCC 2.6 V min at 10 rnA through a resistor to ground 100 jAA max at 2.6 V Power Requirements +5Vde@2Amax +12 Vdc -12 Vde Physical Dimensions WxHxT 9.75 x 6.00 x 0.062 in. The following table lists the information necessary for ordering modules, manuals, or data sheets. TypeNu_ NEX6845 o-iption CRT Controller Support Moelule NEX6845(D) User'. Guide MC6845 Data ShOet Data Sheet for MC6845 CRTC 1-38 MEX8845 CRT Control Support Module CRTC CHIP SELECT LOGIC SYSTEM BUS BUFFERS " / .1 1 CRTC I~ ~ A I CONTROL HEADER I I I I ADDRESS SWITCHES 1 1 J "I ~~ I SYSTEM BUS BUFFERS A CONTROL TIMING SIGNALS SIGNALS l ADDRESS BUS 1·39 , CHIP SELECT LOGIC DATA BUS I / ® MICROSYSTEMS MOTOROLA MEX6850 ACIA Module • Eight or nine-bit transmission • Program-selectable odd, even, or no parity • TTY and RS-232C data terminal interface capability • Program-selectable divide-by 16 and 64 clock modes • Program-selectable one or two stop bits • Eight swikh-selectable baud rates between I 10 and 9600 baud fhe M LX6850 ACiA Module (Asynchronous Communications Interface Adapter) interfaces the EXORciser base system to an asynchronous data communications device. This module appears to the MC6800 MPU as an MC6850 ACIA. In preparing a program for this module, the designer determines parity, the number of stop bits and the AClA's clock mode. The user can select one or two stop bits: odd, even, or no parity: the clock mode; and the number of data bits to be transferred. The user, in setting up this module. selects one of the eight standard switch selectable baud rates between 110 and 9600. He has the option of interfacing directly with a TTY (20 rnA neutral current loop). and an RS-232C compatible terminal, or of constructing a custom interface circuit for some other peripheral. The module can be configured to appear as a data terminal or modem to an external communications device. It has provisions for standard 14. 16, and 24 pin wirewrap sockets to allow for the construction of customized circuits. The EXORciser's MPU :i'ddresses the ACiA as if it were two locations in memory. By proper setting of the base melllory address switches, the user can select the base memory address for the AClA. The address enable/disable switches activate or de-adivate individual address lines. This allows the EXORciser to emulate systems not uSlIlg all 16 address lines. The address decoder determines when the MPU is addressing its ACIA and enables the control logic to decode its inputs. The control logic, by decoding of the MPU timing and control signals, controls the !low of data through the EXORciser bus buffer. The EXORciser bus buffer interfaces the ACIA Module with the EXORciser bus. Specifications (Note: Positive current flow is defined as flowing into the terminal. negative current flow as flowing from the terminal.) Addres~ and Control Bus logic "0" logi,' "I" no" Data Bu!t tnput logic "0" Input logi<: "I" Output logl(: "0" Output logic "I" Output Off-Statr lcak~gc rTl voltage compatihle 0.0-0.85 V (-200 ~A m .. at 1l.4 VI 2.0-5.25 \' (25 ~A aI 5.25 \' I Three-state TTL vOllage t'ompatible 0.0-0.85 V (-200 ~A on", al 0.4 V) 2.0-5.25 V (25 "A rna. al 5.25 VI 0.5 V rna\. Oil 40 rnA Ihrough .. resistor to Vee 2.6 V min at -10 rnA Ihrough .. resistor to ground 100.uA rna\. al 2.6 V ("urrenl SWitch selet:Uble baud ralr) II U. 1511. JOn. bOil, 1200. 2400. Signal ('haradenslics TTY (20 rnA neutral (urrcnlloop) or t·IA RS·232C compatihlc TTY Reader Control Signal ('onlrol signal for TTY dcvire.) modified for e.... lernal (.'onlrol RS·232 Interface SIgnal. RS-232C Signab (0 intcrfal'(' with an RS-232C data lennina!. Can be modified to mlcrfal"t" wllh any RS,232C modem. Power Requirements +5 Vd,,' (Q 750 IJA + 12 Vd<.' (Q SUO ,uA -12 Vdda Phy SM: Oil Dimensions WxllxT 500~A 9.7S "\ 5.75 ,0.062 m. 1-40 4~OO, and 9600 MEX6850 ACIA Module Option &AUD RATE GENERATOR ADDRE.SS DECODER CONFIGUREDA AS A MODf.M* , DATA TERMINAL READV DATA SE1 READV BASE MEMORY ADDRE.SS SWITCHES • SEE NEXT PAGE FOR ADDRESS BUS 1-41 DATA !IUS RS·232C INTER~E CONFIGURED I>.S A TERMINAL MEX6850-2 ACIA/SSDA Support Module • Eight or nine bit transmission • Program selectable odd, even, or no parity • Program selectable divide by 16 and 64 clock modes • Program selectable one or two stop bits • Eight jumper selectable baud rates from 110 through 9600 baud • Provisions on module to construct custom circuitry i.e. TTY and RS-232 Interfaces • Easy conversion to MC68B52 Synchronous Serial Data Adapter (SSDA) The MEX685()'2 ACIA/SSDA Support Module (Asynchronous Communications Interface Adapter/ Synchronous Serial Data Adapter) interfaces the Development System to a data communication device. The module is factory wired as an MC68B50 ACIA. The user has the option of interfacing this module with a TTY, cassette handlers, disk drives, external terminal, or an RS-232C compatible device. This module may be configured to appear as a data terminal or as a modem to the external communications device. The module may be converted to a Synchronous Serial Data Adapter by replacing the MC68B50 ACiA with an MC68B52 SSDA and making a few wiring changes. In preparing a program for this module, the designer determines parity, the number of stop bits and the ACIA clock mode. The user can select one or two stop bits; odd, even, or no parity; the clock mode; and the number of data bits to be transferred. The user, in setting up this module, selects one of eight standard jumper selectable baud rates from 110 through 9600. He has the option of interfacing, through custom circuitry, with a TTY (20 mA neutral current loop), and an RS-232C compatible terminal, or of constructing a custom interface circuit for some other peripheral. The module has provisions for standard 14, 16, and 24-pin wirewrap sockets to allow for the construction of customized circuits. The system MPU addresses the ACIA or the SSDA as if it were two locations il) memory. By proper setting of the base memory address switches, the user can select the base memory address for the ACIA or SSDA. The address decoder determines when the MPU is addressing its ACIA or SSDA and enables the control logic to decode its inputs. The control logic, by decoding of the MPU timing and control signals, controls the flow of data through the system bus buffers. 1-42 MEX8850-2 ACIA/SSDA Support Module Specifications Add",. Ind Conlrol Bus Lop: "0" Lop: "I" 0. ... Bus Inpul Lop: "0" Inpul Lope" I " Oulpul Loaic "0" Oulpul Lope •• I " Oulpul Off,Slale Loak ... Cu""nl Swlieh .. Ioc: ... blo baud role, Power Requirements PhYlicai Dimensions W,n,T TTL volll" eomplliblo 0.~.85 V (200 /JA mIX 110.4 VI 2.0-5.25 V (25 /JA mo, .1 5.25 V) n"''''lale TTL voll... eomplliblo 0.~.85 V (200 /JA mIX al 0.4 V) 2.0-5.25 V (25 /JA max .1 5.25 V) 0.5 V mIX al40 mA Ihrou", a millor 10 VCC 2.6 V min .1 10 mA Ihrou", • mislor 10 around 100 /JA max .1 2.6 V 110. 150.300.600. 1200.2400.4800. and 9600 +5 Vde ~ 750 /JA +12 Vde@ 500 /JA -12 Vde~ 500/JA 9.75 • 6.00 • 0.062 In. Ordering Information 'IlIt roUowin& table lists the infonnation necessary (or ordrrinl modules. devices or mlnuals. TYPE NUMBER MEX68S0-2 MC688S2 MEX68502 (D) DESCRIPTION ACiA/SSDA Module SSDA Device Use,'sGuide 1-43 MEX8850-2 ACIA/SSDA Support Module DE.vlC[ BAUD All. TE GENERATOR '-'C6885,Q ACIA 0" 1rIIC6885 SSDA ADDRES~ BASE MEMORy ADDRESS DECODER SWITCHES CO~TAOL LOGIC SYSTEM BuS BVJ:FER .-__+ CLEAR TO SENO INTERRUPT REOUEST AXDATA REQUEST TO SENO/DATA TERMINAL READY DATA CARRIER DETECT MC14411 BAUD RATE GENERATOR CONTROL TIMING SIGNALS a AOORESS BUS 1·44 DATA BUS MEX6854 ADLC Support Module • Provides data communications interface for both primary and secondary stations in stand alone, polling, and loop configurations • Fully decoded switch selectable address capability • Fully buffered address bus and bidirectional data bus • 20-pin header for implementation of priority interrupts, multi-paged memory, and I/O systems • Two 50-pin edge connectors and one 20-pin edge connector provides interface for custom circuitry • Large wire-wrap socket area for custom circuitry • Jumper selectable memory map assignment The MEX6854 ADLC (Advanced Data Link Controller) Support Module provides the user with a minimal hardware design implementing the MC6854 ADLC device. The necessary data lines and control signals are factory-wired to the device. The device is mounted in a wire-wrap so<;ket which provides access to the MC6854 bus for connection of the user's custom circuitry. The three-edge connectors provide 120 lines for interface with the user's system. Four hexidecimal address select switches allow the user to generate a fully decoded chip select function. Specifications Address and Control Bus Logic "0" Logi< "I" Data Bus Input Logic "0" Input Logil.: "1" Output Lagle "0" Output Logic "I" Output Off·StlIte Leakage Current TTL voltage compatible 0.0·0.85 V (200 ~A noax at 0.4 V) 2.0-5.25 V (25 ~A max at 5.25 V) Three-state TTL voltage compatible 0.0-0.85 V (200 ~A max at 0.4 V) 2.0-5.25 V (25 ~A max at 5.25 V) 0.5 V max at 40 rnA through a resIstor to Vee 2.6 V min at 10 rnA through a resistor to ground 100 "A max at 2.6 V Power Requirements +5 Vdc(aJ2 A max + 12 Vde -12 Vde Physical DimensIOns W.HxT 9.75 x 6.00 x 0.062 111. Ordering Information The following table lists the information necessary for ordcnng modules. manuals. or data sheets_ Type Number Description ADLC Support Module 'd~.X6~54 (0) User's GUide MC6854 Data Sheet Oata Sheet for MC6854 AULC 1-45 MEX8854 ADLe Support Module CHIP SELECT LOGIC ADDRESS SWITCHES SYSTEM BUS BUFFERS " / .1 1 i CONTROL HEADER I I • " 1 I ADLC • r... ADDRESS SWITCHES J 1 1 I A~ SYSTEM BUS BUFFERS • CONTROL TIMING SIGNALS SIGNALS ~ ~ ADDRESS BUS DATA BUS 1·46 CHIP SELECT LOGIC I • 1 / MEX68488 GPIA Support Module • Provides a means for controlling and moving data from complex systems of muIiipie instruments • Fully decoded switch selectable address capability • Fully buffered address bus and bidirectional data bus • 20-pin header for implementation of priority interrupts, multi-paged memory and I/O systems • Two 50-pin edge connectors and one 20-pin edge connector provides interface for custom circuitry • Large wire-wrap socket area for custom circuitry • Jumper selectable memory map assignment The MEX68488 GPIA (General Purpose Interface Adapter) Support Module provides the user with a minimal hardware design implementing the MC68488 GPIA device. The necessary data lines and control signals are factory-wired to the device. The device is mounted in a wire-wrap socket which provides access to the MC68488 bus for connection of the user's custom circuitry. The three edge connectors provide 120 lines for interface with the user's system. Four hexidecimal address select switches allow the user to generate a fully decoded chip select function. Specifications AddIess and Control Bus Logic "0" Logic "1" Data Bus Input Logic "0" Input Logic "1" Ou tpu t Logic "0" Output Logic "I" Output Off·State Leakage Current Power Requirements TIL voltage compatible 0.0.{).8S V (200 I'A max at 0.4 V) 2.0-5.25 V (25 I'A max' at 5.25 V) Three·state TIL voltage compatible 0.0-0.85 V (200 I'A max at 0.4 V) 2.0-5.25 V (25 I'A max at 5.25 V) 0.5 V max at 40 mA through a resistor to VCC 2.6 V min at 10 mA through a resistor to ground lOOI'A mOll at 2.6 V +5 Vdc@2Amax +12 Vdc -12 Vdc Physical Dimensions W.HxT 9.75 .6.00. 0.062 in. Ordering Information The following table lists the information necessary for ordering modules, manuals, or data sheets. Type Number D-=ription MEX68488 GPIA Support Module MEX68488(D) User's Guide MC68488 Data Sheet Da ... Sheet for MC68488 GPIA 1-47 MEX68488 GPiA Support Module ADDRESS SWITCHES ..... / J "I GPIA r:.... ~ I CONTROL HEADER I I H 1 I ADDRESS SWITCHES I 1 I I H SYSTEM BUS BUFFERS ~~ CONTROL TIMING SIGNALS SIGNALS ~ ~ ADDRESS BUS 1-48 DATA BUS CHIP SELECT LOGIC I • I ./ ® MOTOROLA MICROSYSTEMS MEX141000M MC141000/1200 Development System . • M6800 EXORciser or EXORterm based • Complete software capabilities, including Cross Assembler, Loader, and Debug Package • Provides an economical and expedient means for developing new applications prior to committing to final production masks • Provides complete simulation of the 141000/1200 hardware characteristics • MOOS based software The purpose of the 141000/ 1200 simulator module is to provide an EXORciser or EXORterm based tool for debugging 141 000/1200 application~ in the actual hardware and software configuration of the user's final system. A ROM object program is generated by the EXORciser 141000/1200 Cross Assem bier and is loaded and run by the simulator. Using the information generated by the simulator and the debug facilities provided by the simulator, the user can find and correct problem, in the source program. It is possible for the user to simulate all of the 141000/1200 inputs and to examine all of the 141000/1200 outputs via software control, or control the inputs and outputs via ex ternal user hardware. The 141000/1200 Simulator Package will consist of a hardware module and a software package. The module can be used in either an M6800 EXORciser or EXORterm. It will he possible to load and save the user's program and debug it with the software package. The module wIll provide such facilities as a power supply, clock, reset button, input and output connections with the necessary TTL/CMOS level conversions, and the hardware necessary to interface with the Simulator software. Figure I shows the data flow in the 141000/1200 Simulator Systelll The ROM ohJect file resides on a disk file and can be accessed through the 141000/1200 simulator -;ott ware. Inpu ts to the user program can come either from the terminal or the user's 141000/1200 system. Figure 2 illustrates the hardware connections of the 141000,1200 Simulator System. The simulator board is inserted in the EXORciser or EXORterm. A cable With a OIL male connedor will connect the simulator to the user's system. Figure 3 shows the USER {;ommands available with the simulator package. Minimum System ReqUirements EXORciser or EXORterm MDOS 24K Memory Editor 1·49 MEX141000M, MC141000/1200 DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM Cablt FIGURE 2.141000/1200 Simulator Hardware Connections FIGURE 1. 141000/1200 Simulator System Dlta Flow Description Command Open Open Open Open Close simulated ROM by te addressed by N simulated RAM by te addressed by N simulated OPLA byte addressed by N next srquentiallocation open location Open pre\liou~ NNNI NN. NN(LF) (CRI (VA) X S L M N:V :V N:V :G N:G N:P Save a pro8ram on a new or existing disk file load a program from a disk file J' Continue executintt from encountered BKPT ;IIi N N;IIi SV SR SK ;K SO Trace one instruction Trace one instruction sequential location Return to MAID LP to continue) Return to MOOS Set breakpoint at location N Remove all breakpoints Remove breakpoint at location N Execute user PGM from power up or intializc Execute user PGM from location N Execute until BKPT found N times Trace N instructions Display breakpoints Display/chanle target program registers Print K and allow alteration Clear software K Print O-outputs FIGURE 3. USER Commend. Ordering Information Part Number Description MEXI41000M 141000/1200 Simulator. including Cross Assembler (EXORci .. r or EXORterm land Simulator Package (Modul. and Software) MEXI4Ioo0(D) M 141000/1200 Simulator Vser,> Guide 1·50 MEX68CT MOTEST·I Component Tester MOTEST-I (MEX68CT) is a dynamic lSI tester that provides the EXORciser with the capability of testing the M6800 microcomputer family of parts in an environment that closely approximates the end use conditions. Presently, MOTEST-I has the capability of testing the MC6800 Microprocessor Unit (MPU), MC6820 Peripheral Interface Adapter (PIA), MC6850 Asynchronous Communications Interface Adapter (ACIA), MCM681 0 128 x 8 Bit Static Random Access Memory (RAM), MCM6604 type Dynamic RAM, 4096K I Bit, and MCM6830 1024 x 8 Bit Read Only Memory (ROM). Using the Universal ROM card, additional TTL-compatible ROMs can also be accommodated. • Functionally tests M6800 microcomputer family of parts in real time • Can be adapted to test other devices: memories, TTL parts, CMOS parts, and other microprocessors • One EXORciser will control up to eight test heads • Uses internal EXORciser power (+5 Vdc) or ext~rnal power (determined by user) • Provides statistical log which indicates PART TYPE, TOTAL TESTED, TOTAL FAILED, and % GOOD for each test head • Provides interlocking between test program and personality card in the test head • Optional footswitch control • Optional extender allows personality card to be located in environmental chamber for environmental testing • PASS/FAll indications 1-51 Ordering Information When ordering MOTEST-I, the user selects the options he requires. An appropriate suffix to each basic part number is required to define the medium on which the executive and test programs are to be supplied. Part Number Description MEX68CT A,B,D,M Component Tester Test Head (I) Control Card (I ) Interface Cables (2) Executive Program (I) Options Part Number Description MEX68CT2, A,B,D,M MEX68CTJ A,B,D,M MEX68CT4 A,B,D,M MEX68CTS A,B,D,M MEX68CT6·1 D,M (l6·pin) MEX68CT6·2 A,B,D,M (24·pin) MEX68CT7 A,B,D,M MPU (MC6800) Per.. nality Card, Test Propam PIA (MC6820) Per.. nality Card, Teat Propam ACIA (MC68S0) Penonality Card, Teat Propam ROM (MCM6830) Penonality Card, Teat Program ROM Universal Personality Card, Test Propam Universal ROM Personality Card, Test Program RAM (MCM6810) Personality Card, Teat Propam A SUff"1X - Cassette, B - Paper Tape, 0 - EDOS DiIIkette, M - MOOS Dillkette MEX68CT MOTEST·I General Description The MOTEST-I system requires an EXORciser containing an MPU Module, Debug Module, Baud Rate Module, and the required memory. The memory size is determined by the number of device types being tested. MOTEST-I, itself, consists of a control card which plugs into the EXORciser, interface cables, test head, Executive program, test programs and a personality card designed for each particular part. One EXORciser will control up to eight test heads without any restriction on the mix of parts being tested. When setting up your test system, it is important to remember that each test head requires a control card and a set of interface cables to connect the test head to the EXORciser. To set up the system, the interface cables are connected to the control card, and the control card is then inserted into the EXORciser. The other ends of the interface cables are connected to the test head. If external voltages are required, they can be connected to the external power jack located on the side of the test head. To test a part, the user simply selects and inserts the particular personality card into the test head, loads the Executive and appropriate test program (using the LOAD function of EXbug) into the EXORciser, and MOTEST-I is ready to evaluate the device. The user now installs the device to be evaluated into the test socket located on the personality card, presses the TEST switch and monitors the indicators to see if the part has passed or failed. System Software MOTEST-I system software consists of one Executive program and a test program for each personality card. EXECUTIVE - The Executive performs the function of initializing and polling the control cards for a start test interrupt, verifying the device/test program interlock, controlling power to device under test so that it can be installed and removed with power off, providing a statistical log on request, and providing a command structure to aid setup. TEST PROGRAM - The test program, upon receiving control from the Executive program, performs the following functions: calculates the test device address, sets up the control PIAs to perform the test, and sequentially tests each parameter of the test device. Control is returned to the Executive program as a result of a PASS or FAIL indication. 1·52 MEX68CT MOTEST·I Component Tester EXORciser TEST HEAD MOTHER CARD MEX68CT lESl HEAD INTERFACE. CABLES P1 P2. ADDRE~ SE.lEC.T SWITCH PASS IHDICA10R PERSONALITY CARD \ 1~T ~WI1CH 1-53 Component Testing Control is I'fItIInred to fIHI &ecutltte Progf8m due to eItheI' PASS IN FAIL. MPU Testing The following tests are performed on the MPU: • The test program is loaded into the two resident • The program is now run again and the results 128 byte RAMs. checked. • Control is transferred to the MPU under test, and the • The program is again modifed to run at 2AXXI6. "instruction set" (I) is executed. Termination is a The instruction SEI is exchanged for CLI on this pass. WAI causing BA to go true. • The program is now run again and the results • The EXORciser looks for BA from the MPU under checked. test or time out, whichever comes first. • The instructions not previously executed, as • NMI and IRQ are independently pulled causing the described in footnote (I), are now run. These include MPU to go to another WAI in the program, depending stack and index register codes. subroutine jumps and upon the state of the interrupt mask described in the returns flagged by the index register. following step. • Upon successful completion of the program that has • Modification of the program changes the running just run, TSC is enabled by the EXORciser causing the MPU under test to execute the code in location address from 00XXI6 to 55XX16. The instruction CLI is substituted for SEI on this pass. FFFF 16· • NMI is then enabled, vectoring the MPU to another • Assuming successful execution of the first pass, as evidenced by returning control to the EXORciser WAI instruction. and reading the memory and comparing the results • Memory is again checked for successful execution of to known check sums, the program is modified. the second program. PIA Testing The following tests are performed on the PIA: • Test Reset line clears all PIA registers. • Test B-side Chip Selects and A-side Write Enable. • Test ability to read/write Data Direction Registers. • Test three-state capability of CA2 and CB2. • Test A-Data Register as an output while driving • Test CAl and CBI as interrupt input lines. B-Data Register as an input. • Test CA2 as an output line while CB2 is an input line. • Test A-side Chip Selects and B-side Write Enable. • Test CB2 as an output line while CA2 is an input line. • Test B-Data Register as an output while driving A-Data Register as an input. ACIA Testing The following tests are performed on the ACIA: • Test Master Reset. • Test ACIA for ability to transmit and receive data at 110 baud. • Test ACIA for ability to transmit and receive data at 5200 baud. • Test ACIA at different word lengths and parity selections using 500 kHz clock rate. • Test for Transmit Interrupt and double buffering capability. • Test Break. Static RAM Testing • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Test Ready to Send, RTS. Test Clear to Send, CTS. Test Data Carrier Detect, DCD. Test Receive Interrupt. Test Overrun Error. Test Framing Error. Test Chip Selects. Test False Start Bit Detection. Test Parity Error Detection. 1028 x 8 Bits. The following tests are performed: Walking Address test. Bit pattern AA R/W test. Bit pattern 55 R/W test. Galloping Read test. Galloping Write test. • Walking Bit Pattern tests. 10000000 00 I 00000 01000000 000 I 0000 • Test Chip Selects. 00001000 00000100 00000010 00000001 ROM Testing The following tests are performed on the ROM: • The Chip Selects are enabled. The ROM is read, and • The message flag is tested. If the flag is a one, the ROM is read, and its contents are saved to be used as its contents are compared to the reference pattern. • One Chip Select at a time is disabled. The ROM is a reference pattern. The flag is then set to a zero. If the flag is a zero, the ROM is tested. read to test the function of the respective Chip The following tests are then performed: Select. (I) The instruction sel is incremenled from 01 "NOP"lo FF ··STX". All undefmed codes index modification codes JSR RTI stack modification codes are omllIed m Ihe valid OP code fLle and lesled separalely. 1-54 ' , , , stack or ® MOTOROLA M/CROSYSTEMS MEX68PI2 Printer Interface Module • Provides interface between Development System and Centronics Printer • Jumper selectable memory map assignment • Provisions for customer supplied circuits are included • A 20 pin header for implementation of priority interrupts, mUlti-paged memory, and special I/O system The MEX68PI2 Printer Interface Module provides the interface required between the Development System and a printer. The configuration of the module, as wired at the factory, is for the standard Centronics interface. The address is preset to ECIO for use by the MOOS and EXbug software. Provisions are included on the module for user supplied custom circuitry to facilitate interface with other printer specifications. Specifications Inpul SipII. LoPe "0" LoPe "I" TTL .01.... compatibl. DoIII .... Inpul LoPe MO" lapul LoPe M I" Outpul Lope "0" Outpul Lope "1" OutpuIOff·SIIII. Leakaa< Cu ....nl Th .....lllte TTL .01111&< compatible 0.0-0.8S V (100 p.A max II 0.4 V) 1.G-S.1S V (lS p.A max II S.lS V) 0.0-0.8S V (100 p.A max II 0.4 V) 1.O-S.lS V (lS /lA max II S.lS V) O.S V max 1140 mA thro..... I ftOiJlor 10 VCC 2.6 V min II 10 mA throulh I ftOiJlor 10 IfOUnd 100 /lA max 111.6 V Me68Bll Peripheral Inlm..,.. Ad.opter SipaIs" PAO-PA71npul/Oulpul J...ines PIO-PB7 Inpul/Oulpul J...ines CAl, CAl, and cal Conlrol SipoJ. CIl Control SipII IKQA ond IRQB S...... TTL .01.... compalibl. Th .....IIII. TTL .01 .... compllible TTL .01.... compalible Th .....IIII. TTL .01 .... compatible TTL .01.... compatibl. Openlina T.........tu .. 010700C hwer Requile....nts 5 Vdc III A max "'yliaol DimenIioIll W.H.T "Se. MC68B21 9.75 x 6.00 • 0.062 in. data sh •• t for speCIfications on th... SIgnals. Ordering Information The foUowina IIIb1e lists lhe informllion necesury for onleriDa modules, ables, or monuob. TYPE NUMBER DESCRIPTION MEX68Pll Printer Interfoce Module MEX68PIC Inlerconaecl Coble MEX68PIl(D) Uoer'.Guid. 1-55 MEX68PI2 PRINTER INTERFACE MODULE DATA OUTPUT DRIVERS AODRESS DECODER . - - - OUT-PP INPUT AC KNOWLEDGE- o ATASTAOBE ~ SELECT - r-- FAULT - BUSY DATA OUTPUT DRrVERS , " ~ ADDRESS PIA I DECODER T SYSTEM BUS BUF FER . . I I CONTROL & AODRE.SS DATA TIMING BUS BUS SIGNALS 1·56 ® MOTOROLA MICROSYSTEMS MEX68PP3 EROM/PROM Programmer Module The MEX68PP3 EROM/PROM Programmer Module provides the EXORciser or EXORterm with the capability of programming several types of EROM and PROM devices. This module plugs directly into the EXORciser or EXORterm and is compatible with the EXbug firmware and Disk Operating Systems. as well as MINIBUG II/III and Microbug. The EROM/PROM Programmer Module, with its software, enables the user to program a device. verify the data in the device. and transfer data from the device to the EXORciser's or EXORterm's RAM memory. Software is available on cassette, paper tape, or diskette (EDOS and MOOS). Devices that can be Programmed Monolithic Memories MolOroI. MCM68708 MCM2716 MCM7640/1 MCM2708 MCM7680/1 11(.8EROM 21(.8 EROM 512.8 Bipolar II(. 8 EROM I I( • 8 Bipolar Inlel 1NT2708/58 1I'\'I'l704 1NT2716 II(x8EROM 512.8 EROM 21(.8 EROM MMI5300/1 MMI5305/6 MMI5335/6 MMI5340/l MMI5380/1 MMI538415 MM16300/1 MMI6305/6 MM16335/6 MMI6340/1 MMI63~O/l MM16384/5 T.XD IrIIlnlm.nls TMS2708 TMS2716 11(.8EROM 21(.8 EROM Harris HM-7601/1 HM-7620/1 HM-7640/1 HM-7644 HM-768O/1 256 • 4 Bipolar 512 x 4 Bipolar 512.8 Bipolar I I( x 4 Bipolar I I( • 8 Bipolar 256 , 4 Bipolar 512 • 4 Bipolar 256 x 8 Bipolar 512 x 8 Bipolar I K x 8 Bipolar I K x 8 Bipolar 256 • 4 Bipolar 5 I 2 • 4 Bipolar 256 x 8 Bipolar 512 x 8 Bipolar I I( x 8 Bipolar I I( x 8 Bipolar Sign. tics 825126 82S129 825130/1 82S140/l 825180/1 82S2708 SIG2708 82S190/1 1-57 256 • 4 Bipolar 256 • 4 Bipolar 512.4 Bipolar 5 12 x 8 Bipolar I I( • 8 Bipolar I I( x 8 Bipolar 11(.8 EROM 21( x 8 Bipolar MEX68PP3 EROM/PROM PROGRAMMER MODULE Ordering Information The EROM/PROM ProJll'1lmmer Module is shipped wilh Ihe residenl soflware on Ihe medium selecled by Ihe user. The foliowinJlable Usls Ihe available oplions and Ihe part number 10 be used when ordering. Option /t. B O' M Part Number MEX6SPP3/t. MEX6SPP3B MEX6SPP30 MEX6SPP3M MEX6SPP3(O) Description Programmer Module with its software on cassette Proanmmer Module with its software on paper tape Programmer Module wilh its software on diskelle (EooSI Programmer Module wilh its software on diskelle (MooSI PROM ProJll'1lmmer III User's Guide 1-58 1·59 MEX68SA2 Systems Analyzer II • FleXible means of analYZing and troubleshooting MPU systems • May be used in the Development System or a stand alone troubleshooting tool • Incorporates its own control switches and indicators • Allows user to see what is going on inside his system • Reduces troubleshooting time • Allows user to analyze and troubleshoot his system in real time • Monitors and records the MPU bus address, data, and control lines, during each MPU iP]. clock pulse • Monitors up to four user selected optional inputs The MEX(,HSA2 Systems Analyzer provides an efficient and economical means of monitoring, analyzing. and troubleshooting M6800 Microprocessor Systems. This module wnnects directly into the MPU's bus and permits the user ac<:ess to the operations being performed inside of his MPU. The Systems Analyzer is <:apable of performing the following functions. • Stop the MC6800, MC68AOO, or MC68BOO MPU on detecting the selected compare conditions • Step through the MPU', progrJm • Lxamine and. If required. dlange the contcnb In the MPU ,ystem\ memory • I race through the MPU\ program • Monitor anu rewru (takes a snapshot at) the MPU's operation uuring a selecteu portion of the MPU's program • Print a hard copy of the data storeH ill the System, Analyzer memory during the snapshot operation The Syskllb Analyzer cOlbish of six major blocks anu ha, six moues of operation. The six major hlocks ~re Ihl' Switch and Inuicator Section, the COillpare Section. thl' Memory Section, the Bus Buffer Se<:tion. th,' liard ( opy Interfac,' Scc"!ioll. anu th,' Control Section. The Control Section uecodes the setting of th,' 'vIOIH' SFLHT sWitch anu detennllles the mouulc's moue of operation. MPU Run Moue, Step 'vIo at 2.6 V 128 " 32 blls of random access memory consisting of four MCM68B I 0 RAM devices o to 70·(" Po,""er Rt'quuemt"nh +S Vdc Output OH·Statt.' Lt'akage Current Memor) Sll'l' (Q 2.75 A Physu:al DimenSIOn" \\,H,( Ordering Information 9.75 x 14.0 x 0.062 in. Type Number MEX6BSA2 The followlIlg table lists thl' IIlformatlOn necessary for ordering module, or manual;. M~X6BSA2(1)1 1-60 I I Description Systems Analyzer Modute Vser's Guide Systems Analyzer Circuitry Switch and Indicator Section ThIS section provides the user with a means of entering the selected compare conditIOns and of monitoring the status of the MPU bus. The switch portion of this circuitry consists of four hexadecimal address switches, two hexadecimal data sWllches, and a connector to permit the user to insert up to four optional input signals that he Wishes to monllor. The ondlcator portion of thiscircuit consists of four hexadecimal address dISplays, two hexadeCImal data displavs. and none LED dlSpla~. The LEoS display the stalUs of the MPU (running or halted), the status of the four MPU control Signals (R/W, VMA, IRQ, and NMI), and the status of the four user·selected optional input signals to the module. Compare Section This seCtion, when enabled, compares the MPU bus signals With the output of the hexadectmal SWitches in the SWitch and indicator secUon to detect the sele,ted compare conditions. A switch in each of the compare lines can be enabled or dtsabled to meet the selected compare conditions. On detecting these conditions, this ,,,cull appiles a compare strobe to the other sectIOns on the module. Memory Section This section consists of four MCM68B I 0 128 x 8·bit RAM memory devices arranged into a 128 x 32·bit memory array. This memory, when enabled stores the bus status - 16 address lines, 8 data lines, VMA, RfW, IRQ, NMI, and the four user selected optlollal onputs during each MPU 1/J2 dock pulse. The memory is enabled to record data during the snapshot operation in the Trace and Window Modes. Bus Buffer Section This section interfaces the Systems Analyzer Module into the Development System or the user's system. The data bus buffer devices may be changed to interface the module with a low·true or high·true system. Display Interface Section This section, working with the Development System's EXbug Firmware, permits the user to print a hard copy of the data stored in the module's memory. If the Systems Analyzer is not working with the Development System, and the user wishes to use the module's hard copy capability, he is required to develop the appropriate I/O routines in his system's program. Control Section Th" secUon dewde, the set tlng of the MODE SELECT switch and determines which of the module's operation IS 1o he SIX mode~ ul u~eJ. In the MPU Run Mode Ihe Systems Analyzer IS disabled and effectively removed from the user's system. In the Step Mode the Systems Analyzer monitors the MPU bus and, on detecting the selected compare conditions. halts the MPU. The user now can step Ihrough Ihe user's program. In the Standby Mode the Systems AnalY7cr holds the MPU in Ihe Slale It was placed In while Ihe module was on Ihe Read/Wrote ur Step Mode. In Ihe Read/Write Mode Ihe Systems AnalYler halts the MPlI on delecllng the serected compare condilions. ThIS now permits the user 10 examone and. If reqUITed, change Ihe con lent' on Ihe MPlI's memmy The he~adecimal ~wllches In the SWitch ~elecl the data 10 he wTltten IOto memory. In Ihe Trace Mode Ihe Systellls AnalYler stores the MPlJ hus status on Its memory durong each I/J~ Liock pulse. On detecting the selected cOlllpare COlllhtlons. Ihe Systems AnalYler stores an add""",al h4 hus ,tat" Jnd then halt, the MPU. The user now can examone the 128 bus states· the 63 bus states before the selected compare conditions, the selected compare conditIOn bus state, and 63 bus states after the selected (.:ompare (onditions recorded In the' modulc\ memory. In the Window Mode. as In Ihe '[ ra(C Mode. the Sy'tems Analyzer Slor" the MPl: bus states on Its memory dUring each 1/J2 clock pulse. On detectlllg the ,elected compare condillons the module stores an addltlo"al h4 bus Slate, .tnd then stops stoTing d.ata. In thiS mode, however, the MPlJ I~ not halted hut continues running ano the user ha~ OJ snap~h()1 or wlIH.low view of the operations heing performed III Ihe selected portion of hiS program. The user can now examine the I ~x hu, states Within the selecled Window area and, if de,ired, print a hard copy of Ihese hus states 1-61 SWITCH AND INDICATOR SECTION COMPARE SECTION CONTROL SECTION MEMORY SECTION DISPLAY INTERFACE SECTION BUS BUFFER SECTION M~MORY SECTION lIt I ,. ~ H~RD fflPV COMPAR~ INTER I>U. SECTION SECTION r-- 8US .8 ~UH:E.R I CONTROL SECTION t 1 I SWITCH AND IHDICATOR SE.CTlOI'I t 1 SECTIOH .~6 ,!fa DATA 8US I>.DORESS sus COrmn. sus 1-62 I Systems Analyzer Interface Signals The MEX68SA2 Systems Analyzer Module plugs directly into the Development System bus or may be connected to the MPU's bus in the user's system. Data Bus (00-I5?) or Data Bus (OO-D7) - These eight bidirectional lines, when enabled, provide a two-way transfer of data between the MPU Module in the Development System or the MPU in the user's system and the selected memory location. When the MPU has been halted, the Systems Analyzer controls the flow of data on this bus. These bus signals in the Development System are low true. The user can, through installing the appropriate bus device, change these signals for high true operation. Address Bus (AO·AI S) These 16 hnes. when en. bled. transfer the selected address to the system's memory and ",put/output deVices When the Systems An.IYler is h.hed, II cQntrols this line. Read/Write (R/W) Th" MPU output stgn.1 indicates whether the MPU is performing a memory read (high) or write (low) operatum. The norm.1 standby state of tins hne IS read. Also. when the MPU is halted, this si~nal will be in the re.d state. The Systems AnalYLrr. '" hailing the MPL'. gams control of this Signal and can initiate a memory read or wllte "peratu",. Valid Memory Address (VMA) This Ime, when present, indicates to the memory and peripheral devices that the address on the bus is valid. The MPU's VMA output signal must be modified to allow the Systems Analyzer Module to pull this line high and address the memory and peripheral devices when the MPU is halted. Valid User Address (VUA) - This signal is produced by the DEbug 11 Module. When high, this signal indicates that the address on the bus is valid, and the MPU is NOT addressing the EXbug program. Valid Executive Address (VXA) - A high level signal generated by the DEbug 11 Module in place of the VUA signal 'when the Development System is operating in the Dual Map mode and the EXbug program is addressing the Executive portion of the memory map. Page Enable (PEN) - This signal is generated by a user-built controller that converts the VMA signal from the MPU into one of several "pages" of 64 K bytes each. This addressing capability could be used in multiple terminal or disk, and extended memory systems. , Phase 2 (¢2) Clock Signal - This signal is between 100kHz .nd I Mllz. and is used to synchronize the transfer of data on the data bus. This signal is controlled by the MPU dock. Bus Available (BA) -- This MPU output ~al is normally in a low state. When activated. it Will go high indicating that the MPU is available. This will occur if the Hill line is low ur the MPU IS in the WAIT state as the result of executing a WAIT instruction. At such time, all the MPU three-state output drivers will go to their off or high impedance state and all other outputs to therr normally mac live state. An interrupt command remuves the MPU from the WAIT state. The Systems Analyzer uses thIS SIgnal to mdieate the status of the MPU halted or running. Interrupt Request (IRQ) -- This level sensitive input, on going low, requests that an interrupt sequence be generated in the system. The MPU will wait until it completes the current instruction that it is executing before it recognizes this request. At that time, if the interrupt mask bit in the MPU Condition Code Register is not set, the MPU will begin the Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI) This level sensllive input, on guing low, requests that an interrupt sequence be generated wlthm the system. The MPlJ will wait until II completes the current instruction that it is executing before It recognizes this request. At this time, the MPU will begin its non-maskable interrupt routine. The Systems AnOl)yzer also monllors thIS stgnal. Reset ThIS edge sensitive signal initiates an MPL! power-on vectored interrupt initialize routine when the user resets his systems. This signal. in addition to resetting the system's MPU, is used to reset and initialize the Systems Analx!er"s Peripheral Interface Adapter deviLes. Halt When thIS level senSillve Signal IS low, all actiVity III the MPU will be halted. In the halt mode, the microprocessor will stop at the end of an instruction, the Bus Available Signal will be at a high level, and all of the threestate lines Will be III their high impedance state. The MPU's VMA signal must be modified to allow the Systems Analyzer Module access to the MPU system's memory and peripherals when it has halted the MPU. 1-63 ® MOTOROLA MICROSYSTEMS MEX68SPM System Performance Monitor • Single board measurement tool - EXORciser/ EXORterm compatible • No requirement for dedicated control terminal • Simple operation • Completely transparent to measured system • Measurement data collected in real time • Over 6000 samples per second • Storage for experiments up to one week without loss of data • SPM performs both data c",llection and data reduction SerioLls efforts to improve computer programming, system throughput, and the quality of computer software must begin with software measurement. Motorola's System Performance Monitor (SPM) is a tool which measures the relative frequency of reference to memory locations in an M6800 microcomputer system. From the data, the user can determine processor utilization and identify program areas for reorganization or optimization. Data collected by the SPM also provides a quantitative basis for decisions regarding hardware/software tradeoffs and system capacity. The SPM performs its function by periodically sampling the address lines of the measured system. This information is collected to produce a map of system address frequency characteristics. At the completion of an experiment, the SPM formats and prints a report on a control terminal. This terminal is also used to mitialize system parameters. Operating Modes The SPM may be used to monitor any portion of the 64K M6800 address space, coUectinS data on RAM, ROM. or I/O utilization. Three monitorins modes are provided: • The entire 64K address space 2S6 byte resolution • A 16K addr... block beginning al any mod 100016 addr... 64 byl...soIulion • A 4K addr... block beginning al any mod 100016 addrns 16 byte rt'50lution For 4K or 16K experiments. address references outside the specifted region are accumulated and reported as a sin&le sa-listie. Idle bus cycles ue rt'ported as an indication or processor utilization. 1-64 MEX68SPM SYSTEM PERFORMANCE MONITOR Control/Monitor Switch A two-position switch on the top of the SPM board determines the Iwo major operating modes. Whene\ler this switch is moved to the MONITOR position. the SPM prints an "M" on the control console and begins sampling the address bus and accumulating the 8ddrns frequency data. When the switch is moved to the CONTROL position. the SPM suspends its monitoring operation. While in the CONTROL mode. I~e SPM wlll accepl commands from Ihe conlrol console. Command Summary The (oOowing commands from the control console are recognized by the SPM I - Initialize all monitor parameters and clear all counters. The SPM responds to the I command with "A.S". which prompts the user to enter the beginning address and size of the memory area to be monitored. H Print results in histogram fonnat. foUowed by a results summary. S Print results summary only_ BREAK . Stop print operation and wait for next command. Ordering Information ParI Number Description MEX68SPM System Perfonnance Module MEX68SPM(D) System Performance Module User's Guide 1-65 ® M/CROSYSTEMS MOTOROLA MEX68USEB UserSystem EvaluatorB The MEX68USEB User System Evaluator (USE), working with the M6800 EXORciser/ EXORterrn and the optional MEX68SA Systems Analyzer Module, provides the user with the complete systems development tool. That is, USE extends all of the Development System EXbug functions and all of the optional Systems Analyzer functions into the user's system. The USE-equipped Development System provides the designer with the capability of cClnfiguring an emulation of his M6800 or M6802 microprocessor system in the EXORciser/EXORterrn, external to the EXORciser/EXORterm, or a combination of EXORciser/EXORterrn-mounted modules working with the user's ex ternal system. The designer also can develop his system software and firmware on the Development System and can use the USE-equipped Development System to debug his system hardware and software. In fact, a USE-equipped EXORciser/EXORterm can even be used to test and evaluate the user's production systems. USE consists of three assemblies: the USE Processor Module, the USE Intercept Module, and the USE Cable and Buffer Assembly. The USE Processor Module is used in place of the MEX6800 MPU Module in the EXORciser/EXORterm and provides the following functions: • Provides the EXORciser/EXORterm internal clock circuitry, when USE is not in use. • Provides switch selectable option of using the EXORciser/EXORterm clock or USER's system clock for overall system (User's system and EXORciser/EXORterrn). • Provides switch selectable option of either User's system or EXORciser/EXORterm generation of NMI signal. • Disable switches for RESET, NMI, IRQ, HALT. • Interfaces selected MC6800 MPU signals (IRQ, NMI, HALT, VMA, and BA) with the optional Systems Analyzer Module via the USE Intercept Module. NOTE: If the Development System is using dynamic memory in an M6800 system and the user's system clock option is to be used, the user's system clock must have the capability to refresh dynamic memory in the EXORciser/EXORterrn. The USE Intercept Module plugs directly into the Development System bus and is used to mount the optional Systems Analyzer Module. A cable assembly couples the selected control signals between the Systems Analyzer and the USE Processor Module. The USE Cable and Buffer Assembly connects the USE Processor Module into the user's system. A 4o-pin connector on this assembly plugs into the MPU socket in the user's system permitting the USE Processor Module's MPU to control the operation of the user's system. In this application·, everything within the EXORciser/EXORterm appears to be within the MPU in the user's system. Through special jumper connections, this assembly also can transfer the timing signals required by the dynamic memories in the Development System to operate with the user's system clock. In addition, the USE Cable and Buffer Assembly buffers the transferred signals. EXORciser. EXOAterm and EXbug are trademarks of Motorola Inc. 1-66 MEX68UsEB User System EvaluatorB Features • • • • • • • • Extends the EXbug functions into the user's M6800 or M6802 system. Operates from the user's system clock or from the EXORciser/EXORterm internal clock. Permits the user to share the EXORciser/EXORterm memory and input/output modules with the user's system. Extends t . optional Systems Analyzer Module's functions into the user's system when the Systems Analyzer is used with the Development System. Provides convenient block/fault isolation. Uses present commands· no new protocol to be learned. Automatic system configuration· no need to enter memory locations; Development System modules are given priority over ex temal memory at the same address. Jumper selectable for M6800 or M6802 USE (shipped as M6800 USE). Ordering Information The foUowing table identifies the options of the MEX68USEB user System Evaluator B Module. For further information, contact your local sales offICe. Part Number MEX68USEB MEX68USE2B M68DTIU2B M68SXS I 02BO MEX68USEB(D) Description USEB, including Processor Module, Intercept Module, Cable and Buffer Assembly USEB Cable and Buffer Assembly (used to update previous MEX68USE to 6800/6802 capability) EXORciser with USEB, Table Top, 220 Vac EXORterm 200 with USEB, 220 Vac User System Evaluator User's Guide 1-67 ® MOTOROLA MICROSYSTEMS MEX68USM Universal Support Module • Fully decoded switch selectable address capability • Large wire-wrap socket area for custom circuitry • Fully buffered hi-directional address bus and data hus • 20 pIn header for implementation of priority interrupts, multi-paged memory, and special I/O systems • Jumper selectable memory map assignment • Two 50 pin edge connectors and one 20 pin edge provides custom circuitry interface. The MEX68USM Universal Support Module provides the user with the capability to design a unique module to implement the M6800 family of parts. The complete development system bus is available for the user to implement by header, platforms, wire-wrap sockets, or switch selection. Three I/O edge connectors provide 120 lines accessible at plated-through holes. Four hexadecimal address select switches allow the user to generate a fully decoded chip select. In addition, two header areas provide a "don't care" option on each address line. Specifications Address and (onlrol Bus Logic "0" Logic "I" Dala Bus Inpul Logic "0" Inpul Logic" I" Ouipul L,ogic "0" Oulpul Logic" I" Output Off·State leakage Current Power Requirements TTL ~oltage compatible 0.0-0.85 V 1200 IlA max al 0.4 V) 2.0-5.25 V (25 IlA max al 5.25 V) Three-stale TTL voltage compatible 0.0-0.85 V (200 IlA max al 0.4 V) 2.0-5.25 V (251lA max a15.25 V) O.S V max at 40 rnA through a resistor to +S Vdc (II 2A max +12 Vdc -12 Vdc Physical Dimensions WxHxT 9.75 x 6,00 x 0.062 in. Ordering Information The foUowina table lists the infonnation necessary for ordering modules. or manuals. TYPE NUMBER Vee 2.6 V min at 10 rnA through a resistor to ground 100 IlA max 81 2.6 V DESCRIPTION IIIEX68USill Universal Supporl Module MEX68USM(D) User's Guide 1-68 MEX68USM UNIVERSAL SUPPORT MODULE ADDRESS SWITCHES eH" SELECT lQCIC SYSTEM eus BUFFERS SYSTEM BUS BUFFER CONTROL TIMI~G SIGNALS SIGNALS ADDRESS DATA BUS BUS 1-69 M/CROSYSTEMS ® MOTOROLA MEX68WW Wirewrap Module Option I ~ • Standard size EXORciser plug-in module • Compatible with the EXORciser bus • Standard pin spacing for 14, 16, and 24-pin wirewrap sockets • Provisions for two 50-pin f1atribbon cable connectors • Permits user to incorporate his custom circuits into the EXORciser emulated system The MEX68WW Universal Wirewrap Module permits the user to construct and incorporate his custom circuits into an EXORciser emulated system. Incorporated on the module are the power bus and the ground bus printed wiring runs. Also, the module has standard pin spacing and provisions for 14, 16, and 24-pin wirewrap sockets and for two 50-pin wirewrap f1atribbon cable connectors. Specifications Physical Dimensions: WxHxT 9.75 x 5.75 x 0.062 in. MEX68XT Extender Module Option , I • Extends any EXOR~iser plug-in module for testing, trouble·shoot ing, and debugging • Interfaces with all EXOR~iser plug-in modules • Compatible with the l·.XORciser bus • Provides clip-on test points for all EXORciser bus signals I I The MEX68XT Extender Module enables the user to extend any EXORciser plug-in module for servicing, testing. trouble'shooting, and debugging. I his module provides clip-on test points, giving the user ac~ess to the I:XORciser bus. Specifications Physical Dimensions: WxHxT 9.75 x 9.00 x 0.062 in. 1-70 MICROSYSTEMS @MOTOROLA MGD6800DSM Data Security Module • NMOS LSI implementation of DES • 400Kbps operation (excluding software overhead) • Block cipher or cipher feedback operating modes • Switch selectable memory addresses • Optional EROM capability • EXORciser & Micromodule compatible • TIL Voltage compatible Description The MGD6800DSM Data Security Module (OSM) provides encryptIOn capability for the M6800 EXORciser and Micromodule systems. The algorithm employed in the OSM IS the Data Encryption Standard (DES) as adopted by the U.S. Department of Commerce National Bureau of Standards (ref. FIPS PUB 46) The DES algorithm is implemented within a custom single 'chip NMOS LSI device. Provision is made on the DSM for Inclusion of an optional MCM68708 or e MDS development system and SBC module family. The algorithm employed in the DSM is the Data Encryption Standard (DES) as adopted by the U. S. Dept. of Commerce National Bureau of Standards (ref. FIPS PUB 46). The DES algorithm is implemented within a custom. single chip. NMOS LSI device. Provision is made on the DSM for inclusion of an optional MCM68708 or equivalent EROM for control program or encryption key storage. The DS M contains all circuitry required for total interface compatibility with any M DS or SBC system. Hexidecimally-coded switches are provided to allow the user to locate the base address of the DSM and the optional EROM within the allowable system memory field. The DSM encryption functions include: • enciphering data • deciphering data • loading of key (immediate active or major) • loading and processing of previously ciphered key for immediate active utilization • restoration of major key for immediate active utilization The DSM provides active key parity status and algorithm processing status. These signals may be used to control data encryption for either polling or interrupt driven architectures. ·R~I!I'ereCl The DS M is designed to encipher or decipher 64 bit blocks of data under the control of a 56 bit key. Algorithm processing time is a direct function of clock rate with the minimum time being 160 I' seconds for a 64 bit block of data. DSM clock rate =2.0 M Hz. The total effective data encryption throughput rate in a specific system application is a function of the encryption mode utililed (e.g .. block mode or cipher feedback mode) and the userdefined system control software. firmware. A spare section of the DS M is configured as a 0.1" by 0.3" spaced matrix pattern for standard wire wrap sockets to accommodate special user defined circuitry. Trademark 01 INTEL Corporat.on NOTICE: Thlle products may not be exported without prior approvil Irom the U.S Dept. 01 Stlte. Dfllce 01 Munitions Control. 1-73 Specifications Inpul SiRnals (conlrol) Inpul SiR~als (address) Dala Bus Logic Logic Logic Logic I nput Input "0" -I" "0" "I" Logic "0" Logic ..... OutpUI Logic "0" Output Logic "I" OutpUI OFf State Leakage OperalinR Temperalure Po .. er Requirements AIRorilhm Operalion Dala Oulpul Physical Dimensions W x H x T 13,54 ISS DID BAlE ADDRE. . SWITCH II EROM ENABLE IWITCH 1-74 0.0-0.B5V (-200 JJA max. al 0.4V) 2.0-5.2SV (2S JJ A max. al !i.2SV) O.O-O.BV (-2.0 mA max al 0.5V) 2.0-S.2SV (1.0 mA max al 5.5V) O.O-O.SS\' (-200 JJ A max al 0.4V) 2.0-S.2SV (25 JJ A max al 5.25V) 0.5\' max al -40mA Ihru resislor 10 Vcc 2.6\' min al -IOmA Ihru resislor 10,gnd. 100 JJ A max al 2.6\' 01070°(, +SV al I A max. +12\' al [ROM MFG\ spec -12\' al t:ROM MFG's spec plus B mA 320 ( ycles (software merhead ncluded) 160 JJ sec al 2M Hz DSD clock 500 nsec per 8 bit b~ Ie 12.0 X 6,75 X 0.062 inch I' I 82 EROM BAli! ADORE. . 8WITCH DIP COMPATIBLE USER BREADBOARD AREA ® MOTOROLA Microsvst8lns MEX6801EVM Evaluation module Features • • • • • • • • • Single Module - EXORciser-bus Compatible Incorporates an MC6801 Debug Monitor Provides RS-232C Interface Sockets can be added to incorpora~e Optional ACIA, PTM, 2K EPROM and 4K Bytes of Static RAM. Address Map Established by ROM to Permit Reconfigura tion Additional Decoding Provided for 8K of Off-Board Memory Large Wire Wrap Area Two Modes of Operation: Single Chip or Expanded Low Cost GENERAL DESCRIPTION The MEX680 I EVM Microcomputer Evaluation Module is a completely self-contained microcomputer on a single printed circuit card. The Microcomputer Evaluation Module provides the user with the means of evaluating the MC6801 microcomputer. The system allows the user to easily evaluate the MC680 I microcomputer. As configured, the MC6801 may be evaluated in either the Single Chip or Expanded mode by attaching an RS-232C-compatible terminal to the serial port of the Module. Thus, the minimum functioning system consists of only the MC6801 and an MCI488 and MC1489. The Evaluation Module provides the user with the ability to evaluate the MC6801 microcomputer in the Single Chip mode using the debug monitor via the serial I/O port and RS-232C interface. Refer to Table A for a description of the debug commands. A 2.4576 MHz crystal is used to generate the standard baud rates of 150, 600, and 4800 baud. Sufficient space remains within the on-chip RAM for the user to write a small I/O program to work in conjunction with the debug monitor. The debug monitor program (LILBUG) uses a patch table established within RAM for all I/O. Thus, the debug program's I/O routines can be readily modified by the user for the purpose of evaluation. Since the debug monitor uses the timer output and the serial I/O port. these resources are not available to the user in the Single Chip mode. However, by using the Expanded mode, the user has the choice of adding an ACIA or PTM, thereby freeing more of the on-chip resources. The Evaluation Module has provision for adding 4K bytes of static RAM and a 2K byte EPROM. This permits to develop his programs if desired. In addition. the Expanded mode allocates 8K bytes of off-board program space for further programming Ikxibility. A wirewrap area is provided to permit the user to interface other IWripllt'ral lkvi,'es or special interface circuits to the MC680 I. 1-75 TABLE A. MEX6801 EVM Debug Commands COMMAND EXPLANATION Load. propam from tape. B Enter Lo.d a ptopam hom tape with an offset B · Remove a breakpoint at the specifted addrea. COMMAND EXPLANATION L 'L I breakpoint at the spedflCd address. V Verify .hli • p'OIram was properly loaded. G <... DDR> Start program execution at the specun Iddrea. V Verify that an offset. G Start program execution at the current ptopam counter setting. o Display «:onlents of memory f,om to . R Display/chan. the contents of the protram rqisten and counter. ReJister contents are displayed u.sinc the following fonnat: . P . propam was properly loaded with Punch/record on tape the contents of memory from M < ... DDR> I 10 P·XXXX X·XXXX ...·XX B-XX C·XX SoXX p. . Examine/modify the contents of the specified addrets location. Enter one byte of data to replace the value at the current address location. LF Display the contents of the next sequential memory location on the next line and enable the contents of this lOCI lion to be chanJCd (IF = Line Feed). Sp Display the contents of the next sequential memory location on the same line and cnable the contents of this lOCI lion to be chanpd (SP 3 SPace). where: P X A B C S XXXX:: Current J6-bit value XX :::: Current 8-bit value Increment the memory loalion pointer, but do not displly the address or dltl. The contents of this memory location may still be changed. This entry permits data to be entered at tequential memory locatioru without displlying the current address or data. u... < ... DDR>/ T , Display the contents of the speCified address location and enable the contents of this location to be changed. Calculate the relative offset of a branch instruction from ADORJ to ADDR2. B Display all breakpoints. B Delete all breakpoints. Replace current register value with new DATA. SP Display current register value (unless chanaed.by the command). Close the current register and display the next register nmeumonic and dash. The R command terminates afler examining/changina the stack pointer or whenever any character other than or SP is entered (SP., SPace). 1-76 Trace the number of instructions specified in hexadecimal. C Call and execute a user routine as a subroutine startina at the specified address. A return address to the deb... program is stored in the user's stack. When the uter', RTS instruction is executed (at the end of the user's routine), the debq program retains propam control and the current contents of the registers are displayed. C Same as the C command except that the execution begins from the current address in the program counter. LO Set low speed-30/lS characters per second for on-chip clock. HI Set high speed-120/60 characters per second for on-chip clock. Terminate the memory eumine/modify command and accept next command (CR '" Carriage Return). Display the address and contents of the memory location last referenced by the memory examine/modify command. o Trace one instruction. Display the contents of the previous memory location on the next line and enable the contents of this location to be changed (VA'" Up Arrow). Display the current address of the memory location pointer and the contents of that location. CR '" Program Counter =Index Register =Accumulator A '" Accumulator B = Condition Code Register '" Stack Pointe, ® M68ADS. M68ADW. MOTOROLA POLYVALENT DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM AUTONOMOUS DEVELOPMENT AUTONOMOUS DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM SYSTEMS The M68ADS. is a complete development system including facilities for developing a hardware/software design and provides a very cost PDS effective CRT terminal capability that avoids the use of the noisy and slow teletypewrtter. The Autonomous Development System consists of: • 1 M68MEB1 Microprocessor Evaluation Board which includes: - 1 M68SAC1 Stand Alone Computer - 1 MEC68MIN2 MINI BUG II Firmware • 1 M68DIM Display Interface Module • 1 M68MDM1 5" Display Monitor • M6810S1 Input/Output Supervisor Firmware M68ADS. • 1 M68KBD1 Full ASCII Keyboard • 1 M681CC1 Interconnection Cables Set • 1 M68BSC1 Bus System Card The M68ADS. can be used as a complete development system with full MINI BUG II and lOS firmware capability or as a multi· terminal for the EXORciser. These configurations are switch selectable. BLOCK DIAGRAM MICROPROCESSOR EVALUATION 80ARO BB I EJ I B [MINIBUG D [ [ r- U 105 f---- PI '"co '"'" ::; I uSER·S ~ RAM/RDM PIA '".... '"~ '"co::J r - \ M611CCI f P3 Bps 0 a: "::;u IN TERMINAL CONFIGURATION CONNECTION TO ()CORc' .. ' P4 '---I I I L r I M68MEBI DISPLAY INTERFACE MOOULE M680lM L-_ I t MONIT~j DISPLAY M68MDMl 1-77 PRINTER I M68MPRl I _ _ _ ---.1 ASCII KEYBOARD M68KBDl I M68ADS• • M68ADW. MINI BUG II FIRMWARE FEATURES MEC68MIN2 ROM MEC68MIN21 Listing The Minibug II Firmware provides the user with an efficient means to debug his program. It communicates with a serial peripheral (which can be the IDS ACIA) through an ACIA located in 800S and works with either 1 or 2 stop bits. Memory Load L Load Binary object tape Z Print/Punch Dumps (from vect. A0021 A003 to vect. A004/AD05)' P Punch Binary object tape (from veet. A002/A003 to vect. A004/A005) y Memory Examine/Change M nnnn - open next location - open previous location (LF) Print MPU Registers (CC, B, A, X, PC, SP) (saved in stack vect. AOO81 A009) R t Go to user's program G nnnn Memory test function (from vect. A002/A003 to vect. A0041 A005) W Select 2 stop bits (default value) Sl (for Speed 110 baud) Select 1 stop bit S3 (for Speed;;' 300 baud) --------------- -----t-----------ROM address EOOO to E3F F RAM address AOOO to A07F ACIA address 8008 User's stack pOinter saved Space required in user's stack 14 bytes Restart Vector ROM' (E3FE/E3FF) NMI Apparent Vector RAM' (A006/AOO7) SWI Apparent Vector RAM' (AOOA/AOOB) I RO Apparent Vector RAM' (AOOO.'AOOl) used 10 coniunciion With IDS F Irmwolre, the actual vectors afe fetched • 1 I f the MI N I BUG II In IDS ROM, uut after IDS service, IS control IS gl\/en 10 MINI BUG II which fetches the apparent NMI. SWI and IRQ vectors In RAM and jumps to the correcpondlng user's serVice routme The MINI BUG II ROM should be acce'ised With the fOllOWing add,e .. s pattern 111000XX xxxx xxxx '2 If the MINI BUG II ACIA (B008) IS directly connecled to a serial terrTlHlat and the lOS firmware IS not present, the actual veetnrs drp feHhed In MINIHU(j ROM. hut then. MINIBUG II fetches HlP (t~~)drent NMI. SWI anri I RO lIector~ In RAM and lUmps. TO thf' corre .. ,.Jonrilng u ... ~,.!, service (outlne. The MINI BUG II f~OM .. h()uld be anes5ed wITh the follt)WIIIY addre.... paTTerns t 1 to OOXX XXXX XXXX or lttl xx XXXX XXXX MOTOROL.A Se,"iconduc~or 1-78 Products Inc_ M88ADS• • M88ADW. Co-resident configuration The co·resident software MINI BUG II and the user's program communicates with lOS Firmware through the lOS ACIA located .at 8010. The lOS routines are accessed by NON MASKABLE INTERRUPTS generated by its interfaces. If another source generated the NMI, lOS gives control back to E005 location, which is the MINI BUG II NMI service routine. - If a character was received in the lOS ACIA (8010) coming from the user's/MINIBUG II ACIA (8008) it is transmitted to t~ Printer PIA (8004) and to the Display Interface Module. The non·visuable characters are not transmitted. - If a character was received in the Keyboard PIA (8020), it is transmitted td the lOS ACIA (8010), in order to be received later on in the user's/MINIBUG II ACIA (B008). If CtrlE (Erase screen) or CtrlB (Background Change for subsequent characters) were received from the Keyboard, they are not transmitted to the ACIA. 105 ROM address 105 RAM address DCOO to DFFF' AOOO to A07F shared with MINIBUG II Firmware 105 ACIA address Printer PIA address Keyboard PI A address Bell line Hardware Top·of·Page line pointer PI A address 8010 8004 8020 (PAO to PA6) CA2 of PIA (8020) User's Stack Poi nter Space required in user's stack Saved 28 bytes Restart action initializes lOS interfaces, jumps to MINIBUG Restart Routine 105 action and jumps to MINIBUG NMI Routine jumps to MINI BUG SWI, IRQ Routine Erases screen, Restart - - - -.. 8022 ------------t-------:-::-:-~-~--_:_:_:_:_:_:_=_~- NMI action SWI, I RQ action Start up action -The ROM should be wired with the following address patterns 1101 11XX XXXX XXXX or 1111 .XX XXXX XXXX V,1V 2 SElECTION RESTART SIGNAL t 2k. a ;----, I f-----ipJC=========~ f-f-----l 2~ti lC====::;>usER"S PR 11\1 TE R ___ J ~ PERIPHERALS .... DISPLAY INTERfACE MOOUI' BUS SYSHM CAl-W MOTOROLA Serniconduct:or Product:s Inc_ 1-79 M68ADS. • M68ADW. Terminal Configuration The external system, as the EXORciser, communicates with the 105 Firmware through ACIA located at 8008. The characters to be printed are stored in a buffer of 123 characters, which is sent to the printer when full or at least each 300 ms without receiving a new character from the terminal ACIA. The PA7 line of the PIA (8020) is pulled high during Printer Operation. This line should be connected to the CTS line of the main system ACIA li.e. DEBUG ACIA) in order to inhibit the transmission of new characters. The Keyboard accesses to 105 routines by generating a NON MASKABLE INTERRUPT. Two modes of operation are possible: Local mode (Off-Line) - The ACIA (8008) is not taken into account. - The characters received from the Keyboard PI·A (8020) are transmitted to the Display Interface Module and to the Printer Buffer. 'The non·visuable characters are not transmitted. On-Line mode (full-duplex) - The characters received from the ACIA (8008) are transmitted to the Display Interface Module and to the Printer Buffer. The non·visuable characters are not transmitted. - The characters received from the Keyboard PIA (8020) are transmitted to the ACIA (8008l. All characters, except CtrlS, CtrlE and CtrlO are transmitted. DCOO to DFFF' ROM address RAM address: scratch pad Pri nter Buffer AOOO to A07F 0000 to 007F B008 8004 8020 (PAD to PAS) CA2 of PIA (8020) ACIA address Printer PI A address Keyboard PI A address 8ell line Hardware Top-of-Page line pointer PIA address CTS line 8022 PA7 of PIA 8020 • The ROM should be Wired with the following address pattern, 1101 11XX XXXX XXXX or 1111 .. XX XXXX XXXX' t Note: '" thiS configuration, A9 is set to 0 by hardware when the MPU accesses to FFF8 to FFFF vectors. P'OWEA SUPPL.IES r-- -, I I t+---;===:::::;---;====;--t--nC:==3V,1V2SELECTION - RESTART SIGNAL EXORCISER I t I II I I I I L ____ .J DISPLA.Y INTlRFACE MODULE MOTOROLA Semiconductor Products Inc_ 1-80 M68ADS. • M68ADW. INPUT/OUTPUT SUPERVISOR The M6810S1 Input/Output Supervisor Firmware provides the user with an efficient means to interface the Polyvalent Development System Peripherals (CRT, Keyboard, Printer) to either a co-resident MINIBUG Firmware and a user's software or to an external asynchronous line such as the TTY connection of the EXORciser. • • • Compatible with M68DIMl and M68DIM2 16-line x 32-character Display Interfaces Compatible with M68DIM6 16-line x 64-character Display Interface Can worK with co-resident standard I/O routines Standard ACIA main system connection (8-bit word, 1 stop bit) • • Cursor control Background control (white-on-black or black-on-white display). • When the display page is full, the next line will be displayed at the bottom line, and the whole page is shifted one line up, loosing the top line (Scroll-up Display). lOS CONTROL CHARACTERS Co-resident configuration ACIA Effect Code Keyboard 18010) X X X X CtrlE CtrlB CtrlO CtrlG Sound the bell (negative pulse on CA2 of PIA 8020) X CtrlU Cursor Up one line CtrlW Cursor doWn one Ime Erase screen Background change for subsequent characters Terminal configuration Off·line received by received by Change mode of Operation (loeal/on-hne) X X X X etrlN Cursor to Next character X X X CtrlH Ctrll CtrlC CtrlK Cursor to previous character (Back Space) Cursor to home (Form- Feed) X X Clear page from cursor Kill hne from cursor X X X X X X X X X Not tr an5m. tted Not transmitted X X X X Null Rubout MOTOROLA SelTliconductor Products Inc. 1·81 On-line r.~iv.d by ACIA Keyboard Keyboard (8008) x X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X ® ______ -l M68ADS. • M68ADW. ORDERING INFORMATION OPTION DESCRIPTION M68ADSI completely assembled and tested system, with a 5" CRT 16-line x 32-character Display completely assembled and tested system, with a 5" CRT 16-line x 64-character Display completely assembled and tested system, with 16-line x 32-character Interface, without CRT-monitor (for use with a standard TV-receiver, VHF, 55.25 MHz channel E3) completely assembled and tested system, with 16-line x 32-character Interface, without CRT-monitor (for use with a standard TV-receivrr, UHF, 591.25 MHz, channel E36) completely assembled and tested system, with 16-line x 64-character Interface, without CRT-monitor (for use with a M68MDM9 9" CRT-monitor) M68ADS6 M68ADWI M68ADW2 M68ADW6 ACCESSORIES DESCRIPTION M68MDM9 M68MPRI M68MPPI M68DMCI M68DMC9 M68KBCl M68EAMI M68EABI MMS6Bl03 MMS68103-1 M6BCIMI M68PPR2 M6BMMLC2 M6BMMSC2 M68MMCC05 M6BMMCC10 MEC68MIN3E 9" CRT-monitor Motorola 30 chr/sec. Printer Electro-sensitive paper for MPR Printer Display Monitor Cabinet for 5" CRT Monitor Display Monitor Cabinet for 9" CRT Monitor Keyboard Cabinet for M68KBDI ROM resident Assembler/Editor Module ROM resident Assembler/Editor/BASIC Interpreter Module 16K-byte RAM module 8K-byte RAM module Audio Cassette Interface Module PDS PROM Programmer Chassis with lO-slot card-cage and power-supply Chassis with 5-slot card-cage and power-supply 5-slot card-cage 1O-slot card-cage MINI BUG 3E Firmware ROM, with Breakpoints capability. MOTOROLA Sel'J"liconduc'tor Products Inc. 1-82 ® M68TDS. MOTOROLA TOTAL DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM TOTAL DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM The TDS is a complete development station including faciHties for developing a hardware/software design. It consists of a M6800 based system with a full ASCII Keyboard, a 5" CRT Monitor displaying 16 lines of 64 characters, an audio-cassette interface for mass storage capability and a medium speeo printer (MPR) interface, assembled in a finished table top cabinet with power suppl ies. It does not require any other terminal. The TDS also include 8K byte or 16K byte of RAM and a ROM resident Editor/Assembler allowing development of M6800 source code programs. As an option, a ROM resident BASIC interpreter is also available, allowing the TDS to be used with this very widly known high level language_ The resident debugging firmware, MINIBUG 3E, provides the TDS with the capability to insert up to eight software breakpoints and to perform the TRACE function, in addition to the standard LOAD, PUNCH, MEMORY CHANGE, GOTO and CONTINUE functions. The TDS has two spare slots, EXORciser/Micromodule compatible, allowing the user to add options like I/O interfaces, more memory and even a 2708 PROM Programmer (M6BPPR1). SPECIFICATIONS CRT Monitor Diagonal: Page format: 5" (127 mm) 16-line x 25 to 64-character (magnifier) Keyboard Key layout: Character code: Functions keys: Printer interface Standard ASR-33 (53-Key) 7-bit ASCII (J1-character inc!. BELL) Restart, 300/4BOO bps 7-bit parallel clocked data, TTL compatible Audio-cassette interface (DIN Connector) ORDERING INFORMATION 300 bps, 1-stop bit, 50/500 mVpp, Kansas City Standard Memory size M68TDS1 TDS with EdItor/Assembler and 8K RAM M68TDS2 TDS with Editor/Assembler, BASIC Interpreter and BK RAM M68TDS3 TDS with Editor/Assembler and 16K RAM M68TDS4 TDS with Editor/Assembler, BASIC Interpreter and 16K RAM ACCESSORIES M68MPAl Medium speed printer M68MPPl Electrosensitive paper for MPR M68PPR2 PDS PROM Programmer printer M6BTDS1: RAM ROM BK-byte 9K-byte + 3 spare sockets M6BTDS2: RAM ROM 8K-byte 16K-byte + 4 spare sockets M6BTDS3: RAM ROM 16K-byte 9K·byte + 3 spare sockets M6BTDS4: RAM ROM 16K-byte 16K-byte + 4 spare sockets Power supplies (output max.) 5 V @ 5 A, + 12 V @ 1.5 A, 12V@05A Physical dimensions 12.4 kg (net) Total weight: 480 x 400 x 160 mm Chassis (Wx Dx H) Keyboard (Wx Dx H) 330x180x55mm 220 V, 50 Hz, 0.7 A max_ Operating temperature Power requirement 1-83 o to 50°C M68TDS. MINIBUG 3E FIRMWARE FEATURES The MINI BUG 3E Firmware provides the user with an efficient means to debug his program allowing to insert up to 8 breakpoints. L Memory load Print/Punch Dump (from nnnn to mmmmi Memory Examine/Change - open next location - open previous location Print MPU Registers (CC, B, A, X, PC, SPI (saved in stack, vect. A032/ A0331 Go to user's program Continue execution from current location Execute Next instruction Trace nnnn instructions Set a breakpoint at address nnnn Reset the breakpoint at address nnnn Delete all breakpoints Print out all breakpoints Select 2 stop bits (default valuel Select 1 stop bit G nnnn C N T nnnn V nnnn U nnnn D B Sl (for Speed 110 baudl S3 (for Speed;;' 300 baudl ROM address RAM address ACIA address User's stack pOinter Space reqUired In user's stack EOOO to E3FF AOOO to A07F 8008 saved 14 bytes Restart Vector NMI Apparent Vector SWI Apparent Vector I RQ Apparent Vector ROM (E3FE/E3FFI RAM' (A006/A0071 RAM' (A036/A0371 RAM" (AOOO/AOOll P nnnn mmmm M nnnn (LFI t R As the MINI BUG 3E is used In conjunction with IDS Firmware, the actual vectors are fetched in IDS ROM; but after IDS service, control is given to MINI BUG 3E which fetches the apparent NMI, SWI and IRQ vectors in RAM and jumps to the corresponding user's service routine. The SWI apparent vector (RAM A036/A0371 IS initialized at E30B (MINI BUG 3E Breakpoint Routme) each time a reset is applied. MOTOROLA SelT1iconduc~or Produc~s 1-84 Inc_ M68TDS. EDITOR/ASSEMBLER/BASIC MODULE This 14K ROM module contains an adapted ROM co-resident Editor/Assembler and a ROM resident BASIC interpreter, to be used on the Total Development System equipped with a single audio-cassette set. The source and/or the object code can be loaded from or dumped to the cassette. Both Editor/Assembler and Basic run from the ROM, leaving all RAM available as a buffer for source code and symbol table. The Assembler requires that the source code has been loaded into the RAM by the Editor before performing automatically the two ;>ass assembling_ This feature allows to use a non-incremental single audio-cassette system. The ROM resident BASI C interpreter provides a new tool for problem solving to the M6800 Microcomputer family of parts. BASIC is a high-level programming language widely used for general purpose and certain business-related applications. ROM Resident. Immediate access without software loading time. Uses only a low-cost non-incremental single audio-cassette. Software addresses: BASIC: from 4000 to 5BFF; Editor/Assembler: from 6400 to 7FFF_ ACIA address: 8008 (alterable). High speed assembling directly from memory_ Assembler RAM requirement: approx. 1.5K per 50 user's program statements. BASIC High Level Language features (TDS2 and TDS4 only)' decimal arithmetic; string variable and array; direct statement execution capability (calculator model; user programs may reside on audio-cassette; optional LET statement; string functions and concatenation. EDITOR/ASSEMBLER BLOCK DIAGRAM / OPTIONAL / / SOURCE / CODE /// 11 SINGLE CASSETTE 1'-, , L-_ _ _..J '/ OPTIONAL 08JECT , CODE ," ~,()URCE SYM80l CODE IN HAM / B _ _ / (Jf-'TI(JNAL . .JvlJRCf i :r)TINb /OPTIONAI / AS~f_M8I.E[J I lilTING >'HINH H MOTOROLA Se,";conduc~or Produc~s 1·85 Inc. TABt r IN RAM M88TDS. BASIC Commands • • • • • • • • • • • • Intrinsic functions LIST - display source RUN - execute program CaNT - continue after stop or break NEW - define new program SAVE - save current program (tape) LOAD - load new program (tape) APPEND - add to program from tape PATCH - patch memory from MINIBUG TRACE ON - print line number as it is executed TRACE OFF - turn off trace LINE LENGTH - define maximum print line length DIGITS - establish the number of digits to right of decimal point • POKE - sets absolute memory address Subprograms • • • DEF - define user function RETURN - return from subroutine GOSUB - go to subroutine • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • TAB - tab on print RND - random number INT - integer number ABS - absolute value SGN - sign of argument pas - Position of prlnthead LEN - Number of characters in string ASC - decimal value of any ASCII character CHR$ - string value of ASCII character STR$ - ASCII string value to numeriC constant VAL - numeric constant equivalent to ASCII value LE FT$ - returns left-most string of characters RIGHT$ - returns right-most string of characters MID$ - returns middle string of characters PEEK - returns decimal memory value • • • • • • • SIN - sine COS - cosine TAN - tangent A TAN - arc tangent LOG - natural logarithm EXP - inverse of LOG SOR - square root BASIC Language Features Data Types • Range (1.0E - 99 to 9.99999999E t 99) may be represented as either integer, decimal, or exponent .. 1. Variable Names • Single alphabetic character or Single alphabetic character followed by a digit (0 through 9). • String variables, single alphabetiC character followed by a $. Arithmetic and Logical Operators • Exponential • • • Negate Multiplication Division 1/0 Statements • INPUT • READ • DATA • PRINT • RESTORE Specification Statements • DIM - dimension variables and strings Remark Statements • REM Optional Statements • LET • Addition • Subtraction • Relational operators Sequence Control Statements • • • GOTO ON expression GOTO statement n, (m .... ,1) ON expression GOSUB statement n, (m, ... ,1) • I F relative • • • FOR NEXl STOP • END MOTOROLA Ss,"iconductor Products 'nc_ 1-86 M68TDS. AUDIO-CASSETTE INTERFACE MODULE The M68CIMl is used to Interface any ordinary audio-cassette recorder with the Total Development System (TDS). The audio-cassette is used as a storage media for object programs and data (dump and load) in general and for source programs when used with the Assembler/Editor or the 8ASIC interpreter. The data is recorded on the cassette according the Kansas City standard. In the playback mode, the clock is recovered from the signal and is used to clock the receiving ACIA in the TDS system. This feature allows to cope with cassette speed variations of up to 30% without producing errors. • • • • • • • Transmission rate: 300 bps Lo~ical" 1'" 2400 Hz signal Logical "0": 1200 Hz signal Clock frequency: 4800 Hz Audio signal output (write): 50 mVpp or 500 mVpp (switchable) Audio signal input (read): 500 mVpp min. C-60 cassette capacity: approx. lOOK-bytes The module should be connected to an audio-cassette recorder having the following minimum requirements: -- normalized output signal (500 mVpp minimum) on normalized DIN connector; HF erasing and polarisation (aVOid DC erasing); - minimum bandwidth: 500 Hz to 6 KHz; good mechanical handling (C-90 and C-120 cassettes should be avoided). LMOTOROLA Sen.. iconduc-t:or Products Inc_ 1-87 M68TDS. TDS BLOCK DIAGRAM '---------------1 I .---- I I -- -- I I ! SPARE SLOT 8k I 16k • RAM r--- ROM RESIDENT EDITOR I ASSEMBLER + BASIC INTERPRETER. I I I I I I I I--- 16 - LINE x 64 - CHAR_ DISPLAY INTERFACE S"CRT CC I IL~(I I ASCII KEYBOARD KEYBOARD INTERFACE PRINTER INTERFACE AUDIO-CASSETTE INTERFACE IOS/MINIBUG JE FIRMWARE I OPTIONAL PRINTER IIIIIIIIIIIL MPU BOARD L..- AC I I I I SPARE SLOT f-- 220 v i POWER SUPPLIES I I -.~ I[§] RECORDER • OPTIONS ® MOTOROLA Se,..iconduc~or Products Inc. 1-88 l OPTIONAL AUDIO - CASSETTE @ MICROSYSTEMS MOTOROLA M68PPR2 PDS PROM Programmer • PDS plug-in compatible. • Programs following types of PROM/EPROM: MCM7640, MCM7680, MCM68708/2708, MCM7641, MCM7681, TMS2716, or equivalent. • Allows direct programming from RAM content. • Verify and back transfer function. • Uses the +S V ± 12 V PDS pus power supply. • Dimension (W x H x T): 248 x 192 x 1,6 mm (9.7S"x7 .SO"xO.062"). The M68PPR2 PROM PROGRAMMER provides the PDS with the capability of programming 6 types of PROM/EPROM devices. The control. firmware is contained in two ROM and is compatible with the MINIbug Firmware of the PDS. It allows to program (E)PROM devices, to verify the data in the (E)PROM and to transfer data from the (E)PROM to the PDS RAM memory. Command Description CHCK aaa,zzz Check aaa words of the EROM/PROM starting at EROM/PROM offset zzz for the unprogrammed state. Exit to the system monitor. Set the memory offset parameter nnnn to the value entered. Program the EROM/PROM starting at EROM/PROM offset zzz from memory locations XXXX+nnnn through yyyy+nnnn. Read the EROM/PROM to memory addresses xxxx+nnnn through yyyy+nnnn starting at EROM/PROM offset zzz. Show the EROM/PROM contents in hex form. The ASCll form is also displayed. Display the programmer's status. Verify the EROM/PROM starting at PROM offset zzz against memory locations xxxx+nnnn through yyyy+nnnn. PROM type to be used: pppppppp is the part number. (Example: MCM68708) EXIT OFST nnnn PROG xxxx,yyyy,zzz READ xxxx,yyyy,ZZZ SHWP aaa,zzz STAT VERF xxxx,yyyy,zzz pppppppp ® MOTOROLA Semiconductor Products Inc. 1·89 ® M68MEBl MOTOROLA POLYVALENT DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM MICROPROCESSOR EVALUATION BOARD The M68ME81 Evaluation 80ard provides the user with a quick and efficient means to evaluate the operating characteristics of the M6800 family of Parts. The on-board crystal controlled clock circuit provides the module with the capability of working with dynamic memories and slow memories. The clock circuit also generates the basic timing signal used by the module's baud rate generator. The Microprocessor Evaluation Board interfaces directly with either a TTY (20 mA current loop), a TTL or a RS232·C compatible terminal providing direct communication with the module's MINI· BUG II Firmware. The MEB consists of: 1 M68SACI Stand· Alone Computer 1 MEC68MIN2 Minibug II Firmware ROM • Four 8-bit parallel Input/Output Ports and Control Lines for Peripheral Interfacing • Two asynchronous Input/Output Ports with one RS232.C/TTl/TTY Current· Loop interface • 384 bytes of RAM • Three MCM68708 or equivalent AROM/ROM sockets' • One MCM6830 Mlnibug II Firmware ROM • 921.6 kHz on·board crystal controlled clock generator • Fully buffered Three·State Bus Connector • Bus DMA Capability • Fully compatible with all EXORciser modules By adding options, the Microprocessor Evaluation Board can be upgraded to an Autonomous Development System. BLOCK DIAGRAM BAUO RATE OEN 1·90 MICROPROCESSOR EVALUATION BOARD POS M88MEB1 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Value Specification - Memory Size Capability 65, 536 bytes maximum. On· Board Memory Size 3B4 bytes of RAM 3 x 1 K·byte MCM68708 compatible AROM/RO M Sockets 1 x 1 K·byte MCM6830 MINIBUG II ROM Memory locations available for external expansion 44 K·byte: 0000 to 7FFF 9000 to 9FFF BOOO to CFFF Word Size Data Address Instruction 8 bits 16 bits 8, 16, or 24 bits Instruction Set 72 variable length instructions Interrupts Maskable and non-mask able real-time interrupts; Software interrupt Clock Signal 921.6 KHz Address Bus Data Bus Control Bus Three-state TTL voltage compatible Three-state TTL voltage compatible TTL voltage compatible MC6820 Peripherat Interface Adapter Lines MC6850 Asynchronous Communication Interface Adapter Serial Transfer Rate TTL voltage compatible· TTL voltage compatible· Terminal interface Power requirements 110,134.5,150,200,300,600,1200,1800, 2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, 9600 baud RS232.C, TTL or 20 mA Current-Loop + 5 Vdc at 1,5 A + 12 Vdc at 200 mA - 12 Vdc at 200 mA 5 Vdc on board converter - Operating temperature 0° to 70°C Dimensions Width Height Thickness PC Board Thickness 248mm 165mm 13mm 1.6mm 9.75 in. 6.5 in. 0.5 in. 0.062 in. ·See MC6820 and MC68SO data sheets for specifications on these signals. MOTOROLA SSnJiconduct:or Product:. Inc. 1·91 M68MEB1 Minibug II Firmware Features MEC68MIN2 ROM MEC68MIN21 Listing The Minibug II Firmware provides the user with an efficient means to debug his program. It communicates with a serial peripheral (which can be the lOS ACIA) through an ACIA located in 8008 and works with either 1 or 2 stop bits. Memory Load L Load Binary object tape Z Print/Punch Dumps (from vect. A002/A003 to vect. A004/A005). P Punch Binary object tape (from veet. A002/A003 to vect. A004/A005) y Memory Examine/Change M nnnn - open next location - open previous location (LF) Print MPU Registers (CC, B, A, X, PC, SP) (saved in stack vect. A008/ A009) R t Go to user's program G nnnn Memory test function (from vect. A002/ A003 to vect. A004/ A005) W Select 2 stop bits (default value) SI (for Speed 110 baud) Select 1 stop bit S3 (for Speed;;' 300 baud) ROM address EOOO to E3FF RAM address AOOO to A07F ACIA address 8008 User's stack pointer saved Space required in user's stack 14 bytes Restart Vector ROM' (E3FE/E3FF) NMI Apparent Vector RAM' (A006/A007) SWI Apparent Vector RAM' (AOOAlAOOB) I RO Apparent Vector RAM' (AOOO/AOO1) 'The actual vectors are fetched in ROM, but then, MINIBUG II fetches the apparent NMI, SWI and IRQ vectors in RAM and jumps to the corresponding user's service routine. To access its ROM vectors, the MINI BUG II ROM s!>ould be ac· cessed with the following address patterns: 1"0 OOXX XXXX XXXX or I'"~ XXXXXXXXXX The SWI apparent vector (RAM AOOAI AOOBI is initialized at E227 (SWI Breakpoint MINIBUG II Routinel each time a Reset is applied. MOTOROLA Se,"iconduc~or Produc~s 1-92 Inc_ ®------' ® M68CIMI MOTOROLA AUDIO CASSETTE INTERFACE MODULE POLYVALENT DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM CASSETTE INTERFACE The M68CIMl is used to interface any ordinary audio cassette recorder with any of the Polyvalent Development System configurations (SAC, MEB, ADS) except the terminal configuration_ The audio cassette is used as a storage media for object programs and data (dump and load) in general, and for source programs when used with the assembler/editor or the BASIC Interpreter in the ADS configuration. The data is recorded on the cassette according the Kansas City standard. In the playback mode, the clock is recovered from the signal and is used to clock the receiving ACIA in the PDS system. This feature allow to cope with cassette speed variations of up to 30% without producing errors. • TransmISsion rate: 300 bps. • Logical "1'" 2400 Hz signal. • Logical "0": 1200 Hz signal. • Clock frequency: 4800 Hz. • Audiosignal output (write): 50 mVpp or 500 mVpp (switchable) • Audio signal input (read): 500 mVpp min_ • C-60 cassette capacity: approx. 100 k·bytes. • Dimensions (HxLxD) 35 mm x 100 mm x 65 mm. MODULE PDS CIM The module should be connected between the PDS ACIA and an audio cassette recorder having the following minimum requirements: - normalIZed output signal (500 mVpp minimum) on normalIZed DI N connector; - HF erasing and polarisation (avoid DC erasing). minimum bandwidth: 500 Hz to 6 kHz; - good mechanical handling (C-90 and C-120 cassettes should be avoided). BLOCK DIAGRAM ..---- rRECEivE DATA RECEIVE CLOCK PDS SYSTEM CASSETTE INTERFACE P4 TRANSMIT CLOCK TRANSMIT OATA BAUD RATE IM68SAC-1) RECORD SIGNAL CASSETTE REOORO£R MOOULE PLl¥BACK SIGNAL -- TH/RS232C L--- (M68CIM· I) TT'I'/RS232C IItIcifications subiect to change Without notice. 1·93 ® M/CROSYSTEMS MOTOROLA M68SXS EXORterm 200/220 • • M6800 Based CRT Standard EXORciser DEbug I or 2 with USE or MPU I /~ modules • Baud rate selectable to 9600 BPS • Full 1920 character screen • Easily read characters (7 x 9 dot matrix) • A single keystroke for direct entry to EXbug, MAID, or DOS • Isolated motherboard holds up to g EXORciser modules • Dual Memory Map mode of operation (EXORterm 220) • Selectable clock speeds of 1.0 Mllz, 1.5 Mill and 2.0 MHz (EXORterm 220) EXORterm 200/220, designed and manufactured by Motorola Microsystems, is a display terminal and console expressly personalized for use as a M6800 Development Support System. EXORterm 200/220 facilitates the exchange of data between the user and the system via a high-quality video interface in conjunction with a keyboard, To further enhance the efficiency of the interface, special keys have been encoded to invoke functions unique to the development system in each of its three command levels- EXbug, MAID, and DOS. A basic EXORterm 200/220 incorporates a CRT chassis with a keyboard and isolated motherboard, MPU Module and DEbug Module. These items provide the basic control and interface functions of a microcomputer, and house the system's EXbug development and diagnostic programs, along with the capability of preparing M6800 Programs. With provisions for up to six more modules (EXORciser modules or Micromodules), a system of almost any complexity can be rapidly assembled. EXORterm 200 is also offered with a MEX68USEB User System Evaluator (USE) installed in the isolated motherboard in place of the MPU Module. The User System Evaluator provides all the features of the MPU Module, plus it extends all EXbug functions and all of the optional Systems Analyzer functions into the user's system. The USE-equipped EXORterm provides the designer with the capability of configuring an emulation of his M6800 microprocessor system in the terminal, external to the terminal, or a combination of terminal-resident modules working with the user's external system. The designer also can develop his system software and firmware on the terminal, and can use the USE-equipped terminal to debug his system hardware and software. In fact, a USE-equipped EXORterm can even be used to test and evaluate the user's production systems. In addition to using EXORlerm 200/220 as a development system, the terminal may be used as an asynchronous editing terminal through connection to a host computer (or other external device) via the serial interface (RS-232C or current loop), essentially bypassing the isolated motherboard. EXORterm 220 incorporates several advanced features, including Dual Memory Map mode of operation and the ability to develop higher performance systems, using the MC()i~A and MC6XB series part (1.5 Mllz and 2.0 Mllz, respectively). The MPU II Module includes also a Timer, MC6X40 and a Priority Interrupt Controller, MC6X2X. EXORterm 220, through its DI·.bug II Module, places no restricllon~ upon the user's system design since all (14K bytes of memory span: is available to the user. EXORterm 220 accepts all 1':XORciser II modules for implementation of ... ud! system capabilities as priority interrupts, mUlti-paged memory and I/O system ... , parity l:rror detection and power down/rc~tart feature .... 1-94 Specifications Display: Interface: 12" Diagonal, P4 Phosphor with anti-glare shield 24 lines, SO characters per line 1920 character fuD display Selectable baud rates- 110, ISO, 300, 600, 1200, IS00, 2400, 4S00, 9600 Power Requirements: Character Configuration: 7 x 9 dot character within a 9 x 12 dot matrix size field 230 volta ac, SO Hz leas than 200 watta Character Set: Physical Dimensions: ASCII 96 character subset with Greek alphabet and six special gra phics Display - 12.5"" x IS.S"W x 29"D (including keyboard) Keyboard· 2. 7"" x IS.S''W x 9"D Weight· less than 65 Ibs. Operating Temperature· +10' to + 40'C Altitude· Not to exceed 10,000 ft. Cursor: Blinking inverted video non-destructive 9 x 12 block Incremental and absolute positioning (Addressable, Readable) Keyboard: Encoded, n·key rollover 12 function keys 62 alphanumeric and control keys 12 edit and cursor control keys U:D mode indicators Full ASCII Typewriter layou t Movable, detachable Typamatic all keys Ordering Information The following table identifies the options of the M6S00 EXORterm 200 Development System. For further information, contact your local sales office. PART NO. DESCRIPTION M6SSXSI0200 EXORtenn 200 Development System 220 V M6SSXS102BO USE EXORtenn 200 Development System 220 V M6SSXS2202 EXORtenn 220 Development System 220 V 1-95 ® MICROSYSTEMS MOTOROLA MACE 29/800 Microcode Analyzer and Control Storage Emulator A Microprogrammable Processor Development System 1-96 MICROPROGRAMMED SYSTEMS For some applications, LSI processors with fixed instruction sets and data widths are being used as replacements for random logic designs. Although these processors are very satisfactory for some new designs, their systems architectures are fixed. Consequently, they cannot be used optimally to emulate existing machine architectures and instruction sets. On the other hand, bit·slice processors such as Motorola's M10800 ECL and M2900 LSTTL families permit alterable instruction sets and data widths. Both families are microprogrammable to emulate almost any instruction set and to optimize system instructions. The devices in both families perform special functions (i.e., ALU, microprogram control, memory I/O control, timing, etc.); this partitioning allows the devices to be connected, in varying configurations, to resemble many existing machine architectures. The M1 0800 family is compatible with Motorola's MECL 10,000 logic series, the M2900 is supported by a growing array of LSTTL devices. Microprogramming and configurable multichip sets can be very practical tools to develop high throughput, cost·effective processor and controller systems. However, the combinations of hardware and software possibilities (the very advantages of microprogrammable devices) can lead to time· consuming design tradeoffs, To minimize the time required to develop microcode for M2900/10800 processor/controller systems, as well as other MSI/LSI microprogrammed logic designs, Motorola now offers the Microcode ~nalyzer and ~ontrol Storage £mulator (MACE 29/800). MOTOROLA MICROPROGRAMMING SYSTEM MACE 29/800 The MACE 29/800 is a development and diagnostic aid for microprogrammable processors and controllers, Its primary functions are. • To provide Writable Control Storage (WCS) for microprograms • To provide real-time microprogram diagnostic capabilities The MACE 29/800 replaces the user's microprogram memory and interfaces with the user's system timing and data flow, as shown in Figure 1. In this configuration, the user can write or change microcode and/or run diagnostics on the system prototype. The MACE 29/800 is housed in a 19" W X 19.5" D X 10.5" H chassis, The chassis contains power supplies, a multilayer backplane, and a 10-slot card cage. Printed-circuit modules containing WCS (microprogram memory), diagnostic, timing, control, and interface hardware are mounted in the card cage. The chassis can be used first as a "breadbox" to build user prototype systems in the remaining card slots. As a second use, cable interfaces that connect to the chassis hardware are available for external user-developed prototypes. Lastly, to take advantage of the high-speed backplane and available power supplies, the chassis can be used to house totally independent prototypes. The MACE 29/800 can power and support both TTL and ECL logic systems. In addition, interface address and data lines can be defined as active high or active low. The WCS is expandable in both depth and width. Maximum ratios are 2K words X 112 bits, 4 K words X 48 bits, 6K words X 32 bits or 8K words X 16 bits, Intermediate configurations are also allowable. Depending on the configuration, memory-access times range from 50 ns to 80 ns. WCS is comprised of high-speed, bipolar RAMs; consequently, system prototypes can be operated at or near the maximum clock rate to minimize debug time and to detect ac glitches. Memory load, verify, modify, dump, and store are all under user control. EXORci.er, EXOAdilk. eXORterm. and EXOAprint are trademarks of Motorola. Thill. advance Information and specifications are lubject to change without notice. 1-97 A programmable-frequency clock (20 MHz maximum frequency in 25 ns period increments) can operate in start, stop, single-step, and continue modes_ Optional real-time diagnostic capabilities include debug functions, memory- address sequence, 16 selectable inputs and clock controL A microprogram address and user data trace RAM, which can store 256 locations, provides a logic analyzer diagnostic function_ Address sequencing, register contents, status bits, etc., can be traced and saved under various trigger modes. Typical diagnostic functions include: trace/save on a beginning, middle, or end reference address; stop on a reference address; jump on a reference address; and, clock-mode controL COMPLETE MICROPROGRAMMING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION The MACE 29/800 is controlled by the M6800 host computer of an EXORciser-bus compatible system. To a user, all microprogramming tasks appear as M6800-oriented operations. A software package, included with the MACE 29/800, performs the necessary translations_ This configuration takes advantage of the extensive hardware and software components that have been developed for the EXORciser. Some inherent features of the host EXORciser are: • Working storage (RAM and ROM) is available in the EXORciser • EXbug monitor firmware available in the EXORciser • EXORciser compatible with the EXORterm CRT terminals (for user interface) • EXORciser compatible with the EXORprint printer (for hard-copy printout) • EXORciser compatible with the EXORdisk II floppy-disk system (for bulk data storage) • EXORciser resident software available (Assembler, Editor, Macroassembler, Linking Loader, Fortran Compiler, Basic Interpreter) • MOOS (Motorola Disk Operating System for EXORdisk II) Utilizing the MOOS, the MACE 29/800 utility and debug software tool, MBUG, is supplied resident on a floppy disk. MBUG's basic features include: . • A command package to load a disk into microprogrammed control storage, to change control storage, and write changes back to a disk file. • Commands to enable user's address to memory. • Commands to start or stop the clock, and to single cycle the clock. The MACE Assembler, resident on a floppy disk and also utilizing the MOOS features, provides a general purpose assembler specifically designed to meet the needs of bit slice microprogrammed processor development. Flexible format statements permit microword size and format to be user-defined and thus applicable to any hardware configuration. Optional features supplied with MACE 29/800 provide real-time diagnostic capabilities_ These include: • Microprogram address and user trace RAM. • Trace/save on a beginning, middle or end reference address. • Ju~p • Multi-level breakpoints. or stop on reference address. 1-98 SUPPORT PRODUCTS FOR MICROPROGRAMMABLE PROCESSORS Ml0800 PROCESSOR FAMilY (ECl) MC10BooL MC10B01L MC10802L MC10803L MC10804L MC10805L MC10806L MC10807L MC10808L 4-Bit ALU Slice Microprogram Control Function • 4-Phase Timing Function Memory Interface Function 4-8it MECL-TTL Bidirectional Transistor 5-Bit MECL-TTL Bidirectional Transistor 32 X 9-Bit Dual Access Stack , 5-Bit MECL-MECL Bidirectional Translator MECll0,OOO MEMORIES 32 x 8-F ield PROM 115 ns) 8 X 2 Multlport Register File IRAM) 110 ns) 256 x 1-81t RAM 126 ns) (10410) 16 x 4-8it RAM 115 ns) 1024 x 1-81t RAM 129 ns) (10415) 128 X l-Bit RAM 112 ns) (10405) 256 X 4-Field PROM 125 ns) 256 X 1 RAM 115 ns) MCM10139L MCM10143L MCM10144L MCM10145L MCM10146L MCM10147L MCM10149L MCM10152L 16-8it Programmable Shifter Function • To be introduced. IMECL 10,000 Device Support: Over 75 Device Functions) M2900 PROCESSOR FAMilY (lSTTL) MC2901 MC2901 MC2901A MC2902 MC2905 MC2906 Mc2907 MC2909 MC2911 MC2915A MC2916A MC2917A MC2918 TTl MEMORIES 4-Blt ALU 4-Bit ALU IRedesign) 4-Bit ALU IFaster) Look-Ahead Carry Quad Bus Transceiver laC) Quad Bus Transceiver Parity laC) Quad Bus Transceiver Parity laC) MIcroprogram Sequencer Microprogram Sequencer Quad Bus Transceiver ITS) MCM93415/25 MCM93L415 1024 Xl' 1024 Xl" RAMS MCM7620/21 MCM7640/41 MCM7642/43 MCM7680/81 MCM82707/08 512 X 4' 512 X 8' 1024 X 4' 1024 X 8' 1024 X 8' PROMS 'Open Collector/Three-State Output "Open Collector Output Quad Bus Transceiver Parity Quad Bus TransceIver Parity ILSTTL Device Support: Over 150 Device 4-Bit Register Functionsl SYSTEMS SUPPORT PRODUCTS Software Hardware EXORciser-System Development Tool 1/0 Modules • Memory Modules 6800 Assembler, Editor 6800 Cross Assembler 6800 Simulator 6800 Macro Assembler 6800 Linking Loader 6800 BASI C Resident Interpreter 6800 Fortran Compiler 6800 MPL Cross Compiler 6800 MPL Resident Compiler 6800 COBOL Resident Interpreter Disk Operating System Micro Assembler 141000 Cross Assembler 3B70 Cross Assembler • User System Evaluator System Performance Monitor Micromodules 10 EM Hardware) EXORdisk II Floppy Disk EXORterm 100 CRT Terminal EXORprint Printers PROM Programmer MACE 29/800 141000 CMOS Microprocessor Support Adapter 3870 Microprocessor Support Adapter 1-99 FIGURE 1 - MICROPROGRAM DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM User Interface (Terminal) K ~ M6800 Bus M6800 Host Processor System (EXORciser) V MACE 29/BOO Optional Diagnostic Hardware (Memory Address Sequence and Data Trace, Clock Controll I Writable Control - Storage 6 ---- 1l ~ .VI ~-o ~"O ::14; 0< - :G ~ - "~ 0 --------u ~-------- Microprogram Control - ~ ~ -a:" u Timing .;; :> ~ I - u; MACE Syste m .. 5 ------ User's Syste m 0 Data Processing :! "- e;: A 0 U ~ A Bus V ~ " a> 4; A :; a> a> ~V V -V Timing Memory Interface Timing ~ Address ~ Data ~ Main Memory and Peripheral 8us 1·100 ORDERING INFORMATION Part No. MEXMACE2 Description MACE 29/800 Development SVstem, 220 V, 50 MHz, consisting of: • • • • • • MEXMACERAMl Probe Buffer Module Data Probe Modules 12 each I Address Probe Modu Ie • 10-Card MACE Chassis With POl/IIer Supplz and Backplane • System Executive • MEXMACEDPl EXORciser Interface Module Control Module Writable Control Storage {WCSI RAM Modules {2K • 16,2 each I Microcode Assembler Data Probe Buffer Writable Control Storage {WCSI RAM Module {2K • 161 1·101 The EXOsIice FalJ1ily The EXOslice family, working with the EXORciser, provides the user with a mean of developping 2900 and 10800 4-bit slice Microcomputer systems. The EXOslice family includes high speed expandable I K x 32 bit MECL RAM modules for microcode storage, 16-input/32-{mtput MECL modules and MECL-TTL adapter. A MECL PROM Programmer allows programming of MECL MCM 10149 256 x 4 PROM devices. The FAST software provides a mean of dumping or loading user's files (configuration descriptions, microprogram) to and from several source or media (keyboard, papertape, cassette, diskette) and offers several debugging features for the user's microprogram. r----------. --------1 I I EXORcIser USER', PROTOTYPE rr------, Floppy DIsk Controller EXORdisk II I r------., 1.1~ II '•- - - - - -- III I I f--- MEE48MTA II II l-------,-L_, L, I L&.-----~ I I ------ II III I I I I Printer EXORprint MEE4810 Interface f- fo-- I 2900 System I I I L ______ ..I I I • II I I .. . 10800 System , Debug and MPU EXOR,erm 150 Modules - MEE32RA r~ I I I I I I I I 32K NMOS RAM MH1PR I I I L __________________ J 1-102 I I MECL Power Supply ® MEE4810 MOTOROLA 10800/2900 SUPPORT TOOLS 16-INPUT/32-0UTPUT MECL MODULE The MEE4810 input/output Module is speCially deSigned to connect a MECll0800 system to a 10800/2900 Microprocessor Development system based on the EXORciser. In a typical configu· ration where the EXORciser Simulates the microprogram PROM. the MECL I/O MODULE Input-lines of the module receive the microprogram addresses and I·Bus IOformJtlons. and the output-lines are used as micro-code output lines. ThIS module plugs directly into the EXORciser and provides 16 input·llOes and 32 output·llOes with normalized MECll0K Inputioutput features. The Input·I,lleS have 110 il termination resistors. The output·l,nes can be OR-wired on a bus as they are open emitters. Termination resistors should be Incorporated in the 10800 system. • • • 16 MECl level Input lines 32 MECL level output lines OR-wired capability for the output IlOes • • • PROM address decoding Expandable up to 5 modules (80 il1put/160 output lines). Power requirements: + 5 Vdc 1 A - 5.2 Vdc 650 mA -·2 Vdc 50 mA Dimensions (WxHxT): 24B x 165 xl 6 mm 19.75" x 6.5" x 0.062") • BLOCK DIAGRAM ~ f l ~ • TTL n;A,...c.,l-Al0~S p, A[l[)Pl '.,':, orcor;u~ .'v D(1 , 'M jl, p,n 0"1 '"a: a: S' u w - ---{::>----+ h'l W Z Z cs 0 u ::E ....w '". '" ... 0 0 l~ --1-- D'" 9 -------_._---_._---------------------------' 1-103 ® MEE48MTA MOTOROLA 10800/2900 SUPPORT TOOLS MECL/TTL ADAPTER MODULE MECL/TTL ADAPTER MODULE The MEE48MTA MECLITTL ADAPTER MODULE provides the user with the possibility to develop TTL 2900 bit slice system applications using the full power of the MECL support tools such as the 16 input/32 output modules, the 1 K X 32 bit MECL RAM modules and the FAST software. The MECLITTL ADAPTER MODULE is a 20 lines TTL to MECL and 36 lines MECL to TTL translator specially designed for interfacing the MEE4810 MECL Input/Output Module to a TTL 2900 prototype system. The MECL lines DO 0 to DO 31 and the corresponding control lines are terminated by 100 ohm SIP resistors. MTA Specifications: Connectors Pl A to P4A signals Connectors P18 to P48 signals Power requirements Dimensions (W X H X T) ECL voltage compatible TTL voltage compatible +5 Vdc, 370 mA - 52 Vdc, 570 mA - 2 Vdc, 120 mA 248 x 165 x 20 mm (9.75" x 6.5" x 0.79"). r---------------------------------------------------------------------~ INTERCONNECTIONS MECL II0 MODULE .- ECL - - --- MTA MODULE 2900 SYSTEM . TTL ECL • - --- ---------------------- 1-104 ® MEE32RA MOTOROLA 10800/2900 SUPPORT TOOLS 1 K x 32·BIT MECL RAM MODU LE The MEE32RA high speed MECL RAM module IS a 1 K x 32-blts RAM board especially designed for microinstruction storage In a 10800/2900 Mlcropro- cesso" Development System based on the EXORciser. Once the microprogram has been partially debugged at reduced speed, It is transfered into the high speed MECL RAM module, allowing then real time execution and break points insertions under control of the EXORciser. The module contains 32 MCM10146 MECL RAM devices. representing a total capacity of 1 K word of 32 bits each. It is expendable to provide wider words (multiple of 32 bits) by using more modules shartng the same Address Bus. It is also expendable to provide larger capacity (multiple of 1024 words) by using more modules sharing the same Data Bus. An external address decoding cirCUit IS then to be used to select the appropriate module through the CE Ime. • • • • • • • 1024 words of 32 bits Fast access time: 28 ns (tYpical) Allinputsioutputs MECL 10K compatible OR·Wlred capability on the Data Bus SWltchable ac1dress lines complementing (positive or negative logic) Expandable memory capacity and word size AllaM real time execution of microprogram Allom dynamic microprogramming Power supply requirement. -5.2 Vdc 3.5 A • -·2 Vdc 0.3 A Dimensions IWxHxT)· 248 x 165 x 1.6 mm 19.75" x 6.5" x 0.062"1. • • BLOCK DIAGRAM r ,. OQIV£R 1 ORI'/ER " "'Ie IOI'~ 1 M(IOlg~ l 1-105 MECL 32K RAM MODULE ® MEEIPR MOTOROLA 10800/2900 SUPPORT TOOLS MECL PROM PROGRAMMER MECL PROM PROGRAMMER MODULE The MEE1PR PROM Programme I Module provides the EXORCISer with the capability of programming MECL MCM10149 256 x 4 PROM devices ThIS module plugs drrectly Intu the EXORciser. The MECL PROM Progrdmmer Module. with Its software, endbles the user to program a device, verify the nata In the device and tldllsfel data from the device to the EXORciser's RAM memory The programming software IS avarlable on cassette, paper tape, or dISkette (EDOS and MOOS) • Compatible with the MCM10149 256 x 4 MECL PROM • PROM pattern loading: keyboard, paper· tape, diskette, ma,ter PROM • Allows drrect programming from microprogram format contained In RAM • Positive and negative pattern capabrl,ty Device Type DeSCription • Verify and dump function MEE1PRA • Uses the +5 V± 12 V EXORciser power supply ME'CL PROII..,.1 Programmer with software on cassette ORDERING INFORMATION MEE t PRB + 5 Vdc 700 InA + 12 Vdc 525 mA (programming pulse) -12 Vdc 350 rnA • MECL PROM ProgrClrnmer with softwdre on paper-tape MEEl p~~O ••·•.1f.CL PROM ProgramMer ...-.,qn software MEE1PRM Dimensions (WxHxT)' 248 x 192 x 1 6mm (975" x 756" .x 0.062") BLOCK DIAGRAM CA' :r PAD PA I PA2 PA) } PA. PAS PA6 PA7 } PIA PB 7 P8J P84 PB6 PBS P82 PBI P8D }-1 }-1 PROM ~{ ~{ (8' 1-106 DJ D2 DI DD Of" EGOS dlskett@ Mt..CL PFiOM Programmer ",11th softwa~f> on MOOS dlsket1:e } ® MOTOROLA MEEIWW UNIVERSAL MECL WI RE-WRAP BOARD 10800/2900 SUPPORT TOOLS The MEE1WW Wlfe·Wrap Module provides the user with means to develup MECL slice system prototypes In wlfe·wrap technology. ProvIsion IS made on the card to implement 48·pin devices (up to 101, 24·pln and 16·pln devices, 6 x 34·pin flatt·ribbon connectors, 1 power regulator UNIVERSAL MECL WI RE-WRAP CARD MC7902 or 1 clock generator based around an MC10116 or an MC10802. A special connector IS provided on the board for the MECL power supply (-52 Vdc and -2 VdcJ. Dimensions (WxHxTI: 248 x 156 x 1.6 mm (9.75" x 6.5" x 0.062"1. liiJiiiilli••iiDiiili &e . •e· - cccc~eeooeocec~cc ~~~CCC0CC-~~CCCCC ~ - - ~ ........... . I .I I I I I • 1-107 @MOTOROLA M/CROSYSTEMS M68SFD EXORdisk II EXORdisk II is a dual drive floppy disk system which offers more than one half million bytes of on line storage and is designed for direct ~~~~~-J!iii~~~::~:::~:~~~ use with Motorola's EXORciser I. EXORciser II. ~nd EXORterm :'00 Development Systems. U,e of EXORdisk II can greatly speed the task of developing software for microprocessor-based systems by reducing program load and peripheral access times. The EXORdlsk II hardware package consists of an EXORciser-resident controller module, an interconnecting cahle assemhly and the floppy disk drive unit which houses the dual side-by-side drives, power supply and associated electronics in an attractive tabletop cabinet. The EXORdisk II disk operating system -- MOOS - is a powerful program that offers an extensive selection of disk commands and utilities to the user. A simple set of disk primitives in firmware is also included in EXORdisk II. Specifications Diskette Fonnat: 2.050,048 Bits/Diskette (soft sectOr) Bytes/Diskette (~oft \ector) 256.256 77 Tracks/Diskette 26 Sectors/Track Bytes/Sector 128 Performance: Rotational Speed - 360 RPM Track-to-Track Access Time - 10 ms (max) Head Load - 40 ms (max) Sector Read/Write Time - 2.4 ms (nom) Average Latency Time -- 83.3 ms Power Requirements: 230 Vac, 50 Ilz, 350 Watts Physical Characteristics (2-drive system): Lx H x D - 17.75 x 6.96 x 23.5 inches W"~I\I - 48 pounds Electrical: All Signals are TTL. Low-True 16 Output Lines, 8 Input Lines Options and Ordering Information Part Number M68SFD2000 M68SFD2002 M68SFDC M68SFDC2 M68SFDRK2 M68SFDlJ2000 M68SMDOSIOO M6833 Description EXORdisk II Floppy Disk System, 220 V, 50 Hz -(Use with EXORciser I and EXORterm 200)·consists of the Floppy Disk Dual Drive Unit, the Controller "'adule and Cable Assembly. and a diskette containing the MDOS Operating System, the Co-Resident Editor/Assembler, the Relocatable Macro-Assembler and Linking Loader. EXORdisk II Floppy Disk System. 220 V, 50 Hz as above but for use with EXORciser II and EXORterm 220. Floppy Disk Controller Module (I MHz) Floppy Disk Controller Module (2 MHz) EXORdisk II Rack Mounting Kit Floppy Disk Dual Drive Unit Diskette containing the MDOS Operating System, the Co-Resident Editor/ Assembler, the MC6800/MC6801 Relocatable Macro-Assembler and Linking Loader. Blank Dilkette Additional Support Products Available for Use with EXORdisk II M6800EDITORM M68FTNROl2M M68BASROIOM M68MPLROIOM M68COBOLOIOM M68MODOSOIO MEX68PP3M MEXI4100M MEX3870M MEXMACE bpanded Editor, operable in Scroll mode or CRT mode !:XORciser/EXORterm Resident Reloeatable FORTRAN Compiler and Linking Loader I:XORciser/EXORterm Resident BASIC Interpreter !:XOReiser/EXORterm Resident MPL Compiler ~.XORciser/EXORterm Resident ANS COBOL Compiler ~IOIJOS Operating System PRO.\! Programmer III (All EXORcisers) MCI410001l200 Development System \1( JH70 Development System 29001l 0800 Develop";ent System EXORmer I. EXORCISer II. FXORdlSk II. EXORterm 200. and MDOS are trademarks of Motorola Inc. 1-108 EXORdlsk II MOOS Commands Command Name BACKUP BINEX Duplicate disk or perform selected file reorganization Convert binary memory-image file to EXbug loadable file BLOKEDIT Copy selected lines from text files to a new file EMCOPY Restructure EDOS 2.n file to MDOS basis EXBIN Convert EXbug-Ioadable file to binary memory-image file FORMAT Rewrite soft sector addressing information FREE Display number of available directory entries and number of available disk sectors CHAIN Place console input under control of a me LIST Print any MDOS file with"3n ASCII attribute COpy Copy files from disk to device, device to disk, or disk to disk LOAD Load any memory-image file in to memory. Supports EXORciser II dual map DEL Delete me name from directory and free corresponding disk space MERGE Concatenate files NAME Change directory attributes of file (name, suffix, etc.) PATCH Modify memory-image file REPAIR Examine disk-resident system tables and allow correction ROLLOUT Copy memory to disk. DIR Search directory for and display prescribed file names DOSGEN Write basis for support of MDOS me structure into any disk DUMP Display total content of any physical sector ECHO Duplicate console I/O on printer (EXORciser II only) EXORdisk II Controller Firmware Functions Disk Functions Load MDOS from disk Initialize disk, PIA, SSDA Check error status and printer error Display controller return status Read single/muliple sectors Read Single/multiple sectors for eRe onlv Perform write/read test Position head to t rack zero Position head to track n Perform write test Write deleted data mark to single/multiple sectors Wnte sIngle/multlple sector" read hack fur eRe check Write Single/multiple sectors Printer Functiom lnitiali/e rnnter PIA Prin t character Print 'tring, CR.l.f Print ,tnn? 1-109 ® MOTOROLA MICROSYSTEMS M68SP702 702 Printer The Motorola Microsystems Model 702 Printer is a 132-column character impact serial printer with a bidirectional logic seeking print head which produces a 7 ~ 7 dot matri~ pattern of CriSp. clean print. The 64 ASCII character set IS standard. A head speed of 120 characters per second. combined with the bidirectional logic seeking feature. gives a throughput of up to 65 lines per minute at 80 characters per line. E~ceptional reliability. high throughput. and low cost of ownership combine to make the 702 one of the most versatile printers available. High reliabIlity i, achieved by few moving pans and an uncomplicated modular construction incorporating state-of-the-an microprocessor electronics for control. It comes equipped with a rear tractor feed capable of printing an onginal. plus five copies with e~cellent print quality. and also has a paper out sensor. --. The complete printer package includes the Printer and the Printer Interface Cable Assembly, as well as the MEX68PI Printer Interface I/O Module. which normally is housed in a Development System chassis or other external system to onterface WIth the printer. • • • • • • • • • • • • • Prints original plus five copies 8 ips paper slew Stepper motor dri ve Table top Tractor feed Ballistic head Low cost of ownership Modular conslruction Bidireclional logIC seeking pnnting Microprocessor electronics Ribbon canndge Excellent prinl quality Character elongation Specifications Print P~rformancr - Minimum Throu&hput: Prinl MOl. to Ch., 80 Clio, Speed Prinl 1'", Lin. Pu Un~ « ... 1 Wldlh (tpml (Ipml 120 13.2" (JJ5 mml 225 65 Oprra'or for .... l: 10 C'handen per Incb horizontal 6 lines per inc:h nrtical fJo .... led (doubi" width) ("henldt'" Forms H.nellin.: Trtlcc.or 1M, for (lpml 45 Po .... O!ldj ... l ....nl 1.\99 mml Ribbon System: Ribbon cortrid.. ConUnuous ribbon WI'" ,14 mml ..... 10 ".1 mf'tf'''' kin« MobIus loop .110.\ prinlinc on uppu and kI..-t'r" portiun fin .1I~mlll" .hal daht was rf'('f'i"f'd Phy,ic.al I)imen'iion: ".iKhl 60 lbo. (27 kal Widlh 24.5 1622 mm) tt~iaht S·' 120.l mm) fk'pth 1M' ,."h hinef Indlcaton: Powu ON - Indkale\ A<: plw~r l\ applied to prtnlf'r Setl-d - Indicates pr1nt~r can ",min dau Alrn - Indicates ope,....or-corncubW uror roncltUon indiCJII~ foJrctrtcal Requi",rnent\: 50160 Hz. 115/230 V.e U!Wabie paper 4" f 102 mm) 10 17.3" 14J4} mmJ width r.per out wlI!IOr ....... Forms thidtM'S..~ Top or ronn Horizontal forlm posilioninK Vertical form.. ~tiflnin. PnLi~ Ch.,..den: 7" 7 clot mIItrt., 64 "tandard AS('II ('ontrol~: S.t. r portion on alternate p...... Panel Indiu.on: Pow~r ON - A~rt - Indinlt~~ At' pow~r i~ Indicates prinlf'r l'IIn Power ONiOn' Sing .. tine reod Paper empty .... rrido Self-t..t Data Input: wftwal"e !teltclable Forms Handling: Tractor fe-ed, for rUT rt't"d forms IS ips s~w Usuble paper 4' (102 mml to 17.3 1439 rnm) width Paprr out sensor Maximum width for iJR justification IS.1!' l.l99 rnm) Paprr tension adjustmtpl Stow.c. - Fonns thickness Top of form Horizontal forms positioning Vertical forms positioning Internal Controls: to:ledronic top of form allow5 paper to span to top of fonn when command is re~ived Prl"Se't ror II" (279 mm) or 11.7" (297 mm) forms I'onnal: t:lonKatrd (double width) ~IKtfdeselKI T~mperature: Op nltor-t·orrt't1..llbl~ Physical Dimension: W.i&hl 60 lbo, 127 kg) Width 24.5" (622 mm) Hei&ht 8" 1203 mm) o.pth 18" (457 mm) er-ror {"ondition 1-112 M68SP703 703 PRINTER Specifications (eonld.) INTERFACE TIMING <. . %""~""'0 ...:; ;" '...?r"";:.../~J'--______________ Parallel Data _""[;; .... ---'1.0 #<51_ -i 1.0 ,.sl ___ I(min) I Oala Strobe . I (min) LJ ----I ...-.1 . Acknowledge 1.0 ,...s (min) 500 "s (max) , I ACK Delay ,......- - - - - ( I o r ncrma~datal---·I I ~I__~~ 1- - I- : r~"""""""""T---------" [ Busy 1----- I Busy Delay ~I BUSy-----i 701 Nonnal Data Input THTUnM: ACK Dela; ACK 2 S·IO ", 1 5·4 5 '" Bus) Dela:y 0·15 ", 0·10 J 5·4 5 ", "s ACK Dela; ACK Bus) Duration Line Feed Vertical Tab (I-In.) Bus} Condition Timing Fonn Feed (11·m ) Delete 18·25 m, 70·80 m, 725·755 m, 50·300 0 "s Bell Select" Deselect Lnlll Pnnler Pnnt Command 56 m>ichar Return Time NA 50·100 I'-S I!II ~elected (no bu~)\ Options and Ordering Information Pert Number o.ecrlptlon M68SP701A 10 liS\", 60 Ib oplion ~r I \1Hz Sy"em.s - consists M68SP70JBI0 Printer MEX68PI Printer Interfa .. Modul., and M68SP701A20 230\", SO Hz option for I MHz S)Slems Same as abon t'lC'epl M68SP70JB20 Printe-r M6&~P70JC 10 IIS\, 60 Hz option for 2 MHz Systems Same .. I\.f68SP701A 10 .. copt MEX68PIZ Print.r Int.rfaco ,"udul. "fEX68PIC Printrr Interconn«lion C.blt' M68SP70.lC20 0( AMembl~ BOV. SO Hz option for 2 MHz Sy\lerru. Same .s ~68SP703AlO ncepl MfX68PI2 Printer InltrfMC't' \1odult 1-113 C A K-I ACK Delay (For busy condition) ® MOTOROLA MICROSYSTEMS M68SP779 779 Printer The Motorola Microsystems 779 Printer IS a low-cost printer ideal for development systems where emphasis is on economy rather than speed Low cost of ownership is accomplished by a low initial price and high reliability due to fewer moving pans and uncomplicated modular construction incorporallng a smgle ~ ~~ logiC board wllh TIL logic. The 779 IS a 5 x 7 senal dot ----~-: matrix printer that prims 21 lines per minute at 80 characters a line .::-,.-(60 cps). Alrhough it has an 80-column prim image. 132-column format can be produced using the condensed printing feature. Condensed primmg on eight-inch wide paper can resulr in substantial savings as does the use of standard TIY roll paper. !II The complete printer package includes the Printer and the Printer Imerface Cable Assembly. as well as the Printer Interface Module which normally is housed in a Development System chassis or other external system to imerface with the printer. • • • • Low cost of ownership Modular construction Ribbon canridge EllCelient print quality • • • • Minimum of mechanical pans Pinch roll friction feed Ballistic prim head Condensed prim feature Specifications Prinl P.rto .... n ... : Donuty (cpO Prinl Speed (cpl) M.x. Prinl Wldlh 10 Char P.r Lin. (Ipm) 10 16_5 60 110 8.0" (203 mm) 8.0" 1203 mm) IJO 80 Char 132 Char Per Line Per Line (Ipm) (Ipm) 90 21 J6 NlA 21 Chona... : Operator Controls: Prial S .. ltch Forms Thickness Horizontal forms positioning Vertical ronns positionina PoworON/OFF Prlnl Oonsily DIII.lnpul: 7-blt ASCII p.nllel; TIL 1...ls .. ilh slrobe Ackno ....q. po ... Indlc.l.. thOl dol ..... r ... '.od 5 • 7 doC malri. ~s_rd ASCII FonM': 10 to 16.5 chanet.n per inch (operolor adjustable) 6 11_ per Inch ..rtlcal E~drical Requi~ments: 50160 Hz. 1151230 VII< Fom. HaDdIl.,.: Plach rol _ . 5.5 Inchn (140 mm) soconds ..... rol. Roll paper to 9_8" (250 mm) coro Roar _ o d roll _ . r bolder Col........... ud 'ear bar Ribbon System: Ribbon cartr1. Coatln ..... rib_ 9/16" (144 mm) wldo. 10 yards (9_1 mol.rs) 10... MobI.. 1oop 0110101 prin'.... on upper .nd Io ... r portion on oIl.mIl'. ....... ....... Indlaotor: ....or ON - Indicates AC po ...r Is .ppMod 10 prinlor 1-114 Physical Dimensions: W.lcht 45 lbo. (20 ka) Wldlh 19.5" (495 mm) H••hl 8" (203 mm) Oopth 18" 1457 mm) Temperature: Operating 40° 10 100°F 14.4 1037.7"0 Storago _40° 10 160°F 1_40 10 71.1°0 0 0 H_dlty: Openll... 20% 10 90% 1No Condensalion I Slonge: 5% 10 95% (No Condensation I M68SP779 779 PRINTER SpecifiCations (eontd) INTERFACE PIN OUTS Sl~nal Pin I ;;D:-:"~T":-;:SO;:T';;R7':O~B':'E D"U. DATA DATA DATA ~ DATA 7 DATA " DATA BIT I HrI , BIT' BIT.j BIT 5 BIT ~ BIT' 27 ," y ------- 10 ACK~OWLEDGl II Bl:SY I, P-\P~N ~Y Ol'1 "r PNI"r ()~~ ~H.H-r '0 I ' - -- 1I - - .'2 - - l.1 GROL''1D If'I (,J.tOl , I ) 1- (H-\\,I\ (;~()l'''D '5 -- --- IX '6 - - - I' PRI"HR I..J (JJ,tOl' .... n '"'" ''i\ INTERFACE TIMING f' (;;:;: :::;;.1 Paralle' Data _,10/<51--1 1_0 /<51 __ j(mln) Data --I(mln) Stro~e 1__ 1,0,,5 (min) 500 ,,5 Imax) No(mai Data Transfer 01 }J.S~, r---------------1___. . . .1_ lIeknowledge - - - - - - - - , 25-5,0,,5 _ ... Busy Condition II ____________________________________________ --I j - - 01,,5 [r~1----~-,~-~-,F-a~-~-d-R-;-~-;:-~-53-;-g-m-s-'n-c~~~.--------- Busy ~s 01 ~: AcknOWledge 2S-S0J..Ls ~-- 1'----_....F .... Options and Ordering Information Part Description Number ~16H.,p77." III 115\.60 Hz ophon for I "1HI S~~tf'm ... - ('onsi!.b uf \168SP779810 Print., ~EX68P! Prinltr Inl.rfacr \todulf'. and .\fEX68PIC Prin ..~r Inl("Honne-dion Clllhit" A~M'mbl~ 2.\OV, 50 Hi oplion f41r I MHz S ... ~I~m!t SafJ'N' 11.., .ben't fllC't!'pl \-16HSP779S20 Printer Il~\, 60 III option ror 2 ~Hl ':O-'ilt'm.\ \.f6HS P'779 0\ 10 el,,:tpl \-IFX68PI2 Prinlf'r Intt'rfalll.:c \1odult ~mt' Ai' l \4')\. 'tHmt' ~ HL opliun for 1 \1ttJ ~,s'trn.\ tlC1tpl VU':,,(68PIl Prinlf'r 1"lufan !\1odulf' d~ '\1t.8~P77~"20 1-115 ® MOTOROLA MICROS YS TEMS M68SP781 781 Printer The MOhlrola Mlen"),lems Model n I Pnnler I; an en.nomlc. XO·column characler pnnler supplied 10 J 'I) I"h. low profile cablne!. Ih hIgh Ihrough· pUI and lov. ownershIp cosl make II Ideal for soft· ""are Jevdopmcnt and hu~ine~\ application~ Cost of owner,hlp " mlOlmlled by a low lOilial price and a de"gn whlCh combine; an LSI·based modularconcepl wllh few· nH.wlng-part~ constructIOn to achieve near-maintenance-free opera- lion. A maximum Ihroughpul of 120 Ipm is achIeved by u"ng a logic· seeking. bidirerllonal pnnl head Ihal seeks Ihe shonesl palh 10 Ihe nexI line when prlnl· Ing ;ucre",,,, lines of dala. The Model 7X I " a 5 x 7 ;erial dOl matnx printer. and ,'orne; e4ulpped wllh a rear Iraclor feed. capable of printIng five·pan paper. plu,> a paper OUI sen;or. The complele pnnter package includes Ihe Prlnler and Ihe Printer Interconneclion Cable Assembly. as well as the Prinler Interface Module. whIch is normally housed in a Developmenl Syslem chassis or other external system 10 Interface Ihal system with the pnnler. • MlntnlUm mechanical ran ... • • • • • Table lOp Traclor feed • • • • • • ~ldlrC,'t!9nill lot:!c ";cking pnnlin~ Ribbon canndge Ball"IIC head Low cost of ownership Modular conslruclion Cu;(()m LSI eleclronics Excellent prinl 4ualil~ Chardcter elongalion Pnnls origlOal. plus five rop,es Specifications Print Puformancr I LoKic-S«-kinf( and Bidirectional J Print Max_ 10 __'hillr 80 Char SpH'd Print P~r Lint Per Une (('PS) Width (ipml dpml 60 8.0'203 mm) Operator <':onlrol!t: Seled/desr&ect Forms thkkrwss Horizontal forJru. positioning Vertical forrm positioning Power ON/Orr 43 t20 Charaders: S • 7 dot motri •• f>4 stondard AS('II DM'a Input: 7. or II-bit ASCII parallel; l.SI electronics; TTL Ie ..ls with strobe Acknowkdge pulse indicates thai data was renind Format: 10 chanlC1~rs pu inch horizontal 6 lines per inch ,"utica) Elonaaled Idoublr- widlh) chanu1ers '-Qft","lln" Electrical Requirements: 50160 Hz: 115I2.lO Vac st'kdable Physical Dimension~: Wei,ht 45 Ills. (20 kR) Width 19.5" \495 mm) Height 8" (203 mm) Depth 18" (457 mm) Forrm Handlinl: Tractor - For reMr or boUom fH'd fOrlm Papu tmsion adjustnwnl Maximum Maximum Widlh for Width I.IR Ju,tincation 12.1" 1.107mm) 10.2"" (259 mOl) Ribbon System: Ribbon cartridRe Continuous ribbon 9/16" 04 mm) wiM. 10 yards (9.J meters) long MoblUi loop MnO.' prlntilll on uppt'r and lower portion on allunale pa.... Panel IndiClitors: POWtr ON - Indicatn At' pinter is appUed to printer Srdrct -- Indiaatn printer can recein data Alert - Indimlft ~f1Itor-corrutabk error condition 1·116 Temperatun: O ..... tina40° 10 100't' (4.4' to 37.7"C) Slol'O&e -40' to 160'f' 1·40' to 7J.J°C) Humldlty: Opera ling 20% to 90% (No Condensation) Storage: So;. to 9s-i. (No Conciensation) M68SP781 781 PRINTER Specifications (contd.) INTERFACE TIMING Parallel Data _ ...~"'"' ..........."""'...........~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ I£SI_ ~ 1.0 I£SI_ - I (min) --11.0 I(min) Data Strobe ,.....--------------------- LJ --I __ 1 1.0 I£S (min) 500,..8 (max) Acknowledge_ - -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-, ~---~,-- ACK Delay normal data)----,..-~I-- ACK --I I~..-----(Ior --I _ACK Delay _____--I,..E?::2'"'/~?'"'/;.;::...... :7<.../7:~;1.,....------....,1 (For busy condition) Busy Busy Delay _I 1- BUSy---j 781 Nonnal Data LnptJl Ti mJn8- ACK Oclay ACK 2.5 ·1 0,... 2.5·5.0,... O·U ,... Bu,y Oclay ACK Oclay ACK Bu . . ) Clmdllion Tlmln!! ()'IO ,... 2.5·5.0,... Bu,) Duration Line Feed Yen ",:al Tah ( l·m ) Fnml Feed II)-In I Delele Boll Selel."l· De . . eJecl 75·105 ms 240·270 m. 207·2.llsec. 100-400 ,... 0 100-400 ,... Until Printer IS Pnnf Commotnd Rc!'lurn Time selected 16.7 mslchar NA (no bu,)) No bvsy ,I '"tub,\ prIme on select option IS used Options and Ordering Information Part Number o.lcrlptlon M68SP71IIA IA IISV, 60 Hz opdon ror I MHz Sy• ..,.... - consists or M68SP71IlBlO PriDlor MEX68PI Prinlor Inlorroco Modulo, ond MEX68PIC Prinlor Inll!rCODnoctIon Coblo ADombly M68SP71IIA1A lJOV, !IO Hz opdon ror 1 MHz Sy.'oms SaRlO .. obo.. o.copl M68SP71IlBlO Prinlor M68SP71IICIA IISV, 60 Hz oplloa ror 1 MHz Sy."'ms SaRlO .. M68SP71IIA IA o.copl MEX68PIl Prinlor In..,rroco Modulo M68SP71IIClA lJOV, !IO Hz option ror 1 MHz Sy""", SaRlO _ M68SP781A1A o.copl MEX68Pll Prinlor IDlmoco Modulo 1-117 ® M68MPRl MOTOROLA POLYVALENT DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM MEDIUM SPEED PRINTER MEDIUM SPEED PRINTER The M68MPR 1 noiseless printer prints at 30 characters per second on metalized paper. It accepts 7 bit ASCII characters. • 30 characters per second • 80 characters per line • noiseless (electro·sensitive paper) • 64 ASCII char acters • 5 x 7 matrix • Parallel interface • Carriage Return and Line Feed ASCII codes PDS ..... SPECIFICATIONS Specification Valu. LII,e formal Pnnllng speed 80 characters 30 characters per second Char acter set 64 ASCII characters Printing mechanism Carriage lelurn 5 x 7 matro( on electro sensitive paper ASCII code Line Feed ASCII code Interface J·blt parallel clocked data, TTL compatlblt:! PO~I 220 V 50 Hz. 50 VA Requirement Operating temperature 5" to 45'C ACCESSORIES DimenSIOns Height Width Depth Weight 120mm J70 mm J30 mm 7 Kg 1·118 M68MPPl 50 rnptN declI o-sensltlve Paper Roll MeRtCel Inlerc','nnecTlol"l Cableos $p, ® MICROSYSTEMS MOTOROLA M68SXD EXORterm 150 EXORterm 150 is a display termInal and console expressly personalized for use with the EXORciser, MOlOrola', M6ROO Development Suppon System EXORterm 150 uses the predominantly LSI componenl~ of the MI>8oo family lO proVIde control of the display aunbute" commUnications faCIlity, terminal ". itchiindlcator ({lntml, and keyboard inputs. Mlcroe.xccutlve firm\l.arc, In conJunclIon \I. Ith control and appilcatlon task firmware, coord Inate the functions of EXORterm 150 in it., EXORn,cr-oncnted activlt~ .As an EXORciser dISplay console, EXORterm 150 iaLllltates the exchange of data between the user and the system via a high quality video interface, keyboard entry, and a serial communications link u"ng speeds up to 9600 hIts per second. To funher enhance the efficiency of the User/EXORCISer Interface. speCIal keys have been encoded to ins oke functIons unique to the EXORciser in each of m three command levels: DOS. EXhug. and MAID. h'r user cnnvcnlence. the functIon, presented hy each of th"e 12 ,peclal keys and displays on the 23rd and 24th line of the screen. As the command level is changed, the functIon of the respective key changes and is displayed accordingly EXORterm 150 " housed in an attranive enclosure compatlbk in appearance wl!h the full EXORCISer line, pnJviding a coordinated look suitahlc for "ffice or !Jhnrator~. Attention to the ergnnomic considerations of glare reduction. keyboard "feel" and positioning. and control placement. make EXORterm 150 easy to use. Readily accessible controls include: power on/off, brightness, on/off line. upper case/lower case, Editing, Cursur and Page Mode Control Keys and automatic line feed/carriage return. Infrequently used switches and controls are located on the upper rear panel and include: baud rates selection, communications configuration switches, mode selection terminal reset, audible alarm adjustment, and RS·232/current loop connectors. The ba\lc EXORtcrm 150may be connected for either RS-2:12 or 20/60 rnA current loop operation. An extended communications option is a\"dahk for use with 10J- or 202-t) pc modem' The cable supplied WIth thi, option permit.s supervisory channel operation with a 202-type modem Features • • • • • • RS-232 and current loop interface Full 1920 character ,creen Ea,il} readable 7 x 9 dot cbaracter~ EXORciser integrated features :vJo'able. detacbable keyboard Editing Keys • • • • • M6800-based Motorola design and manufacture LSI for maximum reliability Alternate glass TTY function Baud Rate selectable to 9600 BPS [X()Rtt'f'm lind t.Xf)fC,n\u .. no ' .... d"m .. rk. .. ur \1ulur"l .. In( 1-119 Specifications Int.rrace: [)i.pla) : 12" diagonal, P4 phosphor with antiglart shield .o\.I'lnchronous R~-232 dirut conne(.'t 20/60 rnA currt"nt loop (source capable optional) HDX and t'DX Selectable baud rates: 110, ISO, 300, 600, UOO, 1800, 2400, 4800, or %00 24 lines. 80 charactus per line 1920 character rull di.pla) ('harllcler Configuration: 9 , 12 dot matri, 7 x 9 character size Parit,) selection - odd. f\'en, or nonf Word size - seven- or eight-bit Framing - one- or two-stop-bits 103/202 modem rompatibmtj' (optiona" ('ha racter Set: ASCII·% character subsrt with gr.. k alphabrt and Power Require-meDb: 95 to 230 Volts AC, 50/60 Hz Less than 200 walls six spedal graphics Cursor: blinking inH"rtf'd ~ideo. nond(,"itructh:e. on 9 J(, 12 blo(.'k Inuenwnlal and absolute po~ilioning (addres!.able. readable) Kt"}board: Encoded. n~Ke~ Physical Dimensions: Display - 12,5 H, 18.5" W , 20" D K.,board - 2,7" H , 18.5" W , 8.4" D O'~"'II - 12,5" H , U.5" W , 29" D Wei~ht L ! Optional Statements Division • I/O Statement, • INPUT • RI·.AD • OATA • PRINT • RESTORt r.OTO ON e~prc'~lon (;010 statement n. fm.. ., I) ON e, 10 7S. • Liten.i, one byte chUleter. Variabl. Names " One throu'" ax alphanumeric characters (first character musl be A·Z). • ImpUcillype dec'IRlion .ccordinllo rlrSl chIRcler. I Ihroulh N inlOler, A Ihroulh H, 0 Ihrough Z real. Arithmetic and l..oaical Openoto.s • Exponential • lAND - lOIIieal AND • Multiplication • lOR - 101ica! OR • Division • IEOR - logical EOR • Addition • ISHFT - 16·bOl • Subtnction lef'/righl shift • Relational operators Sequence Control Statements • Unconditionll GOTO • Compuled GOTO • Arithmetic IF • Losical If • DO statement • CONTINUE • STOP • END M SOfTW ARE OPTIONS Modia Ptrl Number Floppy Disk - EDOS Floppy Disk - MOOS liO Stalements • F'ormatted READ from disk or terminal • form.tted WRIT'E 10 disk or terminal • • • • , Formattod PRINT 10 I.rminal Free formll READ REWIND FORMAT conversions 1- conversions E - conversions F - conversions A -conversions Lileral field, ChIRcler positioninl specifications Group specifiCilions Specification Statements • DATA initialization • DIMENSION. Ihree dim.nsions ma.'f.imum • BI.nk COMMON 2-8 M68FTNROl2D M68F TNRO 12M Subprosrams • FLNCTION • SUBROUTINE • RETURN • CALL Intrinsic Functions/Subroutines • SQRT - square rool • EXP - exponent base e • SIN - sine • COS - cosine • AT AN - .rcl.... nl • ALOG - nolunlloprilhm • ABS - lboolul. vllu. • POWER - computes a power • OPENF - disk fil. open • CLOSEF - disk file close ® MOTOROLA Microsystems M68MASR010 Resident Macro Assembler and Linking Loader The Resident Macro Assembler and Linking Loader extend the powerful software development capabilities of the EXORciser. The Macro Assembler supports Motorola's 6800, 6801 and 6802 microprocessors with a complete set of assembler featuresincluding macros, conditional assembly, relocation and linking. The Linking Loader combines relocatable object modules to produce an absolute object image. Operation of the Macro Assembler and Linking Loader are shown in the diagram. OPERATION OF MACRO ASSEMBLER/LINKING LOADER Macros Macros are used to assign a name to a "template" sequence of assembly-language instructions. Subsequent use of the macro name causes that instruction sequence to be inserted into the assembler input stream. Arguments supplied with a macro call are inserted into specified locations in the template. Conditional Assembly Conditional assembly may be used to select or omit optional source statements for assembly. Modules Relocation Module Library Relocation allows the assignment of absolute memory addresses to a program at linkage time rather than at assembly time. Programs assembled by the Macro Assembler can be loaded anywhere in memory by the Linking Loader. Linking Linking allows intermodule references to be resolved at linkage time rather than requiring absolute addre~s assignment at assembly time. As relocatable programs are loaded by the Linking Loader, labels are assigned absolute addresses, and references to such labels in other program modules can be satisfied. I ----1- Absolute-i [ ~~ Macro Assembler Features Upward compatible with standard Residenr Assembler with the followm~ enhan('emenl: Mkroprocessor Supported • 6800/6802 Macros • l P 10 -'6 argulTIl'nlS • 6801 • ~rnl.:1 L'hdractcr ~uj:\!\UIIIIIOn lor argumt'nh Output • Absolule obJecl - • A.~semhll'r gener~led ,ymh(lb • lip hI M Ic\"cls of n..:"tin}! EXORci.er loadable funnal Lmking Loader {nbJcct mlxiule} • Relocatable object - Cunditional A...,mbly • Stnn)Ut" \pre,,~ion U~\ls PrOKram S«tions • Ahsolulc - non-relocatable • Bas< - direclly addre,>able (0-255) • L'p 10 • Rlank Common - unmltlah/cd L"ommOn • Data - data ~ectlon (ex.ternal addrc..,\mg) • Program - Insfruclion ... ceflon • ~amed Cummon --. common "e(:tlom Indudcd v.lthm nne Ilt tht: ahllH Linking • External dt!fimtlons • E~temal references EXORciser i~ fo( Oth.r • S~lllt'lol a tradelnark of Motorola Inc 2-9 I..:veb nf nl..·"wlE! ,'rov, £I.'f"en.'nl"t' tat'lle • i.1\lInr 111lt: ""IIJth cnnlroi • rill... 1m t;';H.'h page ~)f I!\tlng • SET ".. "ylllht11 redcfintll(ln • HSZ·- hl,l("k ,hlrage - Inltlall~ ICfP • 1-. \ pll'''''' Ion ~"'aluatton .- parenthe\I/I..·J 1..'\prC'\ .• lt·n!o. ORDERING INFORMATION Linking Loader Features • Rcl'~'alitlO t)( "hI!"'''''' 1I" ....luk, • Linkmg llf ,lbj~\"( mtlillulc!rO • T\\ II OU(put mt'lllc, • EXOR,,'isN Luau Forma( • MlX)S Load Fonnal • \1emor)" load m:lp ~) mhtll"i • Undefined s~mhtll 1i"1 • Flc'(ihlc L'O dc\ h;l' ""I!!nrnl'l1I • !\'1ap uf c.\lcmal Option Media Part Number A Cassette M68MASR010A B Paper Tape M6!lMASR010B 0' EOOS Oiskette M68MASR0100 M·· MOOS Diskette M68SMDOS100 • 6801 I nstrucrion Set not supported. •• Included in EXORdisk • Di:'\k • C\lhS,'1I." • Line prinler 2·10 ® MOTOROLA MICROSYSTEMS M68MPLR01OM ·Resident MPL Compiler MPL is an EXORciser-compatible. high-level. user-oriented programming language for the Motorola MC6800 series Microprocessor. The language is a subset of PLiI with features chosen for applicability to the Microprocessor environment. MPL was designed to simplify the translation from functional requirements for a microprocessor application to an operating M6800 program. The MPL language and its associated compiler provide a powerful sQftware tool which can significantly reduce the time and costs associated with microprocessor software development and maintenance. • EXORciser and EXORlerm Residenl • Based on PUI. a Powerful High-Le~el Programming Language Widely Known and Used • Supports Free Formal. Block Slruclured Inpul • Allows Embedded Assembly Language MPL SOURCE LISTING System Configuration OTHER OBJECT MOOULES CMPL. FORTRAN. ASSEMBLERI lbe minimum syslem configuralion is. • An EXORCIse, 0' EXORlenn 200 • An EXORdi,k II Floppy Disk Sy ..em • 56K by ... of m.mory • An EXORcise,-compalibi... nninal • MICro Aosemblcr/Unkin, Loade, Soft ...... MEMORY MAP ABSOLUTE OBJECT FILE • Edilor MPL Advantages • IuJ ID La.. 1M user orientalion of MPL results in reduced .nining requiremenls and shone:r project stan·up limes. • IuJ ID Read The self-documenlinl natU«' of MPL simplifies soflwa~ malnlenance and prodUCI enhancement. • IuJ ID Write User-oriented slalement fonns and free-Connat inpul simplify prOlram wrilin," 'The MPL block structure encoural6 software modularity and siructurcd proarammlRl· • IuJ ID Dobui A hi.h·levellan, ...." pennilS an emph..i. on debuUln. ",orilhm, and desi•• fl .... "'lher lila. 0. Ihe delails of an usembly I••, •••" impl"men'.'ion. • IuJ ID 0pIIIIIbe Assembly Ian,.... OUlpul and the .se of embedded .... mbly 11.1.....1I0.. 1he opIuDlzllic. of con.i. P"'I",m ..gme.,s for uee.,ion .peed 0' memory spacc, without wricin, an entU'~progl'llm in lucmbly lanluaae. Calls to assembly 1....UlJe subroutines involve very little overhead. ·IuJIDU....... Proal'lms written ill MPL for the M6800 will be lranslat.ble to fucure MOIOroia microprocessor products by recompiling. not fewrilinc· .lMyto_ • Higher producuvity for soflware dt-vtk'tpmenl • lo..er software COils • Shone, deSIgn cycle. • Easlcr produci modifiCillon 2-11 Language Features • Stardard PL/I Stat.nwnls PROCEDURE DECLARE "atement with INITIAL. DEFINED. BASED ."nhut., If. THEN. ELSE Slaternent DO slalcmcnl with TO. BY. WHILE clauses Assignment \lal!!ment GOTO Suhroullne CALL RETURN BEGIN END • Data Type. B" Binary (lor 2 byles. signed or unsigned) Del.:lmal (signed or unsigned) Character Lahel • Data Classes (Stallc or BASED) Muludunensional array!! SlTuctures Scale", POlnler.. • Arllhnwllc. Relational. and Logical Operations Muluplic3110n Oi\lision Subtraction Addillon Shift Bitwise AND. OR. Ex.clusivc OR EO. NE.LT.GT. LE.GE AND. OR. NOT • E.t~nsion5 Address Constants C ompulcd GOTO Embedded assembly language statements Optional !iUbrouhne CALL wilh register argument!i Extensions for relocalability GLOBAL and EXTERNAL variables Ordering Information Part Number M6RMPLRO 10M Detcrlptlon Resident MPL Compiler on MOOS diskelte 2-12 ® MOTOROLA MICROSYSTEMS M68EML OPERATION OF THE M6800 SIMULATOR Sil11ulator The M68EML simulates the execution of M6800 machine language instructions in a host computer. Although the simulation is not perfonned in real time. it maintains a count of the simulated execution cycles. M68EML facilitates the testing and debugging of microprocessor programs in a host computer environment. The M68EML Package includes: • FORTRAN Source Program • Fonnatted Source Listing and Installation InMructions • A Copy of the M6800 Programming Reference Manual r :::;t7o"m::t;--' I I I I Inputs • Object Module - EXORcl\er·compallble format I ASCII characters) • Simulalor Commands D - Display Regl!\ters DB - Set Di\play Base OF - Set DIsplay Flag DL - Display Last Insu\lclion OM - DIsplay Memory EX HR IB 1M LW - PF PO RSO SM - SR T- T8 - Exi. Set Header Count Se. I npu. Ba.. Input Memory Tape laS! Word Address Emulalc Non- Ma!ookable Interrupt Emulate Reset Run Select D1splay Re@:i\lcf\ Set Memory Se. Regi"e, Host Computer Requirements Trace InstfUl'lIon Execution Trace Branches A dcscnpllon ofthc!ooc command!» Rrfrrtnu Manuul IS • Software • FORTRAN IV • Any nperallng "Y'lem whu.:h Will 'Iuppon fORTRAN program\ • Memof) • 16 bit minimum word length (17 blh for I' .. I.:nmplement .,;ompuler .. , • ~cmory .. llC requlrcment ..... ar~ due III ~ompuler and lllrnpder d,ffercncc\ E:.~umale .. fnrl'nmmlln mdl..'tllne .. ;trc Induded In T;thle mcluded 10 the M6ROO ProRrumm'fJR Outputs I • Penphcrah • M6HEMl u-.c .. three lo~lI.. at umh • Command Input • OblCl't Program Input fEXOR..:, .. eH.:ompallhlc 1\1\(,11 fonnall • Lhloutput -- I\lInuldtmn Re'lulh • In general the penpheral\ needed for f-ORTRAS are ... uffllll~n' tor .\f6KHll. • Tl'1I.c( of Pm@nlm Execution Instruction Addre" Operation Code \.1nemonlc M6800 Reg,,'m Effecu .. e Addre .... Timing • Memory Dump Pnnl ~elel.:ted ponum .. of \lmulated ~6800 tv1emol) Source Media \11)HI:MI tUn""t .. 01 appro\lmateh 'OliO 'OUfll' "Idlem("nt\ Illl hll"n~ ~llmmt'nl" The '''IUtl:! prO)/ldrn " d\dllahlt' In 1\1;0 lorm, • ('ard .... M'J,('II!umn PUlllhed (dcd .. In ()29 Pun~h ('(Idt:' • \1CVl1IfJIllesJOOTO Shlfl Embedded Lucmbly hmlulle Sialemenis Relilllt)nlli l>peralof' AND. OR, b:du",~c OR ORIGIN Opuonal subroulinc CALL with 2-15 ~IISIcr alJurnenls Host Computer Requirements MPL Advantages • E80y 10 Lean The user·orientalion of MPL results in reduced training and shoner projcCI stan-up limes. • Software • ANSI FORTRAN IV • Any ope"lin, .y"em Ihal .uppon. ANSI FORTRAN I V • Memory • 32-bil "inimum word ledgth • Memory size requirements vary due to computer and compiler differences. Estimates for machines for which the compiler is currently available are given in Table I. • Peripheral • • MPL uses three or five lo,ical units • Source Input • MPL Subroutine Library Input • Compiler OuIPUI • Tennin.1 Inpul and OUIPU' on a Time-Sharin, Sy"em • In go..rallhe peripherals needed for FORTRAN are sufficienl for MPl. requi~menlS • EMy 10_'- The sclf-documenlina nalure of MPl simplifies software maintenance and product enhancement. • EMy 10 Write User-oriented stillemen. forms and free-fonnl' input simplify program ....ri.in'. The MPl block struclure encoura,es soflware modularity and snuclured proRnmming • E80y 10 Debu. A high-levelllngu ..e pennilS In emphasis on debuBBing algorithm. and design flaws rather Ihan on the de.ails of an assembly language implementlliion. • E80y 10 0pcI1IIIu Assembly languige oulpullIId the u.. of embedded .... mbly languige Source Media allow the optimization of certain program segments for execulion speed or memory space. without wriling an entire pr08ram in assembly language. Calls 10 assembly langulae subroutines involve very lilde MPL consists of approximately .5.500 source stal~menls including comments. The source program is Ivailable in two forms: • Cards - 80 Column Punched Canis in 029 Punch Code • Magnelic Tape - Unlaheled 9-rrack 800 BPI. Odd PanlY. ASCII Characler Sel. Card-Image Records (80 characler/rccordl. overhead • Ea.y 10 UN"" Programs wrinen in MPl for the M6800 Will be Iransferable 10 future MOlomla microprocessor products by recompiling. not rewriting. • Easy 10 U.. • • • • Higher productivity ror software developmenl Lower !tOft ware costs Sooner deSign cycles Easier product modirication The starting point for such an installation should be Ihe Motorola-converted version of MPL for the computer close~t to lhe larget system. Using Ihe list in Table I. malch lhe compuler characlenslies first by the internal character set and then h~ word ~Ize. Installation The outpul from MPL is assembly language. therefore an MbSOO Assembler l!'o reqUired The MPL Compiler has been deSigned to be as. machine-independent as possible. However. some program functions must be chan(l:ed to adapt iliO a panicular hosl computer. For computers listed in Table I. mach me dependent modiflcallons already have been Incorporated into the program. For these machines. in~talling MPL consist~ of supplymg the Job control statenlf'nts required tn run a FORTRAN program Installation of MPl on other machme\ ill straightforward. Computer dependenCies have ~en lsolaled and Idrnufled as ~parale program modules. Feature~ which may rec.juire modificalion Inelude: • Input/Output includmg the aSSignment of logl(: de\llces • Inlnnsic Funcllon (Logical AND. OR; Right and Lefl Shlfo • Character Set Tran!'olalion 2-16 ® MOTOROLA MICROSYSTEMS M68SAM Cross Assembler M68SAM is a Cross Assembler used to translate M6800 assembly language source programs into M6800 machine language. M68SAM is compatible with the time-sharing and resident assemblers for the M6800 MPU. Using a host computer for software development reduces the load on the M6800 development systems and provides access to the host computer's other resources including text editors, file systems, and peripherals. The M68SAM Package includes: OPERATION OF THE M6800 CROSS ASSEMBLER r------· I Host Computer I I : I • FORTRAN Source Program • Formatted Source Listings and Installation Instructions • A Copy of the M6800 Programming Reference Manual / I Assembly Language Input • 72 Assembly Language Oper.. ion Codes 7 Address Modes • II Assembler DIrectives (Pseudo·operations) END End of Program EQU Equa.e Symbol FCB Form Conslan. By'e FCC Form Constant Characters FOB Fonn Double ConSlan. By'e NAM Name ORG Origin PAGE Top of Fonn Reserve Memory By'e RMB --, , I Simulator \ , " , I • SPC Space LJO", OPT Opllon OB8 DB 10 OBI6 LIST NOLIST Host Computer Requirements • Software • FORTRAN IV • Any operating system which will suppon FORTRAN programs Display Base Octal Display Base Decimal Display Base Hexadecimal (dcfauh) (dofaull) • Memory • J6 bu mInimum word length (17 bus for lOs complement computers) • Memory size requirements vary due to computer and compiler differences Estimates for common machines are Included in Table I • Penpherals • M68SAM uses three logical units • Source Input • Object Output (EXORCISer-compatible ASCII formall • List Output • in general the prnpherals needed for FORTRAN are sufficient for M68SAM. The M6800 Assembly Language is described 10 the M6800 ProgrammlnR Manual. R~frrtflu Assembler Output • Objec. Module-EXORciser-compa.ible Fonnal (ASCII Charac.e,,) • Assembly LiSling (Display Base Selectable: ·Octal, Decimal. He",decimal) • Symbol Table Source Media M68SAM consists of approximately 2'00 source statements including commenls. The source program IS available in 1"'0 forms: • Cards - 80·Column Punched Cards on 029 Punch Code • Magnellc Tape - Unlabeled 9'lrllck 800 BPI. Odd Pan.). ASCII Character Set. Card-Image Records (80 character/record) 2-17 Installation AhhouJh M68SAM ""as designed Il) be ponahle and machine indepe'ndent, Mlmt rro,:ram functions must be changed 10 adapl Ihls assembler to Ihe hml computer. For computers lis.ed in Table I. machine dependent modifications already have" been IftC'lll'poraled into 1M pn"ram. For thesC' machinc~. Install in, MbMSAM consists of supplyin, the .ioh (,(lnlrol ~tatements required 10 run a FORTRAN program. Inslalla.inn of M68SAM on olher machll:lrs is !Ural~htforward. ("ompuler dependencies have hern isolated and identified as separated prolram modules Features whu:h may l'etlUII'e minor modification Includr: • InpurJOulpUI includin, the aSSignment of logit: devlce~ • World-length Paramc"ltB • IntrinsIC FUIk'iion (Lottieal'AND. OR) • Character Stl Translation Thr slanlng point for such an instalialtlln sh(\Uld Ix the Mo,orola-~onvened versU.lR of M6RSAM klr lhe compuler closeslln the target li)'stem. Using the- list In Tahle I. malch.he ~ompu.ercharKtenSIlC;!ii finl hy Ih~ internal character sri and then h) ""(lrd Silt. TABLE 1- ORDERING INFORMATION '.rt HOST COMPUTER ATTRIBUTES Medi. Comput.r Ch.r.et.r Set Word SIU Negative Number Me",oryU...r' M68SAM0214E M68SAM0214F Cards Magnetic Tape Sigma 9 8 BII EBCDIC 32 B,,, 2'5 Complement 9K Words M68SAM0413£ M6BSAM041 J F Cards Magnetic Tape HP 2100 1 B-BII ASCII 16 Bits 2'5 Complement 15K WOlds M68SAM0713E M68SAM0713F Cards Magnetic Tape IBM 3601370 8-BII EBCDIC 32 8,,, 2's Complement 64K 8y,es M68SAM0814E M68SAM0814F M68SAM0912E M68SAM0912F ' Cards Magnetic Tape Nova 2 8-B,' ASCII 16 Bits 2's Complement 16K Words Cards Magnetic Tape Honeywell 6000 9-B,' ASCII 36 Btts 2's Complement 17K Words M68SAM1014E M68SAM1014F Cards Magnetic Tape CDC 6000 6/12-8il Display Code 60 elU l's Complement 16K Words M68SAM1112E M68SAM 1112F Cards Magnet ic Tape POP-11 3 8-811 ASCII 16 Blu 2's Complement 16K Words Number NOTES: DOS III RDOS PDPIIiOS DOS/BATCH 4. Although il may be possible to 'tegmen, or overtay M68SAM. Motorola proVideS no inform.lion on how to do il. No ."empt 'ihould he made 10 U'it' Ie,,, memol)' than thai listed. Nor doc!!. Mocorola guarantee Ihl!!. soflware to run on an operalins system .for 16-bit m.chine\ olher than Iho\e " ....ed. 2·18 M Microsystems MOTOROLA :M68EAB1 .:Editor/Assembler/ ~Basic Module ~; EDITOR / ASSEMBLER MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM [. M68ADS/ ADW plug-in compatible ~.. E' f'. l;·. ROM resident Immediate access without software loading time Uses only a low-cost non-incremental single audi add to prut!ram 1rom tijpt' • PA1CH • TRA('I, ON • TRACE Or!' • LlNI' Lf· NGTH • DI(;n S .• POKI· SO\HL"c' • • • • l'\l'l'UIl'prowam nHltlnu(' ~~ 2S6.1!1 -.~ - ~-IrJl'I - PI IU"H£~AlS "'j', ~.< ~~./o ', __ •••,rl ~II", L~<~M_J ___ ..__ J'- F-"l [[~ ASf'1I ~ I "1l{JI\IH~ ',f',1 I 'VI I AII[, ''''''A' M"',"" r-.::r- --- -IT MOTOROLA Seul;conclllc'tor Proc/uc'ts 'nc. 2·24 'N,~J __ J M8810S1 Terminal Configuration The external system, as the EXORciser, communicates with the 105 Firmware through ACIA located at BOOB. The characters to be printed are stored in a buffer of 123 characters, which is sent to the printer when full or at least each 300 ms without receiving a new character from the terminal ACIA. The PA7 line of the PIA (B020) is pulled high during Printer Operation. This line should be connected to the CTS line of the main system ACIA (i.e. DEBUG ACIA) in order to inhibit the transmission of new characters. The Keyboard accesses to 105 routines by generating a NON MASKABLE INTERRUPT. Two modes of operation are possible: Local mode (Off-Line) - The ACI A (BOOB) is not taken into account. - The characters received from the Keyboard PIA (B020) are transmitted to the Display Interface Module and to the Printer Buffer. The non-visuable characters are not transmitted. On·Line mode (tull·duplex) - The characters received from the ACIA (BOOB) are transmitted to the Display Interface Module and to the Printer Buffer. The non·visuable characters are .not transmitted. - The characters received from the Keyboard PIA (B020) are transmitted to the ACIA (BOOB). All characters, except CtrlB, CtrlE and CtrlO are transmitted. DCOO to DFFF' ROM address RAM address: scratch pad Printer Buffer AOOO to A07F 0000 to 007F ACIA address Printer PI A address Keyboard PI A address Bell line Hardware Top·ot·Page line pointer PIA address CTS line BOOB B004 B020 (PAO to PA6) CA2 of PIA (B020) B022 PA7 of PIA B020 ·The ROM should be wired with the follOWing caddress pattern, 1101 llXX XXXX XXXX or 1111 .XX XXXX XXXX' ,1 Note . in this configuration, A9 is set to 0 bV hardware when the MPU accesses to FFFB to FFff vectors. POWER SUPPLIES i-1 I 2 SHECTION ~~--;:::===:;---;::=====:;;::::;--t--ll.::::==3:V I I f' - ,111 RESTART SIGNALS I -, El(ORCISER I I I I I I L ____ ..J DISPLAV INTfFHACl ~OOUlE MOTOROLA Semiconductor Products Inc. 2·25 ®-------' ___________chapter3 microcomputer sllbsystems 3-1 ® MICROMODULE M/CROSYSTEMS MOTOROLA CHASSIS/CARD CAGES/POWER SUPPLY MICROMODULE CHASSIS The M6SMMLC Long Chassis and the M6SMMSC Short Chassis offer two means of supporting the prototyping or production of M6S00·based microcomputer systems. Each chassis comprises one M6SMMPSl Power Supply and a M68MMCC10 10-Card Cage or M6SMM05 5·Card Cage in a long or short cabinet, respectively. The chassis mother· boards are pin compatible with all M6S00 EXORciser modules and micromodules. An optional slide kit is available for mounting each chassis in a standard RETMA 19" rack. M5sMMLC requires 19.5" and M6SMMSC requires 12" of cabinet depth to provide adequate clearance for fan intake. FEATURES • Two pre·wired, ready·to·use models: long lO-card chassis, short 5-card chassis • Standard RETMA 19" rack mounting using optional rack mounting kits • Power Supply: 15 A at +5 V, 2.5 A at + 12 V, 1.5 A at -12 V • Motherboard pin compatible with all M6S00 system modules Micromodules and EXORciser • Muffin fan cooling (accepts Howard 3-90-S099 filter) PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS Material - 0.060" cold rolled, low-carbon steel Finish - Zinc plating, QQ·Z·326, Class 3, Type Z, yellow 3-2 MICROMODULE CARD CAGES The M68MMCCl 0 and M68MMCC05 Card Cages offer additional support for the development or production of M6800-based microcomputer systems. Each cage of 10and 5-card capacity, respectively, includes a motherboard with board connectors, card guides and accommodations for connecting power to the cage. Mounting holes are provided in all four sides and the bottom for mounting a cage in five of the six possible orientations. Provision is also made for mounting the M68MMPSl Power Supply on either end of the cage. FEATURES • Two models: 5 and 10 card • Five orientation mountings • Provides micromodule bus interconnection PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS Material - 0.093" aluminum alloy Finish - Class 1 double iridescent film, MI L-C-554 1 Weight - 3.25 Ibs (CC05) 5.51bs (CC10) 3-3 MICROMODULE POWER SUPPLY More than ample power at the voltages required by a microcomputer system built around the M6800 family modules: +5 Vdc, ± 12 Vdc-is provided by the M68MMPS1 power supply. Its design provides internal protection against shorts and overload and its outputs recover automatically to normal voltage when an overload is removed. The +5 Vdc output is overvoltage protected dropping to 5 volts or less within 50 microseconds after rising to 7 volts. A remote sensing capability which can compensate for as much as 0.5 Vdc drop in connecting leads is also provided on the +5 Vdc output. FEATURES • +5 Vdc at 15 A, +12 Vdc at 2.5 A, -12Ndc at 1.5 A • +8 Vac at 0.1 A • Short circuit protected • Overload protected • • Overvoltage protection (5 Vdc output) Remote sensing (5 Vdc output) PHYSICAL AND ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Inpu. Vol,Inpu. Fr,""uonc~ 95'0 125 v .., 2011 bV 250 bV jumper 47 '0420 HI, lin •• ph_ Opera'in, TMftperltur. A.... oGe to saGe. d.'ltl current lin.. rly to 70% of rltld from 60G e to 10°C Volt... 1IOIItion Input to c . . . 500 Vdc Output to cae, 200 Vdc Pow., Fail Altine DC vo1tae- mlintllined tor 8 ml minimum It.low lin. (96 or 205 Vac .nd rl'''' lood I; III OU'PUII Length, 9.5" Dimension_ Width,6.25" Heigh', 5.0" Weigh •. 11.25 Ibl OUTPUTS Rlted Curr.nt 15A • 12Vdc -12Vdc BV.. 2.5 A 1.5 A 0.1 A loed A.... I.tion 0.1% 0.1% 0.1% lin. Regulation 0.1% 0.05% RMS Ripple 2 mV 0.05% 1 mV 10mV 5mV 5mV 0.05 0.05 0.05 +5 Vdc p·.o-' Rippl. Temperatur. Coofficiln. ,%t"CI 1 mV 3-4 PRODUCT ORDERING INFORMATION Part numbers of the chassis/card cage/power supply/mounting kit options are identified in the following table. PART NO. DESCRIPTION M68MMLCl Micromodule Chassis with 115 Vac power supply M68MMLC2 Micromodule Chassis with 10·card cage, 230 Vac power supply M68MMSCl Micromodule Chassis with 5·card cage, 115 Vac power supply M68MMSC2 Micromodule Chassis with 230 Vac power supply M68MMPS1·l Micromodule Power Supply, 95 to 125 Vac, 47 to 420 Hz, single phase M68MMPS1·2 Micromodule Power Supply, 205 to 250 Vac, 47 to 420 Hz, single phase M68MMCC05 Card Cage, 5 card M68MMCC10 Card Cage, 10 card M68MMLK Rack Mounting Kit, Long Chassis M68MMSK Rack Mounting Kit, Short Chassis 3-5 lO~ard 5~ard cage, cage, ® M68MMOl M/CROSYSTEMS MOTOROLA MONOBOARD MICROCOMPUTER 1 MICROMODULE 1 The M68MMOl Monoboard Microcomputer 1 - Micromodule 1 - is a comple'te computer-on-a-board that can provide the solution for most processing and control applications_ Micromodule 1 contains all of the processing and control power of the M6800 Microprocessing Unit (MPU) plus: 1 K of static RAM to provide temporary program (scratch) storage; three Peripheral Interface Adapters (PIAs) to provide programmable input/output parallel data lines for transferring data between Micromodule 1 and the external system; and four sockets for installing up to 4096 bytes of AROM or ROM memory used to store firmware programs_ Micromodule 1 also incorporates the necessary two-phase clock generator, the power-on reset circuitry for initialization, address bus decoding for establishing the memory location for each addressable part, the refresh circuit required for use with optional external dynamic memories, and the bus interface and controls needed to satisfy the basic requirements of a microcomputer system_ FEATURES • Complete microcomputer on a board • MC6800 Microprocessing Unit (MPU) • 1 MHz crystal controlled clock • On-board reset circuitry • 1 K static RAM • Sockets for four 1 K AROM or ROM firmware program memories Three MC6820 Peripheral Interface Adapters (PIAs) • Dynamic memory refresh circu itry 36K bytes of unused memory addresses available EXORciser and Micromodule Family bus compatible 3-6 MEMORY MAP FFFF CFFF COOO ROM NO.2 ROM NO.1 FFFF FOOO EFFF EOOO DFFF 0000 CCOO C800 C400 COOO AMBIGUOUS ROM ADDRESSES (A12 AND A 13 ARE DON'T CARE) PREFERABLE ROM ADDRESSES BFFF AVAILABLE FOR EXTERNAL MEMORY (24K) 6000 5800 NOT AVAILABLE (A 11 NOT INCLUDED IN MEM·NOT·SELD) MODULE PIA (3) ADDRESSES NOT AVAILABLE (A 11 NOT INCLUDED IN MEM·NOT·SELD) 57FF 4FFF 2000 lFFF AMBIGUOUS RAM ADDRESSES (A'10, All, A12 ARE DON'T CARE) 0400 0000 MODULE RAM ADDRESSES \ RAM 3-7 GENERAL DESCRIPTION The two-phase clock generator consists of an MC6871 crystal controlled clock, operating at a frequency of 1 MHz, that provides a two-phase NMOS clock to the MPU, a single TTL-compatible ¢2 clock used for synchronizing data transfers, and a single ungated memory clock and memory ready control for refreshing external dynamic memories. The ¢2 TTL clock and the memory clock and memory ready control are available for external use via the control bus. The power·on reset circuitry provides reset control for the MPU and is also available for external use via the control bus. The 16-bit MPU address bus is decoded on the board and provides addressable controls for RAM (0000'6 to 03FF,6)' the three PIAs (5800,6 to 580B,6). and ROM (COOO'6 to CFFF,6)' Since the addresses are not fully decoded, certain addresses become ambiguous and, therefore, are not available. The address map clearly shows all of the addresses used by Micromodule 1 as well as those addresses that are or are not available due to this ambiguity. As indicated in the memory map, if additional Micromodules are to be used with Micromodule 1, the additional module addresses must be selected to reside within the available memory locations (2000'6 to 4FFF'6 and 6000'6 to BFFF,6)' Sixty input/output lines are provided by the three PIAs: 24 programmable input/output parallel data lines, 12 buffered parallel data output lines with optional terminations (three 4.7 K ohmpull·up resistor networks or three 330/220 ohm pull-up/pull· down resistor networks). 12 buffered parallel data lines with optional TTL·compatible input or output configurations (also including the optional terminations). 6 programmable interrupt input control lines, 3 programmable peripheral control outputs, and 3 programmable interrupt inputs or control outputs. These input/output data and control lines permit data to be transferred in parallel between the microcomputer and the external system. Micromodule 1 also incorporates features to permit easy modification of the module to o'perate with external memories in place of the on-board AROM or ROM devices or to change the B section peripheral data lines on the three PIAs from an output configuration to an input configuration. Micromodule 1 is not only compatible with the Micromodule Family but also with the M6800 EXORciser, a versatile tool providing a system for developing and debugging hardware/software systems and troubleshooting production hardware. Advantage can also be taken of the EXORciser's AROM/ROM programming capability and optional memory and I/O modules. It is not recommended that Micromodule 1 be used in the EXORciser in place of the CPU module to develop software and firmware programs, since the 1 K of static RAM located on Micromodule 1 may be incompatible with the external RAM devices and therefore may cause malfunctions to occur due to the ambiguous operation of the RAM at address locations 000016 to 03FF16. Micromodule 8, consisting of a monitor/debug ROM and an ACIA module, is available to aid in debugging hardware and software. 3-8 SPECIFICATIONS Power Requirements Without AROMs/ROMs or other optional circuits installed With AROMs/ROMs and other optional circuits installed Memory Size RAM AROM/ROM I nterface Signals PAO to PA7, CAl and CA2 PBO to PB7, CBl and CB2 Micromodule 8us Signals Address Bus Data 8us Input Output Control Bus RIW, VMA (VUA) Others Operating Temperature Physical Characteristics Width X Height Board Thickness Connectors (Optional) 86·Pin Connector 50·Pin Connector (2) 20·Pin Connector +5 Vdc ± 5% @ 1.1 A (max) +12 Vdc ± 5%@0.0 mA ·12 Vdc ± 5%@0.5 mA (max) +5 Vdc ± 5% @ 1.1 A (max) +12 Vdc ± 5% @260 mA (max) ·12 Vdc ± 5%@ 180 mA (max) 1024 8·bit bytes of Random Access Memory Sockets for mounting up to four MCM68708 AROMs or MCM68308 ROMs TTL·compatible TTL-compatible with user selected interface terminations Three-state TTL-compatible buffered output TTL-compatible buffered input Three-state TTL-compatible buffered output Three-state TTL-compatible buffered output TTL·compatible 0 0 to 700 C 9.75 in. X 6.000 in. 0.062 in. Stanford Applied Engineering SAE-43D/1-2 or equivalent 3M Connector 3415-0001 or equivalent 3M Connector 3461·0001 or equivalent Specifications are subject to change without notice. PRODUCT ORDERING INFORMATION Use the part numbers listed below when ordering the Monoboard Microcomputer 1 Module or one of its optional configurations. PART NO. DESCRIPTION M68MMOl M68MM01-l Basic Monoboard Microcomputer 1 Module Basic Monoboard Microcomputer 1 Module with 4 connectors and three 4.7 K ohm pull-up terminating resistor networks Basic Monoboard Microcomputer 1 Module with 4 connectors and three 330/220 pull-up/ pull-down terminating resistor networks M68MM01·2 3-9 ® MICROSYSTEMS MOTOROLA M68MMOlA MONOBOARD MICROCOMPUTER lA MICROMODULE 1A The M68MMOl A Monoboard Microcomputer 1A - Micromodule 1 A - is a complete computer-on-a-board that provides all of the processing and control power required for a microcomputer-based system, including one RS-232C serial input/output interface and two parallel input/output interfaces. Micromodule lA incorporates an MC6800 MPU (Microprocessing Unit), 1 K byte of static RAM for temporary program (scratch) storage, sockets for installing up to four 1 K AROM or ROM (or 2K ROM) devices used to store firmware programs: one MC6850 ACIA with RS-232C interface for exchanging serial asynchronous data, and two MC6820 PIAs for exchanging parallel data. FEATURES • • Complete microcomputer on a board MC6800 Microprocessing Unit (MPU) One MC6850 Asynchronous Communications Interface Adapter (ACIA) with RS-232C interface • Two MC6820 Peripheral Interface Adapters (PIAs) 1 M Hz crystal controlled clock • 1 K byte static Random Access Memory (RAM) • Sockets for four 1 K AROM or ROM (or 2K ROM) firmware program memories • On-board reset circuitry Dynamic memory refresh circuitry 59K or 55K bytes of unused addresses available (depending on the type of ROM selected) • EXORciser and Micromodule Family bus compatible 3-10 MEMORY MAP WITH DEBUG MODULE WITHOUT DEBUG MODULE Note: 1K AROM or ROM option at COOO-C F F F ambiguous with 1 K AROM or ROMs at FOOO-FFFF, FFFF I ROM 4 12K) I I lOR FOOO ROM 3 12K) I I FFFF I AROM/ROM 4 11K) I AROM/ROM 3 11K) I AROM/ROM 2 11K) i AROM/ROM 1 11K) USABLE FOR DEBUG MODULE OR OR EXTERNAL MEMORY FOOO EFFF EFFF AVAILABLE FOR EXTERNAL MEMORY EOOO DFFF AVAILABLE ROM 4 12K) FOR EXTERNAL OR ROM 3 12K) MEMORY DOOO DOOO AROM/ROM 4 11K) CFFF CFFF ROM 212K) AROMiROM 3 11K) OR ROM 1 12K) COOO EDOO DFFF AROM/ROM 211K) AROM/ROM 1 11K) COOO AVAILABLE FOR EXTERNAL 8800 87FF PIA PIA NO.1 NO.2 8BOO / / / / / 17// / / / / / 87FF ACIA ACIA PIA NO. 2 8400·8403' 8404 8407' 8408' *These addresses are MEMORY 1i0 PIA NO 1 R400 1////////////// ) 8400 redundant at 85X X, 86XX, and 87XX AVAILABLE FOR EXTERNAL MEMORY 0400 0400 MICROMOlllJLf IA RANI 0000 _____ .______ . ______ _ 3-11 I DOOO .__l.. ___ GENERAL DESCRIPTION Micromodule 1 A incorporales a two-phase clock generator consisting of a single MC6S71 crystal controlled clock, operating at a frequency of 1 MHz, that provides a phase NMOS clock to the MPU, a single TTL-compatible ¢2 clock used for synchronizing data transfers, and a single ungated memory clock and memory ready control for refreshing external memories. The power-on reset circuitry provides reset control for the MPU and is also available for external use via the control bus. On-board buffers and controls for address, data, and control bus signals allow Micromodule 1A to be interfaced with other members of the Micromodule Family or with the EXORciser_ The 59K or 55K of addresses not allocated for on-board use (the allocation amount depends upon whether 1 K AROM/ROM devices or 2K ROM devices are used for program storage) are available for system expansion. These addresses may be used for RAM and/or ROM, input/output expansion, or addressable peripherals_ Since Micromodule 1 A only partially decodes the 16-bit MPU address bus to recognize on-board RAM, ROM, PIA, and ACIA addresses, certain blocks of addresses become ambiguous. Other address areas also become unavailable when Micromodule 1 A is used in conjunction with the EXORciser's Debug Module. To illustrate the total addressability of Micromodule 1A, a memory map of this module has been included in this data sheet. The ACIA and its associated RS-232C interface circuit provides an asynchronous serial data port for comll1unicating with RS-232C compatible peripherals. Provision is made for on-board selection of one of four baud rates: 9600; 1200,300, and 110. Micromodule SA, a monitor/debug ROM, is available to aid the user in debugging his hardware and software. The 40 input/output/control lines provided by the two PIAs for parallel interfacing are grouped by function as follows: 32 data lines that may be programmed for use as either inputs or outputs 4 interrupt inputs with programmable active transitions 4 lines selectable as either .interrupt inputs or peripheral control outputs two- OI'T.... 8U~ (hNTAOl BuS 3-12 AOOR(5\ Bu,,> SPECIFICATIONS Power Requirements +5 Vdc @ 1.1 A (max) + 12 Vdc @20mA (max) -12 Vdc @ 25 mA (max) +5 Vdc @ 1.3 A (max) + 12 Vdc @ 260 mA (max) -12 Vdc@ 180mA (max) With four AROMs Micromodule Bus Address Bus Control Bus R/W, VMA Other Control Signals Data Bus Input Output I/O (PIA signals) PAO·PA7, CAl and CA2 PBO·PB7, CB 1 and CB2 Three·state TTL·compatible buffered output Three·state TTL·compatible buffered output TTL·compatible TTL·compatible buffered input Three·state TTL·compatible buffered output TTL·compatible TTL'compatible with pull·up interface termination RS·232C Compatible 0° to 70° C I/O (ACIA signals) Operating Temperature Physical Characteristics Width Height Board Thickness Connectors 86·Pin Connector 9.75 in. 6.000 in'0.062 in. Stanford Applied Engineering SAC·43D/l·2 or equivalent 3M type 3415·0001 or equivalent 3M type 3461·0001 or equivalent 50·Pin Connector 20·Pin Connector Specifications are subject to change without notice. PRODUCT ORDERING INFORMATION The following table identifies the options of the Monoboard Microcomputer 1A. For further information, contact your (oca( sales office. PART NO. DESCRIPTION M68MM01A Basic Monoboard Microcomputer 1 A M68MM01Al Basic Monoboard Microcomputer 1A with four connectors 3-13 ® M68MMOIB MICROMODULE MICROSYSTEMS MOTOROLA MONOBOARD MICROCOMPUTER MICROMODULE 18 The M68MM01 B Monoboard Microcomputer-Micromodule 1 B - is a complete computeron-a-board_ The module incorporates the MC6802 MPU with a crystal clock, one MC6821 PIA providing two parallel I/O ports, one MC6840 triple 16-bit Programmable Timer/Clock, sockets for mounting two 2K E ROM devices, and address decoding logic_ FEATURES • Power-on restart • Single +5V power supply • 20 programmable I/O lines (MC6821 PIA) • Three 16-bit programmable counter/timers (MC6840 PTM) • Full compatibility with MC68QO software • 128 bytes read/write static RAM • Sockets for 4K bytes E ROM/ROM program 3-14 MEMORY MAP FFFF FFFF Ambiguous 2K EROM/ROM F800 F7FF Ambiguous 2K EROM/ROM FOOO PTM E417 EFFF E418 '" (Ambiguous User's Program) V I ~_ _ _ _ _-rE::4:..:1.:::0----t-- (pTM Control, TImer, and Status RegIsters) I I PIA E403 ___-+______ --II--'=E.,;.400;;;·:-.._ _--t-E3FF I I I I DOOO 2K EROM/ROM CFFF U14 C800 C7FF 2K EROM/ROM U13 BFFF 0080 0000 (PIA Control and Data Registers) 128 RAM COOO '" V I I I I I I I I I I I I I I (User's Program) I I I OOlF 0000 1-- (MC6802 RAM) 3·15 GENERAL DESCRIPTION An MC1455 timing davice, operated II a monomble multivibrator (one-shot) functions a restart circuit that generates a low-level RESET signal after power il initially applied to Micromodule 1 B. A valid RESET signal (one whose duration is> 8 MPU clock periods) causes the MPU to execute an initialization routina clearing a" registars in the PIAs to logic zero (low) so thet the PIAs may be configured. The RESET signal allo presets the PTM latches and counters to their maximal count values, dillbles the counter clocks, clears the status register interrupt flagl, and sets the control register internal reset bit which holds all timers in their preset state. Alternatively, an external RESET command may be applied to Micromodule 1 B via connector P1. II A buffered 4 MHz crystal oscillator circuit provides the clock input to the MC6802 MPU. A divide-by-four circuit in the MPU generates the required two-phase MPU dock and the 1 MHz phase-two external clock for the rest of the system. The Micromodule 1 B data bus is used to transfer data between the MPU and various on-board devices (EROM/ROM, PIA, and PTM). Data transfers to the on-chip MPU RAM are handled within the chip. The Micromodule 1 B address bus is used to select the memory locations within the Micromodule board. A partially decoded addressing scheme is used to uniquely address each on-board EROM/ROM, PIA, and PTM. The addressing of the on-chip RAM is handled within the chip. The EROM/ROM, PIA, and PTM devices are selected by means of an address decoder circuit. The circuit consists of a pre-patterned PROM and PC board interconnections. The PROM decodes address bits A 10 through A 15 with one output used to select the PIA and PTM, one output to select EROM1, and one output to select EROM2. 3-16 SPECIFICATIONS +5 Vdc@350 rnA Power Requirements +5 Vdc@ 450 rnA with EROMs 1 MHz !:D.1% System Clock Word Size 8, 16, or 24 bits Instruction 8 bits Data Memory Addressing 0000-007F RAM Cooo-CFFF or FOOO-FFFt E ROMs (sockets) E400-E7FF liD-Timers Parallel 110 16 Bidirectional programmable lines 4 Bidirectional programmable lines or interrupts Interrupts Vectored through software 1 MHz internal or asynchronous external Timers Input Frequency gateltrigger inputs Timers Operating Modes Continuous (square wave) Single shot Frequency comparison PulselWidth comparison Physical Characteristics 9.75 in. Width 6.00 in. Height 0.062 in. 80ard Thickness Connectors Microsystem Bus (P1) 86-Pin Stanford Applied Engineering SAC-43D/1-2 or equivalent Parallel 110 Port (P4) 3M type 3415-0001 or equivalent 50-Pin Programmable Timers (P2) 40-Pin 3M type 3464-0001 or equivalent PRODUCT ORDERING INFORMATION PART NO. DESCRIPTION M68MM01B Basic Monoboard Microcomputer 1B M68MM01B(D) Monoboard Microcomputer 1B User's Guide 3·17 ® MOTOROLA MICROSYSTEMS M68MM01Bl MICROMODULE MONOBOARD MICROCOMPUTER lBl MICROMODULE 1B1 The M68MMOI BI Monoboard Microcomputer - Micromodule IB I - is a complete computer-on-a-board. The module incorporates the MC6802 with crystal clock, one MC6821 Peripheral Interface Adapter providing two parallel I/O ports, an MC6850 ACIA with RS-232C interface port, one MC6840 Triple 16-bit Programmable Timer Clock, sockets for mounting two 2K EROM devices, 384 bytes of RAM, and the bus buffers to interface with the Micromodule bus. FEATURES • Complete Microcomputer on a Single Board • MC6802 Microprocessing Unit with 128 bytes on Chip Static RAM • On Board Crystal Controlled Clock • Sockets for up to 4K of Erasable/Programmable ROM • 256 bytes of Read/Write Static RAM • • • Power-on Reiet 20 Programmable I/O Lines (MC6821 PIA) Three 16-bit Binary Programmable Timers (MC6840 PTM) • Serial I/O Interface with RS-232C Drivers/Receivers and Software Programmable Baud Rate (110,300, 1200, or 2400) • • • • Audio Tape Cassette Interface Circuitry Dynamic RAM Refresh Logic Buffered Address, Control, and Data Bus Full Compatibility with MC6800 Software, with Micromodule Family of Parts, and with Motorola EXORciser 3-18 MEMORY MAP OR EXORciser DEBUG MODULE FFFF FOOO EFFF ~~~~~~~~~~~ ~ 5QQQ 0000 ~ ~ I!.QQQ 8.QQ!I QQQQ 2K ROM (6B46) EXTERNAL MEMORY OR 2 K ROMI EROM 2 K ROMI EROM AVAILABLE FOR EXTERNAL MEMORY 9!QQ ~ BOOQ &!QQ AVAILABLE FOR EXTERNAL ~ ~ l!.UIQ llilQ ~ 9000 !!QQQ !!ru!Q 1QQQ 6Q2g ~ ~ 7000 AVAILABLE FOR EXTERNAL MEMORY 2QQQ §QQQ ~ ~ 3000 2000 1000 3-19 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Monoboard Microcomputer I B I provides the user with a stand-alone microcomputer that has all the processing and control power of an MC6802 MPU with its self-contained clock circuit and 128 bytes of static RAM. The module contains sockets for up to 4K of EROM or ROM for programming, a Peripheral Interface Adapter (PIA) for parallel data transfers, and a Programmable Timer Module (PTM) which provides for such tasks as frequency measurements, event counting, interval measuring, square wave generation, gated 'delay signals, single pulses of controlled duration, pulse width modulation, and timed system interrupts. The module incorporates the necessary crystal clock circuits, the reset timer for power-on initialization, and address bus decoding for establishing the address of each part. In addition to these features, the module has an additional 256 bytes of static RAM, provisions for off-board dynamic memory refresh, as Asynchronous Communications Interface Adapter (ACIA) with RS-232C interface circuits, and an Audio Tape Cassette interface circuit. The Micromodule I B I address bus is used to select each of the memory locations within a Micromodule system. Micromodule I B I uses a partially decoded addressing scheme to uniquely address each on-board EROM/ROM, RAM, PIA. AClA, and PTM. The address bus interface consists of three-state buffers. The Micromod'ule I B I data bus is used to perform data transfers between the MPU and various devices (EROM, ROM, RAM, PIA, and ACIA). For greater memory and I/O capacity, additional devices can be added external to the Monoboard. Monoboard Microcomputer I B I is also bus compatible with the M6800 EXORciser. This versatility provides the user with the means to develop and debug both his hardware and software, and to troubleshoot production hardware. Thus, the user can take advantage of the EXORciser's optional debug, memory. and I/O modules. 3-20 SPECIFICATIONS Power Requirements with EROM's System Clock Word Size Instruction Address Data Memory Addressing RAM (128 bytes) RAM (~56 bytes) EROM's (sockets) PIA-ACIA-PTM Parallel I/O 16 bidirectional programmable lines 4 I/O control lines and/or interrupts Interrupts Timer Input Frequency Timer Operating Modes Physical Characteristics Width Height Board Thickness Connectors Microsystem bus (PI) 86 pin Programmable Timers (P2) 40 pin Serial I/O port (P3) ~O pin Parallel I/O Port (P4) 50 pin +5 Vdc (al 550 rnA + 12 Vdc (al 20 rnA -12 Vdc @ ~5 rnA +5 Vdc (u' 650 rnA + I ~ Vdc (IV 260 rnA - 12 Vdc (a! 180 rnA IMHz±.I% 8, 16, or 24 bits 16 bits 8 bits 0000-007F EOOO-E3FF COOO to CFFF or FOOO to FFFF or AMBIG COOO/FOOO E400 to E7FF Vectored through software I MHz, internal or asynchronous external gate/trigger inputs Continuous (square wave) Single shot Frequency comparison Pulse/width comparison 9.75 in. 6.00 in. 0.062 in. Stanford Applied Engineering SAC-43D/I-c or equivalent 3M Type 3464-0001 or equivalent 3M Type 3461-000 I or equivalent 3M Type 3415-000 I or equivalent PRODUCT ORDERING INFORMATION Use the following part numbers when ordering the Monoboard Microcomputer- Micromodule I B I and its associated technical manual. For further information, contact your local sales office. 101681011010181 Monoboard Microcomputer 181 M68MIoI018(D) Monoboard Microcomputer 18 Manual 3-21 MICROSYSTEMS ® M68MM02 MOTOROLA CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT (CPU) MICROMODULE 2 The M68MM02 CPU (Central Processing Unit) Module - Micromodule 2 - is the prime building block of a totally modular microcomputer system. Micromodule 2 combines all of the processing and control power of an MC6800 Microprocessor with the necessary two-phase clock generator, the reset circuitry for power turn-on initialization, and the bus interface and control circuitry needed to satisfy the basic requirements of a microcomputer system. In addition, Micromodule 2 contains the timing, priority, and refresh controls for three-litate and halt (DMA) operations and memory refresh. FEATURES • MC6800 Microprocessing Unit (MPU) • On -board reset circuitry 1 M Hz crystal controlled clock Timing and control for three-state and halt (DMA) operations and memory refresh • User selectable top of memory address EXORciser and Micromodule Family bus compatible 3-22 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Micromodule 2 contains a two-phase clock generator consisting of an Me6S71 crystal controJ!ed dock, operating at a frequency of 1 MHz, that provides a two-phase NMOS clock to the MPU, a single TTL-compatible ¢2 clock used for synchronizing data transfers, and a single ungated memory clock and memory ready control for use with low speed memories. The ¢1 NMOS clock, ¢2 TTL clock, and the memory clock and ready control are available for external use by the system via the control bus. The on-board reset circuitry provides power-on reset control for the MPU and is also available for external use. Timing and control circuitry synchronizes three-state control and halt with the ¢1 clock and synchronizes refresh operations with the memory clock. The timing and control circuitry also provides three·state control for address, data, and control buses. The CPU Module provides the capability of selecting the top of memory address location. This selection is accomplished in 4K·byte increments by installing on- or off-board jumpers that modify address select bits A 12 through A 15 (the bits used to address the top of mefl)ory locationsl- An address select socket with component platform provides an easy-to-use method of installing on-board jumper connections if desired. Otherwise, wirewrap pins located on the Micromodule motherboard may be used to install these connections off-board. As delivered, no jumper connections are installed; thus, the top of memory address is F F F F. Regardless of whether or not the jumper connections have been installed to select the top of memory address location, the CPU Module and other modules within the microcomputer system may be installed in an EXORciser, permitting the system to be debugged using the EXbug Firmware on the EXORciser bebug Module. (The EXbug Firmware requires the use of memory locations FOOD through FFFF.1 When used in this manner, on-board decoding logic associated with the top of memory addressing circuitry automatically controls the top of memory address selection. When Micromodule 2 is not being used with the Debug Module, this same on-board decoding logic is used to modify the MC6S00 MPU's vectoring addresses located at F F FS through F F F F to the top of memory address location that has been selected (XFFS through XFFFlMicromodule 2 is not only compatible with the Micromodule Family, but also with the M6S00 EXORciser. This versatile design tool provides a system to develop and debug the hardware/software system and to troubleshoot production hardware. Advantage can also be taken of the EXORciser's AROM/PROM programming capability and optional memory and I/O modules. 3-23 SPECIFICATIONS Power Requirements Micromodule Bus Signals Address Bus Data Bus Input Output Control Bus RIW, VMA, VUA BA, REF GRANT, and TSC GRANT IRO, NMI, RESET, HALT REF REO, and TSC <1>1 and <1>2 Clocks +5 Vdc ± 5% @ 1A Three-state TTL-compatible buffered output TTL-compatible buffered input Three-state TTL-compatible buffered output Three-state TTL-compatible buffered output TTL-compatible buffered output TTL-compatible buffered inputs with 4.7K ohm pull-up resistors TTL-compatible buffered output with 10 ohms series impedance 0° to 70° C Operating Temperature Physical Characteristics Width X Height Board Thickness Connector 9_75 in_ X 6.000 in. 0.062 in. Stanford Applied Engineering SAE-43DI1·2 Specifications are subject to change without notice. PRODUCT ORDERING INFORMATION Use the following part number when ordering the CPU Module - Micromodule 2. PART NO. DESCRIPTION M68MM02 CPU MODULE 0 " IIOAIIO "OOR(SS 3-24 MICROSYSTEMS ® M68MM03 MOTOROLA 32/32 INPUT IOUTPUT MODULE MICROMODULE 3 The M68MM03 32/32 Input/Output Module - Micromodule 3 - provides 32 TTL-compatible parallel inputs and 32 TTL-compatible latched and buffered parallel outputs, These 32 inputs and 32 outputs provide the means of transferring four contiguous 8-bit bytes of parallel data between the microcomputer and the external system, Thus, by using the M6800 MPU's (Microprocessing Unit's) index register, all 32 input bits can be read and stored in 20 machine cycles, while only 18 machine cycles are required to load and latch the 32 output bits_ Micromodule 3 may be ordered with the TTL-compatible inputs and latched TTL-compatible buffered outputs having no terminating resistors, with 4,7 K ohm pull-up terminating resistors, or with 330/220 ohm pull-up/pull-down terminating resistors, FEATURES 32 bits of parallel input in four contiguous 8-bit bytes 32 bits of latched and buffered parallel output in four contiguous 8-bit bytes • User selectable input/output terminations User selectable base memory address EXORciser and Micromodule Family bus compatible 3·25 GENERAL DESCRIPTION The base memory address can be selected in 4 byte increments from 8EDD to 8FFC and 9EOD to 9FFC by installing on- or off-board jumper connections that modify address select bits A2 through A8 and A 12. This permits a maximum of 256 Micromodule 3's to be used in a Micromodule·based system (providing a maximum of 8192 input and 8192 output bits). An address select socket with component platform provides an easy·to·use method of installing the jumper connections on·board if desired. Otherwise, wirewrap pins located on the Micromodule motherboard may be used to install these connections off·board. As delivered, no jumpers are installed, automatically assigning the module address at 9F FC. Micromodule 3 is not only bus compatible with the Micromodule Family, but also with the M6800 EXORciser. This versatile design tool provides a system to develop and debug hardware/software systems and to troubleshoot production hardware. Advantage can also be taken of the EXORciser's AROM/PROM programming capability and optional memory modules. INPUT 0""'" UUlT'Plf:XIEIll on eo.. AO A[)OQUS 3-26 SPECIFICATIONS +5 Vdc ± 5% Power Requirements Interface Signals Input Signals @ BOO mA (nominal) TTL-compatible with optional terminations available (4_7 K ohm pull-up or 330/220 ohm pu II-u p/ pu II-d own) Latched TTL-compatible open collector with optional terminations available (4.7 K ohm pull-up or 330/220 ohm pull-up/pull-down) Addressable in 4 byte increments from BEOO'6 to BFFC16 and 9EOO'6 to 9FFC'6' Delivered modules are preaddressed to 9F FC'6' Output Signals Base Address Selection Micromodule Bus Signals Address Bus Data Bus Input Output Control Bus Operating Temperature Physical Characteristics Width X Height Board Thickness Connector B6·Pin Bus Connector TTL-compatible buffered input TTL-compatible buffered input Three-state TTL-compatible buffered output TTL-compatible buffered input 0° to 70° C 9.75 in. X 6.000 in. 0.062 in. Stanford Applied Engineering SAE-43DI1-2 or equivalent Viking 3VH25/1JN5. 31\1 3415-0001. or equivalent 50-Pin Input/Output Connectors Specifications are subject to change without notice. PRODUCT ORDERING INFORMATION Use the part number listed below when ordering the 32/32 I/O Module or one of its optional configurations. PART NO. DESCRIPTION M6BMM03 Basic 32/32 Input/Output Module with no terminations Basic 32/32 Input/Output Module with 4.7 K ohm pull-up termination resistors Basic 32/32 Input/Output Module with 330/220 ohm pull·up/pulldown termination resistors M6BMM03-1 M6BMM03-2 3-27 ® MICROSYSTEMS MOTOROLA M68MM04 8K/16K AROM/ROM MODULE MICROMODULE 4 The M68MM04 8K/16K AROM/ROM Module - Micromodule 4 - incorporates provisions for installing up to 8K or 16K bytes of AROM or ROM memory used to store firmware programs for a Micromodule-based system. Depending upon the option selected, Micromodule 4 provides either eight or sixteen sockets for mounting MCM68708 AROM devices or MCM68308 ROM devices. FEATURES • Sockets for up to sixteen 1 K X 8 bit AROM or ROM devices User selectable base memory address for each 8K memory block EXORciser and Micromodule Family bus compatible 3-28 GENERAL DESCRIPTION The AROM/ROM memory section of this module is organized into two memory blocks, each containing eight sockets. (The 8K version of Micromodule 4 has only one memory block.) The only preparation required to use this module is to install your programmed AROM and/or ROM devices into the appropriate sockets and select the base memory address for each memory block. The base memory address for each memory block can be selected over the range of 0000'6 to EOOO'6 in BK byte increments by installing an on· or off·board jumper connection that modifies address select bits A 13 through A 15. An address select socket with component platform provides an easy·to·use method of installing on·board jumper connections if desired. Otherwise, wirewrap pins located on the·· Micromodule motherboard may be used to install these connections off·board. As delivered, the base memory addresses for the memory blocks are assigned AOOO'6 and COOO'6 (only address AOOO'6 is assigned on the 8K version of this module). When reassigning the base memory address on the 16K version, avoid overlapping the addresses of each memory block. Micromodule 4 is not only bus compatible with the Micromodule Family, but also with the M6800 EXORciser. This versatile design tool provides a system to develop and debug a hardware/software system and to troubleshoot production hardware. Advantage can also be taken of the EXORciser's AROM/PROM programming capability and optional memory and I/O modules. 01'01 Bt)AAfI "OOAfS"; (II' 804A("I AOOAIS ... 3·29 SPECIFICATIONS Power Requirements With 8 AROMs Installed +5 Vdc ± 5% @ 430 mA +12 Vdc ± 5%@ 520 mA (max) ·12 Vdc ± 5%@360 mA (max) +5 Vdc ± 5% @ 520 mA +12 Vdc ± 5% @ 1040 mA (max) ·12 Vdc ± 5% @720 mA (max) With 16 AROMs Installed Memory Size 8K Option Sockets for mounting up to eight MCM68708 AROMs or MCM68308 ROMs Sockets for mounting up to sixteen MCM68708 AROMs or MCM68308 ROMs 16K bytes memory capability consisting of two 8K byte memory blocks. (The 8K option has only one memory block.) Each memory block is jumper addressable in 8K byte increments from 0000, • to EOOo, •. Delivered modules are preaddressed to AOOO'6 (8K and 16K options) and COOD, • (16K option only). 16K Option Memory Organization Base Address Selection Micromodule Bus Address Bus Data Bus (Outputs Only) Control Bus Operating Temperature Physical Characteristics Width X Height Board Thickness Connector 86·Pin Bus Connector TTL·compatible buffered input Three·state TTL·compatible buffered output TTL·compatible buffered input 0 0 to 700 C 9.75 in. X 6.000 in. 0.062 in. Stanford Applied Engineering SAE-43DI1·2 or equivalent Specifications are subject to change without notice. PRODUCT ORDERING INFORMATION Use the part numbers listed below when ordering either configuration of the 8K/16K AROM/ROM Module. PART NO. DESCRIPTION M68MM04 8KI16K AROM/ROM Module with sockets for 8K bytes of memory 8KI16K AROM/ROM Module with sockets for 16K bytes of memory M68MM041 3-30 ® MOTOROLA M/CROSYSTEMS M68MMOSA, B, C MICROMODULE ANALOG I/O MICROMODULE 6A, B, C Micromodules M68MM05A, B, and C provide the user with the capability of Analog Data Acquisition (MM05A and B) and Analog Output (MM05CI. The M68MM05A and M68MM05B provide 8 and 16 channels, respectively, of input analog-to-digital conversion while the M68MM05C provides 4 channels of output digital-to-analog conversions. FEATURES • Complete data acquisition system on a board (Micromodules 5A and 5B) • Complete analog output system on a board (Micromodule 5C) • 8 channel differential analog inputs (Micromodule 5A) • 16 channel single-ended analog inputs (Micromodule 58) • 4 channel differential",malog outputs (Micromodule 5C) • High accuracy 12-bit resolution • Full on-board address selection • On-board dc/dc conversion (requires only +5 Vdc) • Micromodule and EXORciser bus compatible M68MM05B M68MMOSC 3-31 M68MM05A, B, C MICROMODULE SPECIFICATIONS M68MM06A Analog Input Number Chinn", Input r.nge Istrappable) G.in rlnge Iresistor programmable) Input QYllrvoltage Input Impedance M68MM05B 8 differential 16 single· ended '10mV to' 10V Ito 1000 VIV , 15 V 100 Megohms ! 1 to 1000 VIV ,15 V 100 Megohms 12 bits binary 12 bits binary '0.025~ '0.025~ 10mVto:t lOV Trlnsfer ChlrlCtllriltlCI Resolution Throughput Accuracy , 10 V Range FSR t 10 mV Ringe '0.01~ FSR Temperature Coefficient of Accurecy , 10 V Range ! 10 mV Ringe CMRR Idifferent,al) Conversion Time (MPU , 0.003~ FSRJOC '0.01~ FSRJOC 74 dB Ide to 2 kHz) IS ,0.1~ , , FSR FSR 0.003~ FSRJOC 0.01~ FSR/oC Halted) , 10 V Range , 10 mV Range 33 microseconds 100 microseconds 33 microseconds 100m icroseconds M68MM06C Analog OutpUll Output Voltage Range Illrappable) Output Impedance Settling Time 4 Chlnnels ± 10 V, ± 5V, ± 2.5 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V 1 ohm Less thin 10 microseconds Tran.f.,. Ch.lICterilttcl R.solution Throughput Accuroc:y 12 bits binary '0.0125~ FSR Temper.turt Coefficient of Accuracy Unipolar Bipol. t 0.003~ FSRJOC , 0.0045~ FSRJOC Physical CharlCteristics Height Width Board Thickness 9.75 In. 6.00 in. 0.052 in. Connectors Microsystem bus Stanford Apphed Engineering SAC-430/1-2 or equnl'.'ent Input/Output ports 3M type 3417 or equivalent PRODUCT ORDERING INFORMATION The following tlbl. identifin the options of Micromodule 5. For further information, conlKt your locol sol.. office, PART NO. M88MM05A DESCRIPTION Micromodu). 5A - B·channel, 12·bit dtfferenti.1 input AID converter module with interconnect c.ble assembly M6BMM05B Micromodule 58 - 16-channel. 12·bit single-ended input AID converter module with interconnect cable assembly MBBMMOSC Micromodule 5C - quad 12·bit O/A converter module with Interconnect cable assembly 3-32 M68MM05A, B, C M ICROMODU LE GENERAL DESCRIPTION Micromodules 5A, 8, and C microcomputer peripheral boards provide two necessary system interface functions: analog data acquisition (Micromodules 5A and 58) and analog input (Micromodule 5C). Each analog system is completely contained on a single printed circuit board that is treated as a memory input and output. The analog input for each module is provided by a flat ribbon cable connector located at the opposite edge of the board from the system bus connector. The analog data acquisition modules (Micromodules 5A and 58) provide an a·channel differential analog input or 16·channel single-ended analog input, respectively. A modular data acquisition system is used to implement both Micromodules. This modular data acquisition system includes an input multiplexer, a high gain instrumentation amplifier, a sample/hold circuit, and a 12-bit A/D converter_ In addition, all of the necessary timing, decoding, and control logic is also included in each module. A dc/de converter (+5 Vdc to ± 15 Vdc) is also used to allow the use of the microcomputer's + 5 Vdc power supply. The analog output system (Micromodule 5C) provides four analog output channels. Each analog output is generated by separate on-board 12-bit 0/ A converters. The inputs to these D/A converters are double buffered so that a complete 12·bit word can be simultaneously loaded into the converter's input registers. A dc/dc converter (+5 Vdc to ± 15 Vdc) is also used to allow the use of the microcomputer's + 5 Vdc power supply. 3-33 M68MM05A, B, C MICROMODULE MICROMODULE SA, B -ANALOG INPUT DATA ACDUISITION MODULE t\ ) Al-A4 V ~ .! A5~ w VMA -82 RIW .!! GIH AD '8" E CONTROL AND TIMING LOGIC PElECTION A ENABlEI ~ i DCIDC CONVERTER +5 Vdc A 2-INPUT MUX ~ 3·STATE OUT Gnd 111 N" . .. I ~m".'• ~ ADDRESS DECODER ~ A g .. ..L u a: ox ANALOG MUl TlPLEXER - -Zz » ~» ........ ... '~ WtlT'''lIl"",. <''''''1-'' • • ]v 3-47 SPECIFICATIONS Number of Channels 24, Voltage Input for M68MM13C 24, Contact Closure for M68.MM13D Optically Isolated Input Specifications Voltage Input (Data = One) Greater than 17 V (Data = Zero) Less than 4 V 168 Vrms (max) Maximum Input 84 Vdc (max) On· board, isolated dc/dc Converter Contact Closure Input supplies wetting current supply (M68MM13D only) . 600 Vdc, input·to·microcomputer bus Isolation 300 Vdc, input·to·input Physical Characteristics Width Height Board Thickness Connectors Microsystem bus Input ports 9.75 in. 6.00 in. 0.062 in. Stanford Applied Engineering SAC·43D/1·2 or equivalent 3M type 3415·0001 or equivalent PRODUCT ORDERING INFORMATION The following table provides the ordering information for Micromodules 13C and 13D. For further information, contact your local sales office. PART NO. DESCRIPTION M68MM13C Micromodule 13C - optically isolated digital input module 24 voltage input channels M68MM13D Micromodule 13D - optically isolated digital input module 24 contact closure input channels 3·48 ® ftfiCROSYSTEftfS MOTOROLA M68MM1SA/lSAl MICROMODULE HIGH-LEVEL AID MODULE MICROMODULE 15A,15A1 Micromodules 15A/15A 1 are printed circuit board modules with which high-level analog data may be acquired and converted into a digital format for storage, transmission, or computation. This capability is commonly needed in data logging, industrial automatic test equipment, and a wide variety of industrial control applications. Micromodules 15A/15A 1 accept analog input voltages ranging from 500 mV to 10 volts full scale, and converts them with nominal 12-bit resolution into a digital representa· tion. Micromodule 15A provides 16 single-ended or 8 differential input channels while Micromodule 15A 1 offers 32 single·ended or 16 differential input channels. As with any M6800·based I/O devices, Micromodules 15A/15A 1 and their registers are treated as memory by the system microprocessor since provision is made on board for decoding the 16 address bus signals. An address selection socket allows the required unique base address to be established for the modules through the use of appropriate jumpers. Micromodules 15A/15A 1 are bus compatible with the total Micromodule Family and all Motorola development systems, including the 2.0 MHz EXORciser II. This universality gives the user his choice of many tools with which to develop and debug his system software and hardware. FEATURES • 16 single-ended or pseudo·differential or 8 true-differential analog input channels (MM15A) • 32 single-ended or pseudo-differential or 16 true-differential analog input channels (MM15A1) • A/D converter of 12-bit nominal resolution • Full scale inputs of 0 to +5 Vdc, 0 to +10 Vdc, i5 Vdc, i 10 Vdc (strap options) • Software programmable gain amplifier: factors of Xl, X2, X4, or X8 • Software section of operating mode: Halt during conversion, Interrupt at end of conversion, software or external trigger start of conversion • Single + 5 Vdc operation, on·board dc·to·de converter provides ± 15 Vdc • Address, data and control bus buffers for interface with EXORciser/Micromodules 3-49 GENERAL DESCRIPTION Micromodule 15A/15A 1 provides the capability for converting high·level analog signals into a 12·bit representation. The module comprises analog input multiplexers; means (strappable option) for operating withsingle'ended, pseudo-differential or truedifferential inputs; means (strappable option) for choosing unipolar 5 or 10 volt full scale or choosing bipolar ±5 or ± 10 volt full scale input levels. A software program· mabie gain ampl ifier offering gain factors of Xl, X2, X4 or X8; and A/D converter of nominal 12·bit resolution; a 5·volt to ± 15·volt·dc to dc converter; and TTL compatible buffers for the system address, control, and data busses are also provided. Use of appropriate jumpers in address select socket U10 establishes address bits A2, A3, A4, A 11, A 12, A 13, A 14 and A 15 as true or false enable signals in order to set the module's base address. This may be set anywhere in the range 0500 to FD1C, hexadecimal. Sequential memory locations for the module's four addressable registers are assigned automatically when the module's base address is established. The four registers accessible to the user are used for: a. Gain/Mux address b. Command/Status address c. Output data, high byte d. Output data, low byte Wire wrap terminals allow selection of the module's input configuration and input voltage range options. Choice of output code, straight binary or two's complement, is also made using wire wrap terminals. Once the base address, type of analog input and outRut code are set for the module, the user may program each register as desired. The GAl N/MUX register provides channel selection and gain. The COMMAN DIST A TUS register provides the programmer with control of the mode of operation and module status information. The OUTPUT DATA registers store the data from the last conversion of the A/D. Means of calibrating the programmable gain amplifier, adjusting the AID converter offset and adjusting the A/D conllerter gain as well as troubleshooting test points are also provided on Micromodule 15A/15A 1. 3-50 SPECIFICATIONS Power Requirements +5Vdc 15% @ 1.2 A (max.) Micromodule Bus Signals Address Bus TTL compatible buffered input Control Bus TTL compatible buffered input Data Bus Module Input TTL compatible buffered input Module Output TTL compatible buffered output Analog Input (P1 and P2) Operating (Signal plus common mode voltage) -10.24 V to + 10.24 V Maximum, continuous without damage 30 V Impedance >100 megohms Current 1 nA (typical) at 25° C. 80 nA (max.) at 70° C. Capacitance 10 pF (max.) off channel 600 pF (max.) differential 1200 pF (max.) single-ended AID Conversion Resolution 12 bits Relative Accuracy (Linearity) ±0.03% FSR Quantization Error ±1/2 LSB 3 Sigma Noise 0.01% FSR + 0.5 mV referred to input Stability Tempco of Linearity <6 PPM FSRfC Tempco of Gain <13 PPM FSRf C at Gain of 1 <30 PPM FSRf C at Gains of 2, 4, or 8 Tempco of Offset <25 PPM FSRf C Conversion Time 40 microseconds maximum Operating Temperature 0° to 70° C Physical Characteristics Width x Height 9.75 in. x 5.75 in. Board Thickness 0.062 in. Bus Mating Connector Types 86-Pin Connector (1) Stanford Applied Engineering SAC-43D/1-2 or equivalent 50-Pin Connector (2) Viking 3VH25/1JN5 or equivalent 3-51 PRODUCT ORDERING INFORMATION Use the part numbers below when ordering Micromodule 15A or Micromodule 15A 1: PART NO. DESCRIPTION M68MM15A High· Level AID Module 15A is a 16·channel single'ended input or strap selected 8·channel differential input 12·bit analog·to·digital converter. M68MM15Al High- Level AID Module 15A 1 is a 32-channel single-ended input or strap selected 16-channel differential input 12-bit analog-todigital converter. EX TEAI'IIAL TRIGGEFt '15v AUDRES~ DATA 3-52 15 .. ® MICROS YS TEMS MOTOROLA M68MMl5CV/lSCI MICROMODULE ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE MICROMODULE 15CV/15CI Micromodules 15CV /15CI are printed circuit board modules with which digital information may be converted into voltage or current for interfacing analog equipment. This function is needed to provide the display and control signals required for a wide variety of measurement and control application. All the M68MM15CV voltage output and the M68MM15CI current output modules accept 12·bit TTL·compatible inputs for conversion and are available in versions offering from one to four channels. The output range-O to + 10 Vdc, ± 10 Vdc, 0 to +5 Vdc or ±5 Vdc-of the voltage modules is selected by jumper. Output range of the ~urrent modules is 4 to 20 mAdc. As with any M6800·based device, Micromodules 15CV /15CI and their registers are treated as memory by the system microprocessor, since provision is made on board for decoding the 16 address bus signals. An address selection socket allows the required unique base address to be established for the module through the use of appropriate jumpers. Micromodules 15CV /15CI are bus compatible with the total Micromodule Family and all Motorola development systems, including the 2.0 MHz EXORciser II. This universality gives the user his choice of many tools with which to develop and debug his system software and hardware. 3-53 FEATURES • One to four 12-bit Digital-to-Analog-Converter (DAC) channels per module • Full-scale output voltages: 0 to + 10 Vdc, ± 10 Vdc, 0 to +5 Vdc and ±5 Vdc, each channel M68MM15CV series (strap option) • Natural binary or two's complement input code (strap option) • 4 to 20 mAdc output M68MM15CI series (strap option) • Strap selectable module base memory address, 0500 to FD3F hexadecimal • Single +5 Vdc operation, on board dc-to-dc converter provides ± 15 Vdc • Address, data, and control bus buffers for interface with EXORciser/Micromodules GENERAL DESCRIPTION The 15C series of Micromodules converts 12-bit digital input data into an equivalent voltage or current for output to analog equipment_ Micromodules M68MM 15CV 1 through M68MM 15CV4 provide one to four channels of analog output voltage, respectively. Micromodules M68MM15Cll through M68MM15C14, respectively, provide one to four channels of analog output current or analog output voltage. Each module contains address bus buffers and address decoding logic for each on board DAC, data bus buffers and latches to hold a 12-bit input word, and the DAC or DACs for converting this information into an equivalent analog output. The unique base address within the system memory map required for each on board DAC is established by the user through the installation of appropriate jumpers on an address socket on the module. The user's choice of either offset binary or two's complement as the module's input code and his choice of output polarity and range are set via wire-wrap connections between the appropriate pins on the module. The Analog Output Modules contain provisions for calibrating reference and output voltages and output currents in order to obtain the highest accuracy for a specific application. Calibration is made using standard laboratory test equipment. 3-54 SPECIFICATIONS Power Requirements Micromodule Bus Address Bus Control Bus Data Bus Module Input Analog Output (voltage) Range + 5 Vdc ~ 5% @ 600 mA plus 220 mA/channel (max) TTL compatible buffered input TTL compatible buffered input TTL compatible buffered input Strap selectable; 0 to + 10 V, ± 10 V, to +5 V, ±5 V 0.012% o Linearity Stability Drift @O V Drift @ Full-Scale Noise (3 sigma with 100 kHz filter) Output Impedance Output Capacitance Output Current Slew Rate (no external capacitance) Analog Output (current, MM 15CI) Range Compliance Voltage ISA Standard Linearity Stability Offset Full-Scale Noise Slew R~te Fault Protection Open Circuit Voltage Reverse Polarity Overvoltage Transient 110Vac RMS 40 ppm FSR/oC (max) 50 ppm FSR/oC (max) 1 mV RMS 0.2 Jmax) at dc 750 pF (max) ±5 mA (max) 10 V /microsecond (max) n 4 to 20 mAdc 9V Type 4, non-isolated Class L with Internal supply Class U with external supply 0.01% 40 ppm FSR/oC (max) 55 ppm FSR/oC (max) 1 iJ-A RMS 2 mA/microsecond (min) Loop Supply Voltage No damage for less than - 200 Vdc No damage for less than + 200 Vdc No damage for at least 5 minutes Operating Temperature 0 0 to 70 0 C Physical Characteristics Width X Height Board Thickness 9.75 inches X 5.75 inches 0.062 inches Bus Mating Connector Types 86-Pin Connector (1) 50-Pin Connector (2) Stanford Applied Engineering SAC43,D11-2 or equivalent Viking 3VH25/1JN5 or equivalent 3-55 PRODUCT ORDERING INFORMATION Use the part numbers below when ordering Micromodule 15CV /15CI. PART· NO. DESCRIPTION M68MM15CV1 High·Level Voltage D/A Module 15CV1 is a single·channel, 12-bit digital-to-analog converter of strap selectable unipolar or bipolar, 5 or 10 Vdc output with zero adjust and full-scale adjust potentiometers. M68MM15CV2 High-Level Voltage D/ A Module 15CV2 is a dual-channel" version of Micromodule 15CV 1. M68MM15CV3 High-Level Voltage D/A Module 15CV3 is a three-channel version of Micromodule 15CV 1. M68MM15CV4 High-Level Voltage D/A Module 15CV4 is a four-channel version of M icromodu Ie 15CV 1. M68MM15Cl1 Current D/A Module 15CI1 is a single-channel, 12-bit digital-to-analog converter of strap selectable 4 to 20 mAdc output or unipolar or bipolar 5 or 10 Vdc output with zero adjust and full-scale adjust potentiometers. The module has a 9-volt compliance voltage and the current output will meet ISA type 4 non-isolated current transmitter requirements. M68MM15CI2 Current D/A Module 15C 12 is a dual-channel version of Micromodule 15C11. M68MM15CI3 Current D/A Module 15CI3 is a three-channel version of Micromodule 15C11. M68MM15CI4 Current D/A Module 15CI4 is a four-channel version of Micromodule 15CI1. v ro I" OUT RTN OUT 07 DATA BUS CONTROL BUS ADDRESS BUS 3·56 "M6BMM1SCI ® M68SACI MOTOROLA POLYVALENT DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM STAND·ALONE COMPUTER STAND·ALONE COMPUTER The M68SAC1 is a complete computer system that fits on a Single printed CirCUit board, thus providing significant benefits in cost and size over rnult,board sys~ms. The crystal controlled clock CirCUit provides the Stand-Alone Computer with the ca"ability of working with dynamic memories and slow memOrIes. The clock circuit also generates the basic timing Signal used by the module's baud rate generator. 8y setting jumpers, the user can tailor the module to work in different configurations to economically suit his n€eds • Four B-blt parallel Input/Output Ports and Control Lines for Perrpheral Interfacing • Two asynchronous Input/Output Ports with one RS232.CITTLI TTY Current Loop interface • 384 bytes of RAM • Three MCM6B70B or equivalent AROM/ROM Socket~_ • One MCM6B30 ROM Socket • 9216KHz on-board crystal controlled clock generator • No rest"ctlon on Interrupt capability • On board real-time clock capability • Four lumper selectable vectolS addre,,"s. • Fully buffered Three-State Bus Connector • Fully compatlhle with all EXORciser modules 8'/ acid.nq nrltHms. the Stand-Alone Computr., can hr upgrJdl'd t S • Full" Independant dl<,plav refrf'sh • 128-characler set Options: Paqe Format M68DIM1 M68DIM2 M68DIM6 16 hnes of 32 characters 16 lines of 32 characlerc:; 64 cl,aractPfs 2~, 16 lines of 10 (maqnlfil"r) Memory 512-bvte 512 55.25 MHz (channel 591 25 MHz (channel E3. VHF) E36. UHF) byte 1024·byle capacity HF modulatfJf N.A. BLOCK DIAGRAM DISPLAY MEMORY • Ophon.ll ---B-----~~;: 3·59 M68DIM. MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Specification Value On· board memory. 512 bytes (XOOO' to X1FF)/1024 bytes (XOOO' to X3FF) Address Bus Data Bus Control Bus TTL voltage compatible Three·state TTL voltage compatible TTL voltage compatible Video signal 75S!, 0.5 V, composite, 625 lines positive or negative modulation 601'2,5 mV, 55.25/591.25 MHz HF Signal (M68DIM1 and M68DIM2\ Page size Character generator 16 lines of 32 characters 96 ASCII characters, 32 Greek characters, 7 x 9 matrix Character·per·character Selectable (8th bit) white·on·black or black·on·white display. Power Requirements +5Vdcat1.5A ; 12 Vdc at 70 mA Operating temperature O"C to 55"C Dimensions Width Height Thickness PC Thickness 248 mm 165 mm 27 mm 1.6mm 9.75,n. 6.5 In. 11 tn. 0.062 In. • Jumper selectable. Recommended Firmware M6810S1 The Input/Output Supervisor provides an efficient means of driving the Display Interface Module. See M6810S1 Datasheet for detailed description. MCM6571 CHARACTER GENERATOR PATTERN r ·,1·,· ...'· •. 4' ... ' ... ',,, ' . . . . . ",. "J ""'",,._ MOTO~OLA Semiconductor Products Inc_ 3-60 ® M68MDMl MOTOROLA 5" DISPLAY MONITOR POLYVALENT DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM 5" DISPLAY MONITOR The M68MDMI modular 5 inch display provides versatile performance features, contained on plug-in boards and modules, and placed in a compact chassis that fits right into terminals, which require a small, distinctly readable display, Solid State: All components (except the picture tube) are completely transistorized. Signal Inputs: Composite video. DC Power: The M68MDMI operates on 12V DC at less than one amp, mak ing it independent of international power consideratians. Resolution: Video response to 12 MHz and the excellent geometry and small spot size of the picture tube combine to assure 650-line horizontal resolution for sharp picture detail. Seviceability: 99 0 /0 of the module circuitry is contained on two easily removable printed circuit boards for simple, expedient field maintenance. PDS SPECIFICATIONS Value MDM1 Picture tuhe 5" 1127 mml diagonal viewing area 13 deflection angle 55 0 phosphor P4 SQ. In, f84 cm 2 ) Input Signal composite video O.5V to 2.5V, 75n, negative modulation Video response 3<1B. 10 Hz to 12 MHz Resolution 650 lines center 500 corners Geometric' ci!..,tOlllon 1!lneanty --------- Hlqh Voltdge HOII/notdl blanking Interval .. S( drPlIIl4 _----- 9,5 KV at 50 JJ.A beam current, nominal 11 J.1S reqUired lrp.lIuP'\cy I1IH I/onl<1l vel tical POV\lt'I -- Iln~(, less than 2 % RequlIPrnpnt Opp1dllnq tf>lllj..)f"t,jIUff' IS 720 Hz ± 500 Hz 50 Hz 12 Vdt at 900 mA O"C to 55"e ACCESSORIES ()"nen\,OIl" helghl 117 mill wHjth 131 dppth lJ4111m 111'11 M68DMC1 3-61 Display cabinet for 5" CRT M88MDM1 300 Toti B.ono"~ , 5~O ~ / Top MTG -- - -- F 'i~ "00""00 OO~,~ '8 SELF TAPPING SCREWS - :-I --- - I I ~. I 9182 MAX 234 700 178 MTG TOP & BOnOM J 1 27~ 03 _-'t" Front r--" 4 88 _ '244 '!' "" 14 MAX 4 06 -t O1"_t~_~, 1 ii t- t' 470 MA.X 119 t I 'I lIt~i$2~'~ '" . } ~.:m ' ]\1 , 230" "" IIIbW. Side _ 875 MAX L<'2 --~ ~ . ~ lJ'11-I .__ ® I~ t, 1 ,~ t .; I ttl , t , J' MOTOROLA S""niconductor Products Inc. 3-62 ® M68MDM9 MOTOROLA 9" DISPLAY MONITOR POLYVALENT DEVELOPMENT SYSTEM 9" DISPLAY MONITOR The M68MDM9 modular 9 Inch dISplay proVides versatile performance features, contained on plug-in boards and modules, and placed in a compact chasSIS that fits light into terminals, which require a dIStinctly readable dlSplay_ Solid State: All components I'except the picture tube) are completely tranSistorlZed_ Signal Inputs: Composite video, DC Power: The M68MDM9 operates 011 12V DC at less than olle amp. makmg it independent of international powel considefdtJOnS Resolution: Video response to 12 MHz and the excellent geometry and small spot sIZe of the picture tube combine to assure 650-11"" hOrizontal resolution for snarp picture detail. Sev,ceabil,ty: 99 0 '0 of the rnodule circuitry IS contained on two easily rernovable pi inted CifCU It boards for Simple, expedient held maintenance. PDS MDM9 SPEC I FICA liONS Value SpeCification Prctuft' tut)e dragon.)) ':;) \"IE'wlny (lIPd 44 sq del1eLlIo 1 I)hcsphOI ·2}Rrnrn\ !7H4 II UT':' ~}t) '=1I'~le ()4 input slgn'll COrTlp0<;'lle vl(11"(J \1H/ V,deo re!'.pnn<;p H€'~Olutl(Jl1 6bO SOU center CQrnpr\ Gt'Omel r Il d:~l·:)r '''le~ 101 .. :<' It" 5 th,J" l,on I,neafrly 2() <) t- - < HOI,zontdl hlClnkrny ,rHer val ScarHllng frequency hOrilont<.lJ vertical PalNer ReQulr~tnenl ~5 720 H..' .0- 5,:}O)-l: 50 Hz 12 Vue ill )OU "'A Operatlllg tf:'mJ,.>erdture DimenSions height width depth ACCESSORIES 1K4 rTlm 241 rr'l1Tl M6~[WC9 241 mm 36KyiNel i 3-63 D,\play Cl:Ib, rlP.: tor q l:HT M68MDM9 Top ~, ,-- 21 X ~OS! aT 9062 2.10 -4531 ~).1.\ ~--~- 1 948 1 I 241 1 : I I L 175 950 __ - _._ 241 Side 725 'h350· 1 -, 89 r, 11 __ ---':"---+---L ~n~~-~ ~'~ 5 , 10. /' --1. ~ii .. ,1: __ ~-~~ ~ ' 1 _____ ! r.;--J - --" 1,( I;iff'''~! _'1_- \ 35811 i) III -!,! _]$/' 91 L~~~ r $ _1_' I l '_ 31 50 CRT angle standard - '_ ; _ ~=------ 1 18 )0 ~ 0 0 and 10 0 adap table ® MOTOROLA Se,";conduc~or Produc~s Inc. 3-64 @ MOTOROLA SUBSYSTEMS DC Power Supplies Series Regulated Triple Output • Remote Sensing on +5 V • Foldback Current Limiting on All Outputs with Automatic Recovery • Overvoltage Protection on All Outputs • 50°C Full Load Rating (70% of Rated Current at 70 0 q Convection Cooled Excellent Ripple and Regulation Parameters One-Year Warranty 100% Burn-In Open Frame Construction Designed with All Metal Hermetically-Sealed Output Transistors Aluminum Heat Sink and Chassis 50 /J. sec Transient Response No Voltage Overshoot on Turn-On, Turn-Off or Power Failure Integrated Circuit Regulation Fully Isolated Independent Outputs for Either Positive or Nc;gative Operation Reverse Voltage Diode Protection on All Outputs PLTBOO PLTB10 PLTB20 These triple output power supplies are designed to provide +5 volts dc at Z. 4, or 6 amps, respectively. for microprocessors and other IC logic, :19 to tl2 volts dc at 0.3, 0.7, and 1.0 amps, respectively. for memory systems. operational amplifiers. A-to-D conv~rters and other analog systems. Throughout the design cycle particular attention was given to thermal layout, resulting in a unit featuring conservative ratings and inherent reliability. Each supply is capable of providing rated load current on all three outputs simultaneously at 50°C ambient. Specifications AC Input (Sin." Ph ... l Device Number DC Output (Rated Loadl II~ Vac .10%. lully rattd Irom 47 to 63 Hz ... ith jumper option lor 130 Vac .10% Input. PlT800 .~ Vdc .o.s Vdc @1 A .9 to .11 Vdc @ 0.3 A .9 to dl Vdc @ 0.3 A Shon-Clrcult Current Load Replatlon Line RflUlatlon Output Ripple T ernper.ture C ~mdent Oven-oIl.le Protec1ion lsol.tion Remote SeRlinl (+S \' output only) TransHn. Respol\M' Ambient Temper.ture PlT81 0 PlTI20 +S Vdt .O.S Vdt @ 4 A .910.11 Vdc @ 0.7 A .910.11 Vdc @ 0.7 A .9 to .11 Vdc@1.0A .9 to .11 Vdc @ 1.0 A +S Vdc .O.S Vdc @ 6 A +5 Volt output + 5 V oIt output 1.25 A ma .. 0.6 A max I.IAm.. t9 to til Volt outputs t9 10 tl2 Volt outpub 19 to tl2 Volt outputs 0.3 A m.. O.IS A m.. 0.4 A max 0.1% m.. (no load to luilioadl - All outputs to.I% ma .. (t1O% Line Variation) - All outputs 1.5 mV RMS max. 5 mV pop m.. 0.015%I'C max Pro\'ided on an oulputs. The +5 Volt output is HI at 6.2 Vde to.4 Vdc. The *9 to tl2 Volt outputs an Ht al 13.7 Vde t1.1 Vde. I~ Va( applied input 10 output. inpul to chassis. output to chassis. e om~Mation ror up to 0.5 Vde drop in interronnectinl leach. Output ~ol'ale will recour within relulation limits in 50 /.J sec ma" in response to • 50% load step. Operatinl: to +50 v C .t full r.ted load. derated linearly to 70% at +70°(. +5 Volt output - oar 3-65 DC Power Supplle. PLT800,PLT810,PLT820 ~I. OUlput Vahllg• ..... r ~-;" +5 00 OUlput Cu...., IAmpI 20 03 03 '0 ,9 .12 .9 to .12 10 L l--= 20 .9 to .12 .9 to .12 40 07 07 +5 60 is to .12 ,,9to.12 '0 10 +5 I Outline Drawings PLT800 1 1J U:J:~~~>~>i,~~~~~~~~~~=:::~I '0' ••53 1-------- ':" CnaS51S F ,n,sh Black AnodIzed unltWe,gnt laplJfo)() 1:4, ~4 ----------1 J 21b! 11.5 kgl -:j ·E~ , 58 8382 Term,n;>1 a'HI Potent,ometer Locations are relatIve and not to scale Factory Connected For 115 V OperatIon o ':, ;' ~~J 3-66 DC Power su,pne. PL 800,PLT810,PLT820 PLT810 are relative and not to scale Unit Well~ht (approx)" 6.1 Ibs (2.8 ",,,I - Input Jumper 115V 1. 3, 2 4 230 v 2 J Factory Connect~ For 115 V Operation ~----------------------- '~',~. ------------- - Q ,~~, Q- J~ 1~ .~l' PLT820 are relat:"e and not to scate ---------------------- '-,'-06-,'-0. Un" We'ghT 'apP'oll:l Ad (j"""8nSlon<; Q,vell itS ---------------------1 8 21bs 13 7 kgl .nches Factorv Connected For 115 V Op.r.tion - ~ ~37 o [] 1 ~, ) 4 "J 00 I 3 ~" ----------' ! I I --: ----.-.== -~ 3-67 )'~ 0, .. MIg Hole ® MOTOROLA SUBSYSTEMS DC Power Supplies Series Regulated Triple Output • Remote Sensing on +5 V • Foldback Current Limiting on All Outputs with Automatic Recovery • Overvoltage Protection on All Outputs • 50°C Full Load Rating (with 50 CFM forced air cooling) (70% of Rated Current at 70°C) • Eight Millisecond Hold Up Time After Line Drop Out (PLT841) • Fully Isolated Outputs • Excellent Ripple and Regulation Parameters • One-Year Warranty • 100% Burn-In • Open Frame Construction • All Metal Hermetically-Sealed Output Transistors • Aluminum Heat Sink and Chassis • 50 !J sec Transient Response • No Voltage Overshoot or Undershoot on Turn-On. Turn-Off or Power Failure • Integrated Circuit Regulation PLT840 PLT841 These triple output power supplies are designed to provide +5 volts de at 15 amps for microprocessors and other IC logic, + 12 volts and -12 volts at 2.5 amps and 1.5 amps. respectively. for memory systems, operational amplifiers. A-to-D converters and other analog systems. Throughout the design cycle particular attention was given to thermal layout. resultmg in a unit featuring conservative ratings and inherent reliability. Specifications Adj •• ment Rani' 10 12!'i VIC. fully rattd from 47 to 420 Hl, ",jlh jumper option for 190 to 2~ Vu input. Rlltd I.oad with SO C""M forcH air coolinc: .5 Vd, @ 15 Amp' '12 \dc @ 2.5 Amp' ·Il \"d< @ I.~ Amps .~ Volts to.~ "de +12 Volls 1:0.5 Vdc 12 Volts to.5 Vd4: l.Glld Rtlulalion O.I~ AC Input (~in&1< PhaHI DC Out put (R at.d 1.000d I tiM Relullrion Output Rippl~ T emperalurt ( oeffie-ifnl O"ef'lOltlCf P'C!Ift'tion ~ho'I-( ircuit ( urrenl Hold I P 1 im. (P1.n41 onlYI Remote !\en\inl;" ~ \ outpul onl) J T ranSitnl Rnponw Ambitnt T fmpf'rlturf 9~ mix (no IOld 10 tuillo.d) - All outputs foor full Inpul VOilief Variation: .~ \'de s:O.I% mu -12 Vdc to.O~~ mn 2 m\ RM~ max. 10 mV p.p mill; (-~ Volt ,",pp.,.. I mV MMS ma •. ~ mV p.p mu (112 Volt ""ppli") O.O~'JI./ ( ,;,.. I' ..... 12 \ de .In.O~ok mi. Pro"idt'd on III outpUI\. Thr • ~ \ olt flulput I' t..2 \ de to 4 \- de Thr -12 \011 uutpul\ Irt ,el 111.1.7 "de tI.l Vde. -5 Vult ()ulpUI - ~.O 4.mp' mi. -12 \ (lit OUlpul - 0.1 Amp.. mil -12 Volt outpul - O.~ Amp .. mil M.O m"i (Q.l 9~ "Ie Inpul lin. Ind mill rllrd IUld - All outpuh Inldrd ,imultlnruu,l." I~ "'Ir 'pp!it'd inpul Itl Hulpul, input I.. fha., .. i,. nulpul If) rha'i~I' ( omp~m..uun ror up Ih 0 ~ \' dr drop in inlrrrflnnrrtlnit Irlld\. Output ",)I'ICf' ""ill rf'CnHr within rrgul'lIon limih In ~~ 'f'C mM, In '~J}(m\t' 1111 ~()t:y, IUld \Irp ()ptrllln!' 0 ( 10 • ~O· ( III rull r."d thad. d.,. ...d linrarl\ tIl 70q If ·70 ( "f'f- dnMlln1t flU ~f' "lOrIC'. ·40 ( lu • HS ( 3-68 DC Power Su,p ..e. PL 840,PLT841 DERATING CURVE Curve 1 . >- l00%~----------------------------------~ ~ ~ e0)::~ - ~ 70% 5 E u ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ Curve 2 ~ SCo 50%~"--------------------------------------~~ ~ g 35% .2 M __ 5 OOC 1O"C 2O"C TA' AMBIENT TEMPERATURE IOC) Cur"e 1 - WI1h 50 CFM Forced Air Cooling Curve 2 - Convection Cooling Outline Drawings Unit Weight (appro x) : 11 Ibs 15 Kg) ChassIs Finish: Black Anodized PLT840 mm 222.25 B:75 All dimensions g.ven as - inches OutPu1 ~OIA __ 0.201 "'-,14 PLCS) ~_!~ 0181 X ~5~ --r,-Io.rr"""" QUick Connect :_:.i__ _ c_;~-~_Q _ -- 0.020 Term,"_' on 9. 525 Cen r.t" 0315 ~~nWL~=:C:'~ 940T 037 Chell'. --- Terml".1 FunctIon 14 -12 V Return 13 -12 V 12 .5 V 11 +5 V Se" .. 10 +5 V R.turn 9 .. 5 V Retu,n Sen .. 8 .. 12 V 1 +'2 V R.turn 177.BO .--'----+--~ 700 ( InPf.'t ( JurnrH r I 3-4.5-6 4-5 110V Gnd I OutPut leon,nal SHIP, Beffle r on 1,. ~ 1~ Center, 0438 VOlfage Adjustments lWh,te Knob Pott 3-69 230 V ( DC Power Su,plies PL 840,PLT841 Unit Weight (approxl. 11 Ibs (5 Kg) ChaSSIs Finish" Black Anodized mm 10 PLT841 AJI dimenSions given as - - 32 MIg Thd Inches 14 PLCS) Output T erIT"nal on 9 52~ Cenlel ~ 30 W Ma)ll. FAN Fa"': LOiJtj rAN o 3 7~ AC ,n I 940 037 I Tern' ,nal, 12 Pin Male Connector (AmJ'l Jt.021] 1 or eQuI .... 1 Voltage Artluslf"Ilena IWh .Ie I( Function 3 4 +S V Sense +12 V Return 5 + 5 V Return Sense 6 7 and 9 -12 V Return nob Pot, 3-70 +5 V +5 V Return 8 -12 V 10 +12V 11 and 12 Not Uled Input I noV Cind Ou~put Termlna' 1 and 2 230 V Jumper 3-4,5-6 4-5 ® MOTOROLA SUBSYSTEMS Sol id-State Relays Chassis Mount • Zero Voltage Switching • Photo Isolated • Improved Input Characteristics • Integrated Circuit Compatible • High Output Transient Immunity • Shock and Vibration Resistant • High Surge Rating M120D05A • Designed to Meet UL and CSA Requirements M120D10A M240D05A • All Solid-State M240D10A • Standard Package Dimensions. This series of devices is specifically designed to provide reliable solid-state switching of high power ac loads. Units feature a choice of 120 or 240 Vac. 60 Hz line voltage ratings and output current ratings of either 5 or 10 amperes. All devices are optically isolated and utilize zero voltage turn-on and zero current turn-off to minimize line voltage transients. In addition, particular attention has been given to improving input characteristics. These units are ideally suited for applications requiring interface from digital logic families to ac loads such as solenoids, motors, transformers, lamps. heaters, timers, etc. Typical applications include machine tool control. computer peripherals, process control, traffic control, business machines. heating controls, autematic test equipment and sequential power control circuits. Electrl~al Specifications Input Specification. (at _40° C to +80° C unle•• otherwl.e lpeclfled) Min Plrlmeter c ontrol Volt.l~ Rancr Input Current (at ~ 3 M •• .12 5.0 3.0 V Control Voltaec) Turn-On Voltacr Turo"O" \' olt~Ct 1.0 10' lsol.tion (Input to Output, Input to Cau. Output 10 CUt) Capacit.nce (Input to Output) Rntl'H VoltlCf Protection Ditl.",ri. Str.ncth (Inpul 10 OUlput. Input to C.... Output to C... ) 10 ~ Unit. Vd. mA Vdr Vd. Ohms pF Vdr V•• (RMS) 60 Hz 1500 Output Speclfcatlon. (at 25° C unle •• otherwl.e .peclfled) Output (urrent Ratine (See Ficure J): MIZOD05A. M240D05A , MI20DIOA. M240DIOA lint VoltaCf Ratinc: MIZOD05A. MIZODIOA M240D05A. M240DIOA frrqutncy Rance Peak Surce CUlTtn., Sincle-Cyt'lr. 60 HI (Mounlinc Bast Temperalurr :: "80°('; Se, ,,'jeur, 4): MIZOD05A. M240D05A MI20DIOA. M240DIOA Ol'rnolllCt Ratinc: MIZOD05A. MI20DIOA M240D05A. M240DIOA Con.ad VoltlCf Drop (at Rated Current) Orr-SI.I. l •• k.C. Curronl (T A ' -400 C 10 '800 n: AI 140 Va. (RMS): M120D05A. M120DIOA At 280 Var (RMS): M240DOSA. M240DIOA Orr-SI.I. dv/ dl Turn-On Tim. (60 Hz) Turn-Orr Time (60 Hz) Thermal Rtsislance. Junction 10 Bau (Sf. Figure 3) 10 41 140 v•• IRMS) 280 VI< IRMS) 10 ~ 10 300 600 1.6 1.1 100 H. Ape.k Apeak Vpe.k Vpe.k Vpe.k mA IRMS) mA IRMS) \//. r- - ......... ' -- .......... flit AI' - Moumlng .......... ~- "- ---- - o 70 60 40 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE fOCI 80 NUMBER Of CYCLES 3·72 Solid-State Re.ay. M120D05A,M120D10A, M240D05A,M240D10A J., I";" 'I I 750 ,','c. o. 0250 ~ M •• "0'" • 2 pO<, .--H'q",-4+-1J. _I 14 29 056] f-oo--- ~7B~~ - - -.....~ • B3 I I L ,- I I 0190 T~.J -r 2088 0822 L~, ArTlb,efll Temp.rall.. ,. Range 40°C to -aoOc 40°C to ·1 aoOe Operat,ng Storage Un,t Weight IApP'OMI S,.nOa·d MO(j.'~ 110 grams are f ... ,n,shed '/"/lth Saddle Clamps 1"4 Oulck Connect Term'nal, Mav be suOU,tuted on ReQuest All oj,,...-,ens,ons 9,,,en as .T":" ,nC"e, WIRING DIAGRAM DC ContrOl Source 3-73 t ~ 0944 i ® MOTOROLA SUBSYSTEMS Solid-State Relays PC Mount • • • • • • • Zero Voltage Switching Photo Isolated Integrated Circuit Compatible Shock and Vibration Resistant High Overvoltage Rating All Solid-State Built-In Snubber Network. The P Series offers reliable solid-state switching featuring low profile construction MP12002 for printed circuit board mounting with MP12003 greater packaging density. The series consists of MP24002 MP24003 both 2- and 3-ampere versions and 120- and 240-volt units. The M P Series offers the same electrical characteristics in a vertical mount package featuring only a 0.68 square inch footprint. P12002 P12003 P24002 P24003 Electrical Specifications Input Specification. P.r.meter Min Unite T urn-On Voltact' Turn-Oft' Volt.le Vd. Vd. I,.. ~Oh.... Slln.1 Inpul Imped.nu Di.I.nl 25 100 ------ ----- -----------------------LogIc Suppl'( Vo luge O~~rdlln9 Temperature Range "A ___ r--__ -.!_O___ . r----- mA 04 Output Voltage Drop 4 ~ 40 HOle! Down Sc.e ..... f - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - r - - - -=-'------+----'--_; Turn Off Tim!;! I~~ __ Voll de -6 0 Volts de -4010180 1.25 ~~, .------,-!-r 6 ~Q.-=t==~¥ DC -------~------ ~l.ei:lkaqe Cur,pnt ul l.m't SWItches. Ea OlrTIenSlons In .nches ~-------------------------------------------------~ 3-77 1 ® MOTOROLA IDes DC INPUT -LOGIC OUTPUT ISOLATION MODULE FOR MICROPROCESSOR INTERFACING SUBSYSTEM PRODUCTS INPUT-OUTPUT MODULE The IDCS DC Input Module Interfaces industflal DC Signaling voltages with microprocessor Input circuits. while providing high impedance Isolation between the two systems. These modules, together with others from the IOM5 family, proVide a means of serving all the Input-output requirements of a microprocessor or computer-based control system_ Card level systems uSing IOMS modules will serve the Motorola EXORcisor system and micromodule product line. Features: • Solid State Reliability • Compatible With all 5-volt logic families CMOS, TTL, LS, NMOS and PMOS • Dllectly compatible with standard microprocessor • Meets U L Isolc1tlOll ReqlJlrements • COfTlPdt'bli~ • Nf'w St,Hiddld Package and Pin-Outs Input output requirements Second Source Available SPECIFICATIONS ~ ___________R_._t_'"~9~ _____________~~ _____V_._'U_.____~-----U--"'-·t----~ Input Line Voltage 10-32 Volts de Input Currl~1l1 Isolation Input to Output CiJ~at:'tanu> Inr..hll to Output 34 mA Maximum 1500 Volts ac (rms) 8 pF Maximum mAO AllowalJle Input fOr No Output Turn-On T,me Tvfl'r~1 4 6 Output CUllen! Down Screw m, M 1-----~-+,-I--I--+~-+_~~+-+_+_+_+_~ 301-----J1 30 •• ~--~~-+'t- r-i- 43~----t-~~ •• I-----_+~_+--1 .. 411---- '---- 33KU (~ (~(~ fl(~'(~I(~ldrl(~¥ (~(~I(~ (~,( I~r· u_ Inn",_'. Juonper l,filc,1 SCHEMATIC 3-81 s: en -a DIMENSION DRAWING 0) 2 Term,na' Barr •• , SfrlD / '0'. L .... Supply Inpu, -1 rH- 0T0 __ -, 1 lfli I l_··_ ··r-t-' 88.110 3.iO (,.) eX> I\) I ", 8 .• ' 1:1i ""-- Arranged.o Accommodate 50 Contact Key Sial !.~ ~R.'.".' C.rd Edge ConneCIor (3M Part #3415 005 ur 3 J .. U "6 Plesl eQulv) LED St.tul I Indicator f !l1'1I' A \111'11' R III'U 'n'P 'n'Ij)IIII,g ~lI'r: 'II' r;a~IIII5JI"'1iJ 'jjlljllljj' tiIIlillRIIII"1 S"".ged Standoff Thru Hole ~~~ I- 0,.15 Plcsl ____________.____ + ___________ Q 1~~: I mm All dImenSions g'ven as --_ ... '!,ches 150 166.37 7i5 - - - - - ,..OS I 1 G.75 55." 2.20 ~
Source Exif Data:File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Create Date : 2014:02:12 20:52:56+01:00 Creator : Adobe Acrobat 11.0.6 Modify Date : 2014:07:21 19:19:21-07:00 Title : XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Metadata Date : 2014:07:21 19:19:21-07:00 Creator Tool : Adobe Acrobat 11.0.6 Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:8700ca73-bba7-44e6-8b3b-5fa7914fdca7 Instance ID : uuid:c2a241d8-77a5-c34a-91d0-b55e1803730b Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.55 Paper Capture Plug-in Page Layout : SinglePage Page Count : 256EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools